Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutEdge Development Inc; 2007-06-05; PWS07-13ENG (3)SECTION 15800 HEATING. VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 01 DESCRIPTION A Work under this section includes all labor, equipment, material, services, transportation, etc required for and reasonably incidental to the complete and satisfactory installation of all of the HVAC Systems as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein 1 02 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A Air Conditioning Units. B Exhaust Fans C Ductwork and Accessories D Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers E Insulation Material F Vibration Isolation G Air Test and Balance. H Submittals and Shop Drawings. I Record Drawings J Operation and Maintenance Manuals K Guarantee 1 03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A Electrical supply to units See Electrical Drawings 1 04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. This section of the specification shall be considered as a part of the entire specification and all applicable portions of General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division 1 shall apply B Erection The Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge of the erection of the work, together with all necessary journeymen, helpers, and laborers required to properly unload, erect, connect, adjust, start of operate and test the work involved 1.05 REFERENCES A. AABC - National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance B AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes C AMCA 300 - Test code for sound rating air-moving devices S D ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation System. E ARI 270 - Sound rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment F. ASHRAE 52-76 - Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Paniculate Matter G ASTM A90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles H. ASTM A120 - Black and Galvanized Steel Pipe. I ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. ' J. ASTM C518 - Steady State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus WLC/04142000 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 Consultant 7/11/06 (1) K ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation L. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation M. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials N ASTM E96 - Water vapor Transmission of Materials. O NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems P NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials Q. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. R. UL 181 - Factory Made Air Ducts and Connectors S. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials T. California Mechanical Code - 2001 Edition. 1 06 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS A Contractor to provide shop drawings for review by the engineer Contractor agrees that shop drawings and equipment submittals processed by the Engineer and Architect do not become Contract Documents and are not Change Orders The purpose of the shop drawing review is to establish a reporting procedure and is intended for the Contractor's convenience in organizing his work and to permit the Architect to monitor the Contractor's progress and understanding of the design. The process of review of the Contractor's submittals is not of testing the Architect's perception If deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between shop drawings submittals and the Contract Documents are discovered either prior to or after the shop drawing submittals are processed by the Architect, the Contractor agrees that the Contract Documents shall control and shall be followed B Materials and Equipment- As soon as possible and within 21 days after award of the contract, and before their purchase, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect 7 bound booklets for approval containing a complete list of materials, specialties and equipment he is to furnish for the installation Literature shall be standard manufacturer's catalog cuts and items to be installed shall be clearly indicated All submittals shall be made at one time C. Each item shall be identified by manufacturer, brand and trade name, number, size, rating and whatever other data is necessary to properly identify and check the materials and equipment The words "as specified" will not be considered sufficient identification D Accessories, controls, finish, etc , not submitted or identified with the submitted equipment shall be furnished and installed as specified E Shop drawings shall be approved only to extent of information indicated. Approval of an item of equipment shall not be construed to mean approval for components for that item for which Contractor has provided no information. F Approval of shop drawings shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing all controls, wiring, components, etc which are shown or specified, or all additional controls, wiring, components, etc. required to provide complete and correctly operating mechanical systems G. Submit product data for the following manufactured products, assemblies and personnel and testing agencies required for this project. 1 Air Conditioning Units 2 Exhaust Fans 3. Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 4 Controls 5 Ductwork and Accessories 6. Vibration Isolation. 7 Insulation Materials e 8 Detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms, and copy of AABC National Project Performance Guarantee WLC/04142000 HEATING. VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 Consultant 7/11/06 (2) 1 07 SUBSTITUTIONS A Should the Contractor desire to substitute any material, equipment or other items for those specified, he shall submit a complete list, including detailed equipment layouts and performance characteristics within 21 calendar days after the scheduled Start of Construction Said data shall be submitted in 7 copies, assembled in individual brochures B The entire cost of all changes of any type due to substitution for materials specified shall be born by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Owner. C. Unsolicited and voluntary deducts, on the part of the Contractor for substituting unapproved systems and/or equipment, shall not be considered for the purpose of awarding the Contract D The contractor shall submit the amount of cost credit to the Contract in the event the proposed substitution is accepted E In all cases where substitutions are proposed after bids are received, the Contractor shall bear the cost of evaluation on the basis of 2-1/2 times technical salaries of engineering personnel involved 1 08 AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFIED EQUIPMENT A Verify prior to bidding that all specified equipment is available and can be obtained in time for installation during orderly and timely progress of the work B In the event that specified items will not be so available, notify the Architect prior to receipt of bids. C Costs of delays because of non-availability of specified items, when such delays could have been avoided by proper investigation on the part of the Contractor, will be back-charged as necessary and shall not be born by the Owner 1 09 RECORD DRAWINGS A The contractor shall arrange and pay for one set of white prints of the HVAC drawings, which he shall alter in red to show all changes made to the original layout. These drawings shall be kept current B. The contractor shall deliver these completed to the Architect when the job is finished and accepted prior to final payment 1 10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A Submit two sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2 x 11-inch text pages, binders with durable plastic covers Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", and title of project Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below, with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs B Contents Prepare a Table of Contents with each Product or system description identified 1 Part 1- Directory listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers 2 Part 2 Operation and maintenance instructions arranged by system. Identify the following a Significant design criteria. b List of equipment , c Parts list for each component d Operating instructions e Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems f Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents C Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be returned after final inspection, with Owner comments Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. D Submit final volumes revised, within ten days after final inspection WLC/04142000 HEATING. VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 Consultant 7/11/06 • (3) 111 GUARANTEES A The Contractor, in accepting this contract, binds himself to replace or repair at his own expense any defect in workmanship or material which may appear within a period of one year from the date of the final acceptance of the building, and to pay for all resulting damage which shall appear within the said period, provided always that the Contractor shall not be liable for anything attributable to acts of the agents of the Owner, or for ordinary wear Also, given date of work performed by the Contractor be accepted as complete, he shall agree to correct any deficiencies or omissions in respect to the plans or specifications which may appear in the afore-mentioned twenty-four month period B. The Contractor guarantees that all piping as provided in this specification will be free from all obstructions, and that all piping will be tight and drip free C. All refrigerant compressors shall carry a five-year manufacturer's warranty 112 LOCAL CONDITIONS A The Contractor and trade submitting tenders on this work shall visit and will be deemed to have visited the site to ensure that they are familiar with all conditions relating to the work. Failure to visit the site will in no way relieve the successful Contractor of the necessity of furnishing any material or performing any work that may be required to complete the work in accordance with the drawings and specifications without additional cost to the Owner. B The Contractor shall examine existing conditions, prior to any installation or fabrication, and it shall be understood that the price quoted shall include all work necessary to a complete workable system within the requirements of appropriate codes and fully adapted to the existing conditions The Contractor shall disconnect, seal off and remove any existing services where no longer required, and reroute services where necessary 1 13 RULES, REGULATIONS AND CODES A All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest Uniform Mechanical Code, Uniform Plumbing Code, Uniform Building Code and local rules and regulations, State Fire Marshal regulations, the safety orders of the Division of Industrial Safety; the National Electric Code; the standards of the National Fire Protection Association, American Gas Association, Occupation and Safety Act; American National Standards Institute, American Society of Mechanical Engineers; American Society for Testing and Materials, Installation Standards published by the International Association of Plumbing And Mechanical officials (IAPMO) and other applicable laws, codes, or regulations. Nothing in these specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes B. Electrical Work. Motors, electrical apparatus and wiring specified in this section shall conform to the National Electrical Manufacturer's Standards and the National Electric Code and bear the Underwriter's label of approval C The Contractor shall furnish, without extra charge, any additional material and labor when and where required to comply with these rules and regulations, though the work be not mentioned in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings. When these Specifications or Drawings call for or describe materials or construction of a better quality or larger sizes than required by the above mentioned rules and regulations, the provisions of these specifications and accompanying drawings shall take precedence. 114 FEES AND PERMITS ^ A. The Contractor must obtain and pay all fees for permits, licenses, inspections, etc , which are required by any legally constituted authority. Coordinate exact requirements with the Owner prior to bid 1 15 COORDINATION A Following the general arrangement indicated on the Drawings as closely as possible, the Contractor shall coordinate with the architectural, structural, plumbing, electrical and all other trades prior to installation of the materials and equipment to verify adequate space available for installation of the work shown. The Architect shall be immediately notified if an area of conflict occurs between trades B. The Contractor shall bear all costs incurred for work that must be relocated due to conflicts between trades. C The Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate all requirements for all points of connection with the General Contractor and other trades prior to bid WLC/04142000 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 Consultant 7/11/06 (4) 1 16 DRAWINGS A The work shall be installed as indicated on Drawings, however, changes to accommodate installation of this work with other work, or in order to meet Architectural or structural conditions, shall be made without additional cost to the Owner B For the purpose of clarity and legibility, the Drawings are essentially diagrammatic to the extent that many offsets, bonds, unions, special fittings and exact locations are not indicated The Contractor shall make use of all data in all of the Contract Documents, and shall verify this information at the site 1 17 INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall not allow or cause any of his work to be covered up or closed in until it has been inspected, tested, approved by all authorities have jurisdiction, and until Project Record drawings have been properly annotated B Should any of his work be covered up or closed in before such inspection, he shall, at his own expense, uncover the work to the satisfaction of the inspection party All related repair work cost shall be borne by the Contractor 1 18 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF PROPERTY A Place orders for all equipment in time to prevent any delay in construction schedule or completion of project. If any materials or equipment are not ordered in time, additional charges made by equipment manufacturer's to complete their equipment in time to meet construction schedule, together with any special handling charges, shall be borne by the contractor B. Materials shall be delivered in ample quantities from time to time as may be necessary for the uninterrupted progress of the work They shall be stored as'to cause the least obstruction to the premises and distributed so as to prevent overloading to any portion of the structure C The Contractor shall provide temporary storage and shop areas that are required at the site for the safe and proper storage of materials, tools, and other items used in the performance of this work These areas shall be constructed only in approved locations and shall not interfere with the work of any other Contractor D All work, equipment and materials shall be protected at all times The Contractor shall make good all damage caused either directly or indirectly by his own workmen The Contractor shall also protect his own work from damage He shall close all pipe and duct openings with caps or plugs during installation He shall protect all of his equipment and materials against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical injury Upon completion, all work shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered in a new condition 119 DAMAGE BY LEAKS, ETC A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to any part of the premises or work of other Contractors, caused by leaks or breaks in the piping or equipment furnished and/or installed under this section, during the construction and guarantee period. 1 20 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT FOR MAINTENANCE A Install all equipment, piping, etc to permit access for normal maintenance. Maintain easy access to filters, motors, etc. Install all such equipment and accessories to facilitate maintenance Perform any relocation of pipes, etc required to permit access at request of Owner at no additional cost to Owner. B Furnish and install access doors or panels in walls, floors, and ceilings to permit access to equipment, dampers, and all other items requiring service Coordinate location of access doors with other trades as required. C. Size access panels to allow inspection and removal of all items served D Use Milcor style as required for material in which door is installed Where door is installed in fire rated construction, provide door bearing UL label required for condition PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 01 GENERAL A. All materials and equipment shall be new and of the best of their respective grades, free from all defects and of the make, brand or quality herein specified or as accepted by the Architect WLC/04142000 HEATING. VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 Consultant 7/11/06 (5) B. All materials and equipment shall be identified by manufacturer's name or nameplate data Unidentified material or equipment shall be removed from the site C. Equipment specified by manufacturer's number shall include all accessories, controls, etc , listed in the catalog as standard with the equipment Optional or additional accessories shall be furnished as specified D Where no specific make of material or equipment is mentioned, any first class product of a reputable manufacturer may be used, provided it conforms to the requirements of the system and meets with the approval of the Architect E Equipment and matenals damaged during transportation, installation and operation shall be considered as "totally damaged" and shall be replaced with new. Any variance from this clause shall be made only with written approval of the Architect 2 02 MANUFACTURER A Air Conditioning Units 1 Carrier 2 Approved Equal / B Exhaust Fans^ 1 Loren Cook 2 Greenheck 3 Penn. C Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 1 Krueger 2 Titus. 3. Nailor D Thermostats. 1 Carrier 2 Approved equal E Vibration Isolation: 1 Mason 2. Approved equal 2 03 ROOFTOP PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A DESCRIPTION 1. Unit is an outdoor rooftop mounted, electrically controlled heating and cooling unit utilizing scroll hermetic compressors with crankcase heaters for cooling duty and induced draft gas combustion for heating duty Supply air shall be discharged downward or horizontally, as shown on contract drawings 2. Units shall be of ultra high cooling efficiency and utilize environmentally friendly Puron (R-410A) refrigerant. B. EQUIPMENT 1 General. a The unit shall be a factory assembled, single-piece heating and cooling unit. Contained within the unit enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, Puron refrigerant charge (R-410A), and special features required prior to field start-up. 2. Unit Cabinet. a. Constructed of galvanized steel, bondenzed and coated with a pre-pamted baked enamel finish on all externally exposed surfaces. WLC/04142000 HEATING. VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 Consultant 7/11/06 (6) b All airstream interior surfaces shall be insulated with a minimum 1/2-m thick, 1 Ib density foil-faced cleanable insulation Insulation shall be bonded with a thermosettmg resin (8 to 12% by weight nominal, phenol formaldehyde typical), and coated with an acrylic or other material that meets the NFPA 90 flame retardance requirements and has an "R" Value of 3.70 c Cabinet panels shall be hinged with stainless steel hinges (on size 20-28 units) or rust resistant brass hinges (on size 03-14 units) Hinged access panels for the filter, compressors, evaporator fan, control box and heat section areas Each panel shall use multiple quarter-turn latches and handles. Each major external hinged access panel shall be double-wall construction and permanently attached to the rooftop unit. Panels shall also include tiebacks d. Return air filters shall be accessible through a hinged access panel and be on a slide-out track using standard size filters e Holes shall be provided m the base rails (minimum 16 gage) for rigging shackles and level travel and movement during overhead rigging operations f Fork lift slots shall be available from three sides of the unit (end and 2 sides) for 03-14 and two sides of the unit (end and side) for other sizes g Unit shall have a factory-installed internally sloped condensate dram pan, providing a minimum %-m-14 NPT connection to prevent standing water from accumulating. Pan shall be fabricated of high impact polycarbonate material and shall slide out for cleaning and or maintenance on 03-14 sizes An alternate vertical dram (3/4-m NPT) connection is also available Pan shall be fabricated of epoxy powder coated steel for other sizes All dram pans conform to ASHRAE 62 self-draining provisions h Unit shall have standard thru-the-bottom power and control wiring connection capability 3 Fans a Indoor blower (evaporator fan) 1) Centrifugal supply air blower shall have rubber-isolated, cartridge type ball bearings (on size 03-14 units) or pillow-block ball bearings (on size 20-28 units) and adjustable belt drive. 2) Fan wheel shall be made from steel with a corrosion resistant finish It shall be a dynamically balanced, double-inlet type with forward-curved blades 3) The indoor fan system (blower wheels, motors, belts, and both bearings) shall slide out for easy access. 4) Evaporator-fan motors shall be continuous operation, open drip-proof Bearings shall be sealed, permanently lubricated ball-bearing type for longer life and lower maintenance b Condenser fans shall be of the direct-driven propeller type, with corrosion-resistant aluminum blades riveted to corrosion-resistant steel supports They shall be dynamically balanced and discharge air upwards Condenser fan motors shall be totally enclosed, thermally protected, and be of a shaft down design. c Induced-draft blower shall be of the direct-driven, single inlet, forward-curved, centrifugal type It shall be made from alummized steel with a corrosion-resistant finish and shall be dynamically balanced 4 Compressor(s). a Fully hermetic, scroll type with crankcase heaters, internal high-pressure and temperature protection b Factory mounted on rubber grommets and internally spring mounted for vibration isolation, c On dual electrically and mechanically independent refrigerant circuits 5 Coils. a Standard evaporator and condenser coils shall have aluminum lanced plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless internally grooved copper tubes with all joints brazed WLC/04142000 HEATING. VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 Consultant 7/11/06 (7) b Dual circuit models (on size 08-28 units) shall have face-split type evaporator coil c. Condenser coils shall be continuous slab design to facilitate easy coil cleaning d Coils shall be leak tested at 170 psig and pressure tested at 1875 psig 6. Optional Coils (provide if specified on plans) a Thermoguard™ non VOC coating Corrosion durability shall be confirmed through testing to be no less than 1000 hours salt spray per ASTM B117-90 Coil construction shall be aluminum-fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes Thermoguard™ coated aluminum-fin coils shall provide protection in industrial and industrial and costal combined environments Coating warranty shall be 10 years of protection 7 Heating Section. a Induced-draft combustion type with energy saving direct-spark ignition system and redundant main gas valve with 2-stage capability on all 3-phase units b Heat Exchanger 1) Stainless steel heat exchanger shall be of the tubular-section type, constructed of a minimum of 20-gage type 409 stainless steel, including stainless steel tubes, vestibule plate, and collector box c Burners shall be of the in-shot type constructed of aluminum-coated steel d. All gas piping shall enter the unit at a single location e All factory-installed orifices are for operation up to 2,000 feet of altitude f. The integrated gas controller (IGC) board shall include gas heat operation fault notification using an LED (light-emitting diode) g Unit shall be equipped with anti-cycle protection with one short cycle on unit flame rollout switch or 4 continuous short cycles on the high-temperature limit switch Fault indication shall be made using an LED h The IGC board shall contain algorithms that modify evaporator-fan operation to prevent future cycling on high-temperature limit switch i The LED shall be visible without removal of control box access panel j Gas burner tray, when disconnected, shall easily slide out for maintenance 8 Refrigerant Components a. Each refrigerant circuit shall include" 1) Thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) with removable power element 2) Solid core refrigerant filter driers. 3) Gage port and connections on suction, discharge, and liquid lines. 9. Filter Section a Standard filter section shall consist of factory-installed 2-in thick throwaway fiberglass filters and shall be on a dedicated slide out track to easily facilitate access and replacement b Filter section shall use standard size filters and be of common sizes within cabinet sizes. 10. Controls and Safeties' a Unit Controls 1) Scrolling Marquee display. 2) CCN (Carrier Comfort Network) capable 3) Unit control with standard suction pressure transducers and condensing temperature thermistors 4) Shall provide a 5° F temperature difference between cooling and heating set points to meet ASHRAE 90 1 Energy Standard WLC/04142000 HEATING. VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 Consultant 7/11/06 (8) 5) Shall provide and display a current alarm list and an alarm history list 6) Automatic compressor redundancy 7) Service run test capability 8) Shall accept input from a CO2 sensor (both indoor and outdoor). 9) Configurable alarm light shall be provided which activates when certain types of alarms occur 10) Compressor minimum run time (3 minutes) and minimum off time (5 minutes) are provided 11) Service diagnostic mode 12) Economizer control (Provide if economizer is specified on equipment schedule). 13) Multiple capacity stages (on size 08-28 units) 14) Unit shall be complete with self-contained low-voltage control circuit 15) Unit shall have 0° F low ambient cooling operation 11 Safeties a Unit shall incorporate a solid-state compressor lockout which provides optional reset capability at the space thermostat, should any of the following safety devices trip and shut off compressor 1) Compressor lockout protection provided for either internal or external overload 2) Low-pressure protection 3) Freeze protection (evaporator coil) 4) High-pressure protection (high pressure switch or internal) 5) Compressor reverse rotation protection 6) Loss of charge protection 7) Start assist on singe-phase units b Supply-air sensor shall be located in the unit and detect both heating and cooling operation c Induced draft heating section shall be provided with the following minimum protections 1) High-temperature limit switch. 2) Induced-draft motor speed sensor. 3) Flame rollout switch 4) Flame proving controls. 5) Redundant gas valve 12 Operating Characteristics a Unit shall be capable of starting and running at 125 F ambient outdoor temperature per maximum load criteria of ARI Standard 210 (on size 03-12 units) and 360 (on size 14-28 units) b. Unit controls will operate in cooling down to an outdoor ambient temperature of 0° F Electro-mechanical shall operate down to 25 F c. Unit shall be provided with fan time delay to prevent cold air delivery in heating mode 13. Electrical Requirements: a All unit power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single location - side and/or bottom. 14 Motors a. Compressor motors shall be cooled by refrigerant gas passing through motor windings and shall have line break thermal and current overload protection. WLC/04142000 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 Consultant 7/11/06 (9) b Evaporator fan motor shall have permanently lubricated, sealed bearings and inherent automatic-reset thermal overload protection or manual reset calibrated circuit breakers Evaporator motors are designed specifically for Carrier and do not have conventional horsepower (hp) ratings listed on the motor nameplate Motors are designed and qualified in the "air-over" location downstream of the cooling coil and carry a maximum continuous bhp rating that is the maximum application bhp rating for the motor, no "safety factors" above that rating may be applied c All evaporator fan motors 5 hp and larger shall meet the minimum efficiency requirements as established by the Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT), effective October 24, 1997 d Totally enclosed condenser-fan motor shall have permanently lubricated, sealed bearings, and inherent automatic-reset thermal overload protection e Induced-draft motor shall have permanently lubricated sealed bearings and inherent automatic-reset thermal overload protection C. Accessories a. See equipment schedule 2 04 CEILING EXHAUST FANS A See the sizes and capacities indicated on the drawings, complete with direct drive blower, motor, grille, housing, mounting frame, backdraft damper, roof or wall cap discharge, U L label and shall be tested and rated in accordance with the applicable AMCA Codes B. Accessories. 1 See equipment schedule 2 05 ROOF-TOP EXHAUST FANS A Centrifugal Fan Unif V-belt driven B Sheaves Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed, variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position, fan shaft with self-aligning prelubncated ball bearings C Accessories. 1 See equipment schedule 2 06 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES A. General Non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials, or UL 181 B. Steel Ducts ASTM A525 or ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having zinc coating of 1.25 oz per sq ft for each side in conformance with ASTM A90. Round duct shall be spiral seam construction C Spiral Ducts- Interlocking spiral of galvanized steel or aluminum construction, rated to (2 inches WG positive and 1.5 inches WG negative for low pressure ducts) (and 15 inches WG positive or negative for medium high pressure ducts.) D. Insulated Flexible Ducts' Flexible duct wrapped with flexible glass fiber insulation, enclosed by Pressure Ductwork seamless aluminum pigmented plastic vapor barrier jacket; maximum 0.23 K value at 75 degrees F E. Flex ducts shall not exceed seven feet in length to respective diffusers, grilles, and etc F. Fasteners' Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws G. Sealant" Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials, liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic H Hanger Rod Steel, galvanized, threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. I Low Pressure Ducts WLC/04142000 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 Consultant 7/11/06 (10) Fabricate and support in accordance with 2001 CMC, SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated Gages for galvanized steel ducts for low pressure systems where velocities do not exceed 2000 FPM shall be as follows RECTANGULAR DUCT Dimension of Largest Side (U in Inches L<12 12<L<30 30<L<54 54<L<84 84<L Gage 26 24 22 20 18 All joint and seam constructions as indicated in the CMC are Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in ROUND DUCT Diameter (D) In Inches D<9 9<D<14 14<D<23 23<D<37 37<D<51 51<D<61 61<D<84 acceptable. accordance with G a 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 ASHRAE tabl equivalent rectangular and round ducts No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission 4 Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerlme Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes 5 Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees, convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees 6 Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports J. Volume Control Dampers' 1 Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. 2 Opposed blade dampers shall have factory fabricated blades, with factory assembled linkages, mounted in frames Blades shall have interlocking edges and ends Rectangular dampers 6" or more wide, shall be the multi-blade type. Blades on multi-blade type dampers must not be over 6" wide Dampers shall be of the opposed blade type Dampers shall have bar or channel frames and corner bracing All blade1 and linkage bearings shall be self lubricating plastic Damper assembly leakage not to exceed 1 % with 4 0 W C static pressure 3 Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers 4 On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. K. Duct Test Holes: 1 Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps 2 07 Ceiling Diffusers & Supply Registers and, Return Registers: A Fabricate of steel with steel or aluminum frame and baked enamel off-white finish B. Provide opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face as indicated on the drawings. C Ceiling Diffusers (CD) Krueger 1240p or approved equal. WLC/04142000 HEATING. VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 Consultant 7/11/06 (11) Exhaust Register (ER) Krueger Type 88OH and 58OH, steel and aluminum with balancing damper, or approved equal 2 08 THERMOSTATS Thermostats shall be Carrier 250 or equal. They shall be electronic, programmable, auto-changeover type and shall comply with all Title 24 energy requirements 2 09 CONTROLS A Provide and install complete, automatic, control system for the proper interlock operation and control of the air conditioning systems, all as required for a complete and properly operating control system throughout B. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper coordination of all control work and electrical work in connection therewith He shall also be responsible for the proper operation of the entire system C The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all line voltage control wiring, and all conduit. Wire sizing and length of run shall be co-ordinated with the manufacturer and Electrical Engineer D Operating Instructions' Provide operation instructions, including diagrammatic layouts of the temperature control system Show all control equipment and the function of each control system E Electrical Work" All electric relays, hand-off automatic switches and all electrical wiring and all conduit will be provided under the Electrical Section, except as otherwise specified Furnish and install additional conduit, wiring, relays, hand-off automatic switches made necessary by the use of approved substituted equipment under this Section with no additional cost to the Owner F. Refer to drawings for control diagrams and additional requirements. G Calibration of Controls: The Contractor shall carefully calibrate and adjust all controls as required to maintain comfort conditions and maximum energy conservation H Electrical contractor shall provide required relay accessories for connection of 120 volt 1 phase ventilation equipment to 277 volt 1 phase lighting as applicable. 210 INSULATION A. General' 1 All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to the insulation) fire smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding- Flame Spread 25 Smoke Developed. 50 2 All products or their shipping cartons shall bear a label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not exceed above requirements. Any treatment of jackets or facings to impart flame and smoke safety shall meet the above requirements. 3 The Contractor shall certify that all products used have met the above criteria. 4 The insulation values shown are a minimum. If the requirements of Title 24 exceed these values, the amount of and/or type must be increased to meet the Title 24 requirements. B. Duct Insulation. 1 Fiberglass Duct Wrap a Insulation- ASTM C553, flexible, noncombustible blanket 1) 'K' value ASTM C518, 0 48 at 75 degrees F 2) Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F. 3) Density. 060lb/ft3. b Vapor Barrier Jacket' 1) Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to alumimzed film vinyl. WLC/04142000 HEATING. VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 Consultant 7/11/06 f (12) 2) Moisture vapor transmission ASTM E96, 0 5 perm 3) Secure with pressure sensitive tape c Vapor Barrier Tape Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to alummized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive d Tile Wire Annealed steel, 16 gage. Glass Fiber Duct Liner, Flexible' a Insulation ASTM C553, flexible, noncombustible blanket 1) 'K' value ASTM C518, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2) Maximum service temperature 250 degrees F 3) Density 1 5 to 3 0 Ib/ft3 4) Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side 4,000 ft/mm b Adhesive. Waterproof (fire-retardant) type c Liner Fasteners. Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad. Glass Fiber Duct Liner, Rigid a Insulation ASTM C612, semi-rigid, noncombustible 1) 'K1 value ASTM C518, 024 at 75 degrees F 2) Maximum service temperature 250 degrees F 3) Density 1 5 to 3 0 Ib/cu ft 4) Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side 4,000 b Adhesive Waterproof (fire-retardant) type PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 01 GENERAL Install all equipment in locations indicated on the Drawings Contractor will be responsible to verify with the Architect, if suitability is doubted Contractor shall notify the Architect before installation into any apparent improper locations of interference with other work such as electncal outlets, windows, cabinetwork or other features 3.02 INSTALLATION Rooftop Package Unit Air Conditioner Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Mount units on factory built roof-mounting frame providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services, or on platforms Install roof mounting frame level B Exhaust fan Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions mechanical plans. C. Ductwork and Accessories Secure roof exhausters per 1 Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring 2 Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities 3. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to meet the provisions of "Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines For Mechanical Systems," Latest SMACNA guidelines. 4 Provide balancing dampers at points on low-pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing Use splitter dampers only where indicated. WLC/04142000 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 Consultant 7/11/06 (13) 5 Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment 6 Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated Provide minimum 8x8 inch size for hand access, 18x18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated 7 Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. 8 Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to Architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement 9 Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection 10. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or register assembly 11 Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black D. Thermostats and over-ride switches Install at 48" above finished floor Verify location with the owner. All thermostats, remote sensors and over-ride switches shall be by Carrier or equal Contractor shall be responsible for verifying, furnishing all controls and shall co-ordinate all requirements with other trades including notifying electrical contractor of necessary conduit and power requirements. All costs for scope of work shall be submitted for final bid E Insulation 1 Duct Insulation a Unless specifically indicated on the drawings the Contractor may line or wrap ductwork to meet insulation requirements b Fiberglass ductwrap. 1) Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket 2) Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires 3) Install without sag on underside of ductwork Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. 4) Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. 5) Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping. c Duct (and Plenum) liner Application 1) Install as indicated (sound lining ) on the drawings. 2) Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners Refer to SMACNA Standards for spacing Seal and smooth joints Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 3) Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for airflow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness F Install Spring Curb Rail vibration isolation system per manufacturer's recommendations. Provide seismic clips from A/C unit to roof curb, and z straps from A/C unit to equipment curb per manufacturer's recommendations. Submit shop drawings for location of points of attachment, and methods and materials. 3 03 CLEANING A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust during construction. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time Protect equipment that may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning. WLC/04142000 HEATING. VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 Consultant 7/11/06 (14) B Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines Protect equipment that may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes C All filters shall be replaced one week prior to occupancy of Owner 3 04 AIR SYSTEM TEST AND BALANCE A Report Forms 1 Submit reports on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms. 2 Provide reports in sort cover, letter size, and 3-nng binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations All systems and balanced and included in the report per AABC Standards. B Perform all tests to the entire satisfaction of the Owner's inspector. Air balancing contractor shall notify Owner's inspector one week prior to scheduling air balance at the site C Regulating and Adjusting Air Systems 1 The Contractor shall have an experienced independent testing company certified member of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) specializing in air conditioning system testing completely balance the air systems so that the volume of air indicated on the drawings is being delivered to the outlets He shall adjust and re-adjust this part of the work until the operation complies with the requirements of the drawings and specifications 2 Testing Procedure Procedures shall conform to AABC. standards Provide reports in sort cover, letter size, and 3-rmg binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations 3 The following test data shall be taken and three (3) copies submitted in tabulated form to the Architect for each system a Test and adjust all supply, return & exhaust blower RPM to design requirements b Test and record all motor full load amperes c Test and record system static pressures, suction and discharge. d Test and adjust system for design re-circulated air, CFM e Test and adjust system for design CFM outside air f Adjust all supply and return outlets to within 5% of design CFM 3 05 SOUND AND VIBRATION ISOLATION A All vibrating equipment shall be sound isolated from the structure < B The Contractor shall submit all necessary data for each vibration isolator, including static deflection and weight loading, for equipment in operation C All vibrating equipment shall be provided with flexible pipe connections Submit for approval prior to installation END OF SECTION WLC/04142000 HEATING. VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 Consultant 7/11/06 (15) SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A Requirements of General Conditions and General Requirements shall apply to this section. B These General Requirements apply to entire Division 16 specifications and to electrical work, material and equipment specified in other divisions 12 SCOPE A Work under this section consists of all labor, material, equipment, services, permits, fees and transportation necessary for, and/or reasonably incidental to, the construction and completion in working order of electrical work shown on the accompanying drawings and/or specified herein B Work includes, but is not limited to, the following 1 Coordination with utility company to provide service to the facility. All work not provided by utility company required to render service to the site Utility company service charges. 2 Primary and/or secondary service conduit from point of utility company service to facility service equipment Primary and/or secondary service conductors not furnished by utility company Precast pads for utility company transformer Pull boxes 3 Distribution systems for power and lighting. 4 Grounding system for service and equipment 5 Lighting system including fixtures, lamps, supports, outlets, devices, plates, branch circuiting and control 6 Outlet system including outlets, devices, plates and branch circuiting. 7 Public telephone service conduits from point of utility- company service to mam telephone terminal. Pull boxes 8. Telephone and data raceway system including raceways, outlets, pull wires, sleeves, terminals, grounding. 9. Conduit and wiring system for heating, ventilating, air conditioning and plumbing, including connection, disconnect switches and items of industrial control (where not part of package controls). Connection to air conditioning packaged controls furnished under Division 15. V 10 Conduit and wiring for HVAC control where not furnished under mechanical , section 11. Conduit, wiring, outlets, devices and connections to electrical equipment furnished under other sections or by Owner for a complete installation. Installation of controls furnished under other sections 12 Code required access panels to electrical equipment in concealed locations Location coordinated with Architect. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (1) 13. Excavation and backfill for work under this section 14 Precast pull boxes and transformer pads, pull irons, cable racks, concrete conduit encasement 15 Templates and coordination of installation of formed concrete for electrical work such as concrete bases, trenches, equipment pads, light pole foundations, curbs 16 Shop drawings, wiring diagrams, equipment data, record drawings, operation manuals 17 Hanger, anchors, sleeves, chases, core drilling, metal supports, channels, plywood backing, vibration isolation, seismic bracing, as required for work under this section 18 Cleaning, patchmg/repamng and touch up painting as required for work under this section 19 Permits and fees Include SCAQMD permit for emergency generator in conjunction with Owner, and fees 20 Testing, adjusting of completed work, inspections and instruction 21 Temporary power and lighting for work under this section 22 Emergency standby power 23 Signal and communication empty raceway and outlet systems Equipment and wiring under other sections or by owner (Fire Alert, Cable TV) 1 3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE OR BY OTHERS A Temporary service and wiring except as required for this section (Division 1) B Setting of motors furnished under other divisions (Trades). C Finish painting of flush mounted electrical equipment in public areas (Section "Painting"). D. Formed concrete except templates (Section "Concrete") E Furnishing of packaged air conditioning controls (Division 15, General Conditions and General Requirements) F Telephone cable and instruments (utility company or separate section) G. Signal and communication systems wiring and equipment (separate section). H. Speaker system, Public address system, Telephone/Data cabling, Fire Alert, and MATV/cable TV (separate section or by owner) I Primary and/or secondary service conductors, service meter (coordinate with utility company) 1 4 LEGAL REQUIREMENTS AND STANDARDS A. Codes and regulations: Comply with applicable sections of national, state and local codes, laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including- 1. California Energy Commission (CEC). 2. California State Building Code, Title 24. 3. City and State Electrical Codes. Applicable portion of local Building Codes 4. National Electric Code (NEC) 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 6. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (2) 7. Serving utility company (service and metering requirements) 8. South Coast Air Quality Management (SCAQMD) 9. State and local fire regulations and requirements. 10 Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). B Standards' Comply with latest editions of applicable regulations and standards of: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 3. Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM). 4 Energy Policy and Conservation Act (EPCA) National Energy Conservation Amendments (NAECA) 5 Institute of Electncal and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 6 Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) 7 National Bureau of Standards (NBS). 8 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 9 National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) 10 National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines (NUSIG) C Minimum Requirements 1 Comply with the requirements of authorities and listed standards as minimum acceptable work In case of conflict between the requirements, the most stringent govern. 2 The drawings and specifications take precedence when they call for materials or construction of better quality or larger size then required by codes, laws, rules and regulations D Permits Obtain permits and inspections, and pay for all fees, unless otherwise specified Deliver all certificates of inspection to the Architect. E Guarding 1 Provide protection for moving parts and hazardous conditions 2 Provide industrial accident and warning signs per ANSI and OSHA. 3. Erect and maintain suitable barriers, protective devices, lights and warning signs for the protection of the public and employees from the work under this section. 4. Conform with applicable safety regulations, including those of the Architect and Owner 1.5 SERVICES A Provide all labor and material, not furnished by the public utility companies, required to render service to the project from utility company service points Verify service charges (e.g , excess facilities, cable) and requirements, and pay all costs thereof, unless specified otherwise. B Ground service transformer, and service switchboard as detailed and specified and per utility company and code requirements. Provide ground at public telephone mam terminal C Verify exact location of utility service points. Install primary and secondary conduit and terminate as specified and as directed by the utility company. Provide duct banks for utility company service conductors as indicated and specified and not less than utility company standards Obtain utility company approval for duct installation. D For utility service conduit, provide sweep radii per utility company standards but not less than specified E. Verify construction details of transformer pads, service switchboards, conduit and cable details, and service related work with respective utility company and observe utility company standards. Obtain written utility company approvals prior to construction and submit evidence of approval WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (3) F Upon award of the contract, notify the public utility companies and supply them estimated completion date of the work and desired service date. Supply electric utility with required data regarding electrical loads. G Where primary and/or secondary service conductors are provided under Electrical Section, coordinate terminations with utility company Where primary and/or secondary service conductors are provided by utility company, provide terminations as required by utility company. H Obtain settings of utility company primary devices and coordinate mam breaker settings with utility company devices 1.6 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A The applicable paragraphs of General Requirements, General Conditions and General Requirements, shall apply herein Substitutions after award of the contract will not be considered B Basis for Design Manufacturer's names, products and numbers listed on the drawings or in these specifications, along with specific descriptions in these specifications, set the standards of quality and performance Select products of one of the listed manufacturers meeting these standards and modify standard catalog items where required to meet specifications Provide specified material and equipment unless specifically approved otherwise C Equivalence The phrase "or equivalent by" followed by manufacturer's name means that ~" this manufacturer's product shall match the performance, construction, fit and features specified D Substitutions Submit proposed substitutions along with alternate price, complete descriptive data and a comparison of the substitute manufacturer's product with specified product In proposing a substitution, assume full responsibility for any associated modifications in building openings, circuiting, control wiring, and space considerations, and bear all costs Architect reserves right to reject any proposed substitution E Liability of Substitutions Substituted items to perform equivalent to or better than the item used for basis for design, and meet all requirements of above "or equivalent by" clause. Should the substituted item fail to perform in accordance with specifications, replace with the originally specified item without extra compensation 1.7 SUBMITTALS OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A General Make submittals in accordance with the General Conditions, in order as listed Submit material list, and obtain review, prior to submission of manufacturer's data and shop drawings / B Submittals Piecemeal submittals will not be acceptable Submit in brochure form with all listings referenced to applicable paragraph in the specifications. C Review: Submittals will be reviewed for general design only, and not for method of assembly, erection, construction, or detailed compliance with Contract Documents. D Condition of Acceptance of Submittals No deviation from Contract Documents is permitted unless specifically so noted by Contractor and accepted by Architect in writing. E. Contractor Responsibility 1 Error or omissions in submittals regardless of review status of submittals 2. Coordination with work of other trades 3 Space coordination and maintenance of code required aisle space. 4. Erection and installation techniques, including structural adequacy and bracing suitable for stability and/or seismic conditions. 5. Maintenance of installation safety. 6. Satisfactory performance of all work. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (4) F. Manufacturer's Data: 1. Submit with associated shop drawings 2 For material specified to meet trade standards of Federal Specifications, furnish the manufacturer or vendor's certification that the material furnished for the work equals or exceeds referenced standards or specifications 3. Furnish certification from suppliers and/or manufacturers of materials and equipment that such items meet or exceed the requirements of the drawings and specifications 4. Submit performance curves of equipment such as engine generators. G. Shop Drawings and Reports: 1 Identify with project name, number and item designation as indicated on drawings. Reference to applicable paragraphs of the specification. 2. Submit legible reproducible transparency and two prints minimum for Architect's record Make necessary prints of reviewed transparency for distribution If reproducible is not available, submit a minimum of six copies of catalog cuts 3. Prior to submission, check all shop drawings for conformance with requirements of latest issue of the drawings and specifications, including bulletins and change orders, and against available space Obtain public utility company approval of service metering and indicate on shop drawing Have submittals signed by all reviewing parties Make required corrections before forwarding to the Architect for review 4. Include dimensional data, weights, ratings, construction details, center of gravity, component descriptive data and sufficient information to illustrate compliance with the specifications. List labeling and approving agencies and standards of design employed in manufacture H Required Submittals Submit shop drawings and technical data on all equipment and auxiliary systems in sufficient detail to indicate conformance with the drawings and specifications, including but not limited to 1. Switchboards and metering facilities, including data on all components used in gear 2. Distribution boards, branch circuit panelboards, terminal cabinets 3. Installation drawings 4. Signal and communication systems components, wiring diagrams, conduit and outlet diagrams, system function description 5. Catalog cuts of interior and exterior lighting fixtures, shop drawings of custom fixtures Include finish data, socket specifications, metal gauge, diffuser specifications, independent test laboratory photometric data, agency labeling, weight, and suspension system details Indicate compliance with general and specific specification requirements, ballast specification and coordination with ceiling system construction 6 Motor starters or assemblies, components, construction details, internal wiring diagrams, interlocking diagrams. Obtain mechanical trade information and approval prior to submission. 7. Emergency systems, wiring and mterwiring diagrams. 8. Vibration isolators and seismic restraint 9 Wiring devices, all types and ratings. 10 Control devices, controllers. 11. Occupancy sensors. 12. Dimmers. 1.8 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS A Prepare dimensionally accurate floor plans of each electrical and signal room and/or closet and the like, drawn to 1/4" scale minimum. Submit legible reproducible transparencies for review with two prints for Architect's record Indicate all equipment within the rooms to scale based on shop drawing data, include structural support for suspended equipment and description of seismic bracing and fastening. Indicate system and equipment grounding details as applicable Submit with shop drawings WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (5) B. Where conduit runs, 2" trade size and larger, are run in exposed locations, prepare dimensionally accurate floor plans indicating routing, coordinated with work of other trades and the structure Submit legible reproducible transparencies with two prints for review 1.9 RECORD DRAWINGS A Provide Record Drawings in accordance with the General Conditions and General Requirements and including the following- 1 Corrected panel schedules indicating installed condition Installed typed schedules reflecting installed conditions in panels 2 Revisions, including sketches, bulletins, change orders, written addenda and directives, clarifications and responses generated by requests for information (RFIs), regardless of source of the revision 3 Physical routing of feeders and conduits 2" trade size and larger, underground, exposed and above ceilings. 4 Location of underground conduit below building and on exterior, and stubouts dimensioned from building structure 5 Location of site service conduits, pull boxes and transformer pads by elevation and dimensioned from buildings and permanent structures 6 Location of floor mounted outlets, dimensioned from fixed building features 1 10 SPARES, SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS A Provide to Owner as specified in other paragraphs of the specification and as outlined herein B. Obtain receipts and include copy with Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual(s) C Provide lists of each category describing type, rating and use and include lists with Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual(s) } D. Provide wall mounted cabinet with hinged lockable door and shelving adequate for storage and display Include space for all spare parts, accessories and special tools Locate as directed by owner E Fuses Three spares of each current rating for each type including signal, communication and control system fuses F. Pilot Light and Indicating Lamps' Ten percent by type, but not less than two each G Overload heaters. Two sets of three for each rating H Breaker Lockout/Lockon Devices: One for each six panelboard circuit breakers or as noted, whichever is greater I Receptacle Plugs- One for each receptacle excluding NEMA 5-15R and 5-20R types, unless otherwise noted J Device Plates: Two for each type of device used in excess of twenty K v Special Tools' Provide, as standard accessories, tools not readily available in commercial market required for assembly, adjustment and/or maintenance of equipment provided under this section L. Lighting Fixture Lamps Five percent of total quantity for each type, but not less than one M Fluorescent Ballasts- Five percent of total quantity of each type, not less than one, not more than forty. N Paint cans for touch up of factory finished gear, including switchboards, panelboards and the like. Label each can with identify of associated gear WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (6) 1 11 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A General: As a condition for final acceptance of the system, submit 'to the Architect a minimum of three copies of each of the following documents, complete and at one time, in looseleaf three ring binders with permanent covers, identified, indexed and cross- referenced to the specifications. On the edge of the binder, identify the project, year of construction and equipment involved. Where practical, data may be combined in comprehensive manual. B Maintenance Instruction - Include* I. Complete record material list. 2 Catalog brochures for all components. 3 Motor starter overload schedules 4 Test reports. 5. Manufacturer's directions and conformance certificate. 6 Guarantee and warranties 7 Inspection certificates 8 Spare parts lists 9. Reports on instruction of Owner's personnel. 10 Wiring and block diagrams, where applicable II. Detailed checkout procedures to insure operation of systems and gear 12 Diagnostic and troubleshooting procedures for systems and major equipment 13 Recommended preventive maintenance program, including a list of mechanical items requiring inspection and servicing. C Parts list - Include for Replaceable Parts 1. Description of part, manufacturer's part number, source to obtain part. 2 List of each type of lighting fixture lamp used, including fixture lamp is used in and lamp source D Operation Instruction - Describe 1 Start-up, checkout and shutdown procedures 2. Emergency operation capability and procedures 3 Time switch operating schedule. E Shop Drawings - Include Complete set of record shop drawings, cuts and brochures 1 12 VERBAL INSTRUCTIONS A. Upon completion of the work, provide an engineer from each supplier of major equipment or system to instruct Owner's designated operating personnel using the Operating and Maintenance data Include both classroom instruction and on-the-job training, conducted before and during the system test period. Provide instruction proportional to the complexity of the system, but not less than one days B Submit written report to Owner with copy to Architect, for each instruction period indicating date and time of instruction, and personnel being instructed and signed by personnel participating 1.13 INSPECTIONS A. In addition to required service calls, make a minimum of two inspections accompanied by operating personnel, within the warranty period, at no expense to the Owner, to insure that all systems are maintained properly and in satisfactory operating condition. B Submit written reports to Owner with copy to Architect, signed by operating personnel witnessing inspection, and indicating inspection results WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11121 /05 (7) 1 14 COMPLETION A Before Final Review: The work hereunder will not be reviewed for final acceptance until Operating and Maintenance Data, Manufacturer's Literature, Identification, Warning Signs and Nameplates specified herein have been reviewed and/or properly posted in the building and final cleaning has been completed. B. Before operating any equipment for demonstration or test, comply with manufacturer's preparation instructions C Demonstration of Operations- When the installation is complete and required adjustments have been made, operate the systems for a period of one week. Dunng this time demonstrate to the Owner's representative that systems are completed and operating and performing in conformance with these specifications. 1 15 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES A Comply with guarantee requirements of General Conditions and General Requirements B Guarantee all material, equipment and work for a period of one year (or greater where specified elsewhere) from written acceptance of the work, against defects of any kind, covering all parts C Obtain guarantees and/or warranties for factory assembled equipment and include with Operation Instruction Manual D In the event of failure of any work, equipment, or device during the life of the guarantee and at no cost to Owner, repair or replace the defective work and remove, replace or restore any parts of the structure or building which may be damaged as the direct result of the defective work or in the course of making the replacement of defective work materials 1 16 PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS A The Owner reserves the right to operate portions of the electrical system on a preliminary basis without voiding the guarantee or relieving the Contractor of his responsibilities PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2 1 GENERAL A Provide material and equipment of new and recent manufacture, currently UL labeled and/or listed for the specified use B Where UL labeling is not available, provide certification by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) C Use products of the same manufacture and type for each category of material and equipment. 2 2 RACEWAYS AND WIREWAYS A Rigid Conduit including Couplings, Locknuts, Nipples Steel, hot-dipped galvanized inside and out after threading, galvanized, threaded malleable iron or steel fittings, notched locknuts with gripping teeth. Deliver with plastic thread protectors on exposed conduit threads B Intermediate Metal Conduit including Couplings, Locknuts, Nipples: Steel, hot process galvanized outside, lacquered or enameled inside, galvanized threads, galvanized threaded malleable iron or steel fittings, notched locknuts with gripping teeth. Deliver with plastic thread protectors on exposed conduit threads. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (8) C Electric Metallic Tubing including Locknuts, Couplings and Connectors' Galvanized steel, lacquered or enameled interior, raintight gland ring compression of setscrew compression type fittings, insulated throat connectors Submit sample fittings for approval Indenture fittings are unacceptable. D Flexible Conduit Manufactured from single steel strip, galvanized on all four sides prior to fabrication, die cast twist-in connectors, UL listed for ground continuity Reduced wall or aluminum flexible conduit is not acceptable E Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit: Flexible galvanized steel core, with extruded polyvmyl chloride cover. Liquid tight insulated throat fittings to seal and ground conduit Provide separate bond wire where integral ground conductor is not available F Gutters and Wireways Galvanized sheet steel, hinged covers, elbows and fittings without sharp edges or projections. G Nonmetallic Conduit. High impact 90°C polyvmyl chloride, Schedule 40 extruded to iron pipe sizes with factory spacers, couplings, bends and offsets Plastic to plastic connections, tightly fitted and butted, cement welded utilizing tinted primer per ASTM F656 and heavy body, medium set cement per ASTM D2564, in accordance with manufacturer's directions Plastic to metal connection with UL listed adapters Bell endings are not acceptable 2 3 FITTINGS, OUTLETS AND JUNCTION BOXES A Provide bright new stock, stored where continuously protected from the weather and as described herein B Outlet Boxes and Covers Steel, knockout type, with full access screw-on covers or plaster rings, hot-dipped, galvanized, with cadmium plated or galvanized machine screws C Cast Outlet Boxes: Cast ferrous metal construction, galvanized, complete with threaded hubs for rigid conduit, number and location as required, and plugs in unused hubs, gasketed cast covers, cast device plates suitable for indicated device, meeting NEC requirement for bending and permitted number of conductors, in hazardous area, approved for the class of hazard. D Small Junction and Pull Boxes. As specified for outlet boxes E Large Junction or Pull Boxes Galvanized code gauge sheet steel construction, with full access screwed on covers and cadmium plated or galvanized machine screws, minimum size per the governing electrical code or as noted on the drawings, whichever is greater, barriers for required separation, special configurations, where determined from field measurements to surmount structural conditions, factory painted with gray enamel For flush mounting, extend covers 3/4" beyond edge of boxes Where used for cable support, brace box to support cable weight For junction boxes larger than 36" in any dimension, provide 3/4" diameter steel pipe cable supports with flanged ends with continuous fiber insulating sleeve and bolted to box frame, spaced on 36" centers maximum For cover dimensions 3 ft x 4 ft or larger, provide two piece covers equipped with handles F. Junction Boxes on Exterior or Where Exposed to Moisture (e g Roof, Generator Enclosure). Edges welded and ground smooth, leaving interior fillets; galvanized after fabrication; gasketed covers, stainless steel screws; factory painted with gray enamel. Gaskets to be factor made of an approved type. G. Floor Mounted Junction or Pull Boxes: Heavy wall cast iron with flanged lip, galvanized; gasketed, screwed-on, watertight coverplate, drilled and tapped conduit openings as required; minimum size 6" square by 4" deep H Floor Boxes: 1 Fully adjustable before and after installation. 2 Watertight cast iron units in slabs on grade Galvanized steel, concrete tight, in suspended slabs. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (9) 3. Minimum volume of 30 cubic inches but not less than required for the number of conductors indicated considering any devices installed 4. Compatible with slab thickness. 5. 4" diameter nominal, heavy brass coverplate with combination 2" and 1" plugs, or cover compatible with device Gasket between adjusting ring and box. 6 Conduit entrances as required, plug unused openings 7. Ganged units with barriers for multiple outlets or special types where indicated 8. Brass carpet flange in carpeted areas 9 For junction box use, provide conduit elbow with flush brass coupling for extension above floor 10 For flush mounted duplex outlets, provide brass cover with individual hinged caps 11 For floor mounted outlets, provide monuments as specified under Paragraph titled "Wiring Devices". I. Floor Boxes, Afterset" 1 UL rated for use in 2 hour rated floors. 2 Suitable for installation in 3" cored hole. 3 Integral junction box below floor for feed through 4 For flush mounted duplex outlets provide brass cover with individual hinged caps 5 For floor mounted outlets, provide monuments as specified under Paragraph titled "Wiring Devices" J Backboxes- Refer to Communication and Signal Sections of the spectf«saJ*ons. Provide outlet boxes of dimensions and configuration required for devices and equipment specified therein Verify with equipment supplier. 2.4 CONCRETE PULL BOXES, TRANSFORMER PADSi A Precast Concrete Pull Boxes Outside Building, Branch Circuiting- Where not otherwise noted or detailed, provide bottomless units with reinforced bolt down concrete cover, outside dimensions 13" by 19" by 12" deep minimum, m traffic areas, provide bolt down traffic covers Provide minimum 12" depth of crushed rock or pea gravel below boxes for drainage B Pull Boxes Distribution: 1 Provide precast concrete pull boxes where indicated, 48" square by 48" deep minimum dimensions, depth as required, complete with pull irons on four sides, conduit entry provisions on four sides, 8" diameter x 5" deep dry sump, two cable racks per side, galvanized steel frame and two piece, bolt down, cast iron or steel cover Traffic type in traffic areas Provide end bells for all ducts 2 Racks to be hot dipped galvanized, equipped with adjustable hooks and porcelain insulators as required to separate feeders or signal systems, and keep conductors off bottom 3 Paint cover and frame with two coats of asphaltum paint. 4 Caulk between sections and coat exterior with waterproof compound 5 Set pull boxes on 6" deep gravel or sand bed, flush with paving in paved areas with paving sloping away from pull boxes. In unpaved areas locate boxes so that runoff water will not drain to pull box, set cover 2" above finished grade and provide 6" thick by 12" wide concrete apron around box, sloping away from cover. 6 Alternate Poured in place pull boxes of equivalent charactenstics may be provided. Submit structural details and calculation for review 7. Identification. Cast system designation in covers in 2" size letters as directed. Secondary power - ELECTRICAL. Communications systems - SIGNAL. C. Precast Transformer Pads 1 Provide dimensions, configurations and accessories as indicated on drawings and as required. 2 For utility company transformers, comply with utility company requirements WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (10) 3. Where transformers are subject to vehicle damage, provide galvanized steel pipe barriers, 30" into concrete, 30" exposed, poured full of concrete, on 4' centers D Hand Holes (Grounding) 10" round (I.D ) cast traffic box with cast iron or galvanized steel cover. E Submittals Provide shop drawings Include for pull boxes structural data, loading characteristics, accessories and boxes elevations of all sides, as constructed 2.5 CONDUCTORS - 600V A. GENERAL *) 1. Manufactured within eight (8) months of installation, of soft drawn copper of not less than 98 percent conductivity, conforming with ASTM Specification and NEC, 600V insulation unless specifically noted otherwise, of the type specified, standard American Wire Gauge (AWG) sizes, solid for No 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No 8 AWG and larger Use Stranded conductors below No 8 AWG for special applications and as noted 2 Provide new conductors delivered to the site in original, unbroken packages, plainly marked or tagged with Underwriters' labels, size, type, insulation and voltage rating of the wire, name of manufacturing company and the trade name of the wire, date of manufacture B Conductor Insulation. 1 For dry locations XHHW, THHN/THWN 2 Connections to Recessed Fixtures from Remote Outlet in Wet Locations XHHW-2, THWN-2. 3 Through Ballast Housings, and for Connections to Recessed Fixtures in Dry Locations RHH, THHN, XHHW 4 In Exposed Conduit on Roof or in Conduit Concealed under Roofing Material Ml (wet locations) Exception Short conduit extensions (6' or less) to roof mounted equipment may be same as remainder of circuit 5 For Communication and Signal Systems and for Control of Mechanical Equipment. THWN throughout unless otherwise specified herein or in other sections of the specifications. 6 ' For Pendants and Cords Underwriters' Type SJ or SJO with ground wire, or as indicated 7 On Load Side of Ground Fault Interrupter Circuit Breakers Cross-linked polyethylene insulation with tape over conductors and dielectric constant of 3 or less Submit cable data with shop drawings 2.6 SWITCHBOARDS A GENERAL 1 Complete factory assembled, metal enclosed assembly with lifting means, consisting of the required number of 90" high (unless available headroom requires 78" height), self-supported, vertical sections, including pull and/or transition sections, bolted together to form a floorstandmg assembly, front and rear aligned. Service and feeder termination suitable for bus or wire connections as indicated Rated for 75°C feeder and circuit wiring Ratings as indicated on the drawings. 2 Device handle heights not to exceed 6'-6" above working surface (per NEC) considering installation on a 3" high concrete base pad 3 Rodent proof ventilation as required to maintain allowable temperature rise at rated capacity 4. Interfacing of external bus and/or cable conductors and control wiring with all related equipment supplied herein, under other sections of the work, or by utility company 5 All devices, controls, auxiliaries, and instrumentation, as indicated on the drawings and as required for the specified function, assembled, interwired and pretested, prior to shipment, at the manufacturer's plant. j WLC/0414200 I ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 , (11) 6. Switching and protective devices with visible means of ON-OFF identification. 7 Minimum RMS symmetrical rating of switchboards to be 25,OOOA (240V) but not less than 10% above available Smallest device rating not less than switchboard rating 8. Where switchboard circuit breaker trip ratings do not exceed 70A power panelboards may be used 9. Anti-turn (two bolt), solderless, copper saddle type incoming and outgoing feeder terminals per paragraph titled "Connectors and terminations, Line Voltage Conductors". 10 Verify top or bottom entry and instruct equipment supplier. 11 Switchboard and device settings and ratings to be based on available short circuit capacity. 12 Submittals to include voltage/current rating, short circuit rating of board and devices, overall dimensions, available conduit space, circuit schedule, circuit numbers, device rating and description, conductor ratings, one line diagram with circuits numbered, nameplate schedule, equipment weight, motor center and control panel internal and interconnecting wiring diagrams, certification of conformance 13 Shop drawings, operation and maintenance data, identification and testing as described in Part I Construction 1 12 gauge minimum sheet steel, phosphatized, primed and factory finished ANSI 61, with removable, screwed on, pan type, side, top and rear access plates, capable of being moved into installation position without deformation or damage, and bolted directly to the floor without use of floor sills Seismically braced and bolted 2 Full height vertical wiring compartments with hinged pan type access doors, top and bottom wiring compartments, cadmium plated or galvanized hardware and captive screws 3 Drain roof of front access gear to front of gear and freestanding gear to rear of gear Do not trap water on roof of gear. Bussing 1 Flat copper bussing, silver plated at joints, mounted on high impact, nontrackmg insulators braced for available fault current Label boards for required short circuit rating 2 Compression type bolts at all bus joints using a combination of flat and spring type washers. 3. Unreduced, fully rated horizontal bus for length of board, arranged for future expansion, and rated not less than the mam device Incoming bus rated not less than the mam device or sum of main devices. 4. Full height vertical bus in all sections. Switchboard vertical bus rating equal to sum of devices and spare devices served, but not less than two-thirds of the horizontal bus rating for two sections or one-half for three or more sections 5. A-B-C bus arrangements throughout, left to nght, top to bottom, and front to rear 6. Bus assembly to maintain UL clearances without reliance on any insulating matenal 7 Full length copper equipment ground bus 1/4" by 2" cross section secured and bonded to each section of board, with terminals for feeder ground connections 8 Fully rated neutral bus insulated from ground for all grounded neutral boards with a removable neutral bus link 9. Horizontal bus located not less than 8" from front panels and bottom of boards. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 v (12) D Features 1. Ground fault protection on mam breakers Omit ground fault protection for emergency systems. 2. Spare devices for all switchboards as indicated on the drawings, but not less than one for each board containing eight or more feeder devices and rated not less than the smallest feeder or branch device in the board. 3 Fully equipped spaces including bus extensions, drilling and tapping of busses, suitable dead plates, but less device connecting straps, as indicated, but not less than one per switchboard and not less than one for each six devices or fraction thereof, rated not less than the smallest feeder or branch device in the board 4 Devices and wiring connected ahead of mams or energized from external sources to be isolated with barriers and identified 5. NEMA Type 13 dust tight and oiltight, transformer push-to-test type indicating pilot lamps with lamps replaceable from exterior 6 Metering as indicated or specified E. Wiring. 1 No 14 AWG minimum, NEC switchboard type, terminated with spade lugs on screw stud type terminal blocks, on bakelite frame 2 Color coding reserving white for neutral and green for equipment ground. Colored tape identification is equivalent to colored insulation Conductors fanned, laced and identified with number strips 3. Isolate wiring from external sources and identify F Circuit Devices- Types as designated on the drawings and meeting the requirements of applicable paragraphs of the specifications, short circuit rating not less than switchboard rating Provide for padlocking in OFF position G Switchboards of 2.500A and Lower Rating with Breakers 1 ,OOOA or Less NEMA Class I, drip proof, front accessible, switchboard construction with flush group mounted devices connected and removed and maintained from the front, suitable for mounting with back against the wall Weatherproof on exterior. H Services Switchboards Pull section for underground service Mam and utility company metering section Terminations per utility company standards. Minimum 50.000A symmetrical short circuit rating but not less than that available Distribution sections with devices as indicated Mam breakers approved for 100% of nameplate rating, mounted in the switchboard. I. Distribution Switchboards' 1. Floorstandmg switchboards for more than six devices 2 Floorstandmg or wall mounted units of panelboard construction for six or less devices (including specified spares and/or spaces) 2 7 METERING. A Utility Metering: Per utility company standards 2 8 PANELBOARDS A General Features: 1 Code gauge galvanized or galvannealed sheet steel cabinets, with corners lapped and welded or riveted, dead front, dead rear, front accessible. • 2 Flush mounted in areas exposed to public view Surface mounted in electrical, communication, mechanical and storage rooms 3 Trim, portions of cabinet exposed to view and surface mounted cabinets to be factory phosphatized, primed and finished medium gray to match switchboards. In painted walls where exposed to public view (e.g., corridors, offices), field paint trim to match wall as directed by Architect WLC/0414200 ; ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 , (13) 4 Full height unreduced copper bus, rigidly supported. Solderless, saddle type, copper lugs for connection per paragraph titled "Connections and Terminations, Line Voltage Conductors". Bus feeder sequence as for switchboards Solid neutral bar for grounded systems Lugs sized for feeders rated for 75°C wiring Subbreakers, split bus, mam lugs, mam breaker, double lugs, voltage and current ratings, all as indicated on the drawings I 5. Minimum bus rating of 225A, except where 100A is specifically indicated, but not less than feeder protective device rating 6. Mam breakers, common trip, single handle, mounted vertically ahead of panel bus Replacing of branch devices with mam breaker is not acceptable, except for panels in motor control centers 7 Copper equipment ground bus for termination of feeder and branch circuit grounding conductors. 8 Oversize gutters for feed through, where indicated or required, sized not less than five times the total cross-sectional area of the through feed cable and connectors in addition to required branch circuit gutter Where double lugs are indicated ahead of mam breakers, provide oversized can sufficient for connections 9 Incorporate associated contactors, relays, etc , in separate control section of the panel behind separate door, either with common frame, or adjacent to breaker panel where space is available Where push button or contactor bypass is required, mount on dead plate behind panel door so that no live parts are exposed 10. Hinged lockable door covering all devices Flush catch and cylinder lock. Vault handle on doors over 4' high All panels and cabinets keyed alike Provide two keys per panel and cabinet Keys to match existing panelboards where adding to existing facility. 11 Raintight enclosures in damp locations. 12 Certify conformance with the specifications B Lighting and Appliance Panelboards Additional Features- 1 Minimum size 20" wide by 5-3/4" deep, unless specifically indicated otherwise 2. Index cardholder on inside of door with typewritten circuit schedules reflecting as- built circuiting, behind clear plastic cover on inside of door, metal sided. 3 Automatic circuit breakers, 1" wide nominal, molded case, trip free, quick-make, quick-break, thermal magnetic type, bolted to the bus, with handles clearly indicating size and tripped position, of size and arrangement as shown on schedules Common internal trip for multi-pole breakers Permanent factory installed metal circuit numbers on adjacent trim (including spaces), screwed or riveted to trim Adhesively applied labels are not acceptable Where indicated, or where used for switching, use UL listed SWD switching duty breakers 4 Minimum panel interrupting rating of 10,OOOA below 150V to ground including mam and subfeed breakers Where panels are subject to higher short circuit current on the basis of series rated systems, provide nameplate describing the series rating characteristics, and submit substantiation. 5. Circuit breakers with integral ground fault detectors serving circuits on the exterior or in wet locations, where indicated Provide 1 or 2 pole units with ground trip setting at 30 mA 6 Breaker lockout/lock on devices as specified under paragraph titled "Spares". 7. Isolate equipment ground bus where indicated to serve isolated ground receptacles. C. Power Panelboards Additional Features 1 All requirements of lighting panelboards, including doors. 2. Convertible type construction 3. RMS symmetrical rating equal to interrupting capacity of smallest device but not less than 22.000A (240V) 4. Breaker ratings per paragraph titled "Circuit Breakers, Molded Case". 5 Device handle padlocking provision 6 Minimum bus rating of 225A 7 Minimum side wiring gutter width for branch wiring of 5" where largest device is 225A and 8" for larger devices WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (14) 8 Where number of devices requires use of more than one section, provide totally enclosed sections, each with full capacity bus, and double lugs for full capacity feeder connection between sections 9 Equipped spaces as shown, but not less than one per board 2 9 TERMINAL CABINETS A Construct as described for lighting panels and key alike with panels B. 12" wide by 18" high by 4-1/2" deep, minimum dimensions C. ' Vertical barrier between line and low voltage sections, and where required D Fireproofed plywood backing 3/4" thick, for attachment of terminal strips For fire alarm system, omit plywood and provide metal channels E Requirements of signal and communication systems suppliers as specified under applicable sections of the specification, and as required by system supplier 2 10 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS (UNLESS OTHERWIDE INDICATED) A Full voltage, across-the-line, nonreversmg, horsepower rated, size No 1 minimum with three thermal bimetallic type overload relays, ambient compensated where starters are remote from motors, and with under voltage release Overloads sized for actual motor nameplate data per manufacturer's recommendations Provide list of motor nameplate data and associated overloads. Coil 120V rated and fused. B Arc extinguishing characteristics and silver-to-silver renewable contacts. Auxiliary contacts as required by wiring diagrams but not less than two normally open, field convertible If not field convertible, provide additional normally closed contact C Wiring points brought out to numbered terminals Interlocked requirements, remote control, status indicated, per control sequence and/or wiring diagrams on mechanical and electrical drawings D Mount NEMA Type 13, dust tight and oiltight devices on starter face including manual reset button, red RUNNING push-to-test, transformer type pilot light, hand-off-automatic switch for automatically controlled motors and additional devices where indicated or scheduled Two speed motor starters to have HIGH, LOW pilot lights E Separately mounted combination starters to have magnetic motor starter and switch or circuit breaker (as indicated) in common enclosure behind door with bypassable door interlock, features as specified for components. F Enclosures to be NEMA type 12 dust tight for separately mounted units and NEMA Type 3R for weatherproof units. 2 11 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS A Voltage as required, horsepower rated, padlockable, toggle operated, with pole and bimetallic overload heater for each ungrounded leg, ON, OFF and TRIPPED indication, integral RUNNING pilot light, flush mounted where practical B. Where used for motor disconnect switch, omit overloads and pilot light WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (15) 2 12 CONTACTORS AND RELAYS A For Remote Control of Lighting Circuits (Unless Otherwise Indicated) UL listed, mechanically held, electrically operated, momentarily energized, single solenoid, relays and/or contactors of indicated ratings, operating independently of gravity or switch position, positive locking in both positions, manual operation without tools, manual operating lever for ratings 60A and above. For branch circuit control, use 20A rated relays with required number of poles. Where controlled by two-wire device such as photocell, provide SPOT module integral with relay or contactor. Install on sound absorbing shock mounts in switchboards, panels, or where individually mounted. B For Magnetically Held Contactors: Resistive load and horsepower rated motor starters, less overload elements, applied per manufacturer's recommendations. Designation "EC" C For Control of Resistive Heating Devices. Heavy-duty heater control contactors, resistive load rated for 100,000 operations D For Air Conditioning Systems or Motor Control" 600V, AC, 10A, heavy duty, industrial type relays, magnetically held contacts as indicated with minimum of one normally open and one normally closed contact, field convertible, "T" rated for tungsten lamps, continuous duty coils, visible contacts or indicator E. For Line Switching of 120V Motors Automatically Controlled" Magnetic motor starters with integral hand-off-automatic switch and pilot light F For Time Delay Relay Pneumatic AC type (unless otherwise indicated) with normally closed and normally open auxiliary contacts and time delay contact or contacts as indicated, field adjustable setting. G Where required by number of poles indicated, use multiple relays in parallel H NEMA Type 12 enclosure for individually mounted units 213 TIME SWITCHES A General: Type, voltage, and with number of poles indicated, heavy duty, self-starting, high torque, synchronous motors, 20A, tungsten rated contacts at 277V Manual bypass switch for each pole, accessible without opening door or externally mounted, which does not disturb automatic settings. Spring driven reserve to operate clock for ten hours minimum on power failure and automatically rewind on power restoration. Terminal strip for No. 10 AWG wire minimum, dead front with door open California Energy Commission certified for lighting control Set on-off trips based on Owner approved schedule. List time switch, load controlled and on-off times Include in maintenance manual B For HVAC and Plumbing Control, and Where Indicated, Seven Day Calendar Type 6-1/2" minimum dial. Accuracy of plus or minus 15 minutes, integral hand-off-automatic control, accessible, without opening cover, or externally mounted, for each circuit, ON-OFF trippers with minimum one hour on period and two hours between consecutive OFF and ON operation C For Control of Interior Circuits and Exterior Lights on Photocell Seven day calendar type Same as HVAC and plumbing control unless otherwise indicated D For Control of Exterior Lighting and Signs (Where not Photocell Controlled) and Where Noted: Twenty-four hour, astronomic dial One to six day skip operation Sunset ON, adjustable OFF, in one-half hour increments Set for city of use E For Control of Mechanically Held Contactors: Double throw contacts F For Control of Mechanically Held Contactors in Paralled with Other Control Devices. Double throw, momentary contacts, rated for 120A inrush at 120V. G Where solid-state switching is employed, isolate time switch circuit from loads being switched, per manufacturer's instructions. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (16) H. Engraved micarta nameplate to indicate clock designation and load controlled I Wiring diagrams govern where shown on drawings. 2 14 PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL A Encapsulated, quick-response, cadmium sulfide photocell, supply voltage 105V-285V, turn-on at 2+ 20% FC, turn-off 2.5 to 3.5 times turn-on level; heat sink; surge protected, fail-safe design, rated 1,800 VA HID and 1,000 W tungsten; mount to IEEE-NEMA locking receptacle in cast aluminum housing B. Use with double throw electrically held relays for operation of mechanically-held relays and contactors Locate relay module in NEMA 3R enclosure on roof in conjunction with photocell, or adjacent to associated time switch 2 15 SMOKE DETECTOR (HVAC INTERFACE) A Provide detectors where indicated on plans. B ' Approved by code enforcing authority for indicated use C Photoelectric type, solid sate microprocessor LED visual alarm D Self-contained, 120V, unit to provide signal to motorized dampers or HVAC control panels E Auxiliary contacts, remote alarm, where indicated F For duct detectors, provide a minimum or two auxiliary contacts, uniform detection sensitivity for air velocities between 300' to 3500' per minute, sample tubes, plug-in detector, and remote led indicator. 2 16 WATERFLOW AND/OR PRESSURE SWITCHES A. Furnished under Fire Protection section connected under this section. B Coordinate with Fire Protection section 2 17 SPRINKLER VALVE TAMPER SWITCH A Furnished under Fire Protection section connected under this section. B. Coordinate with Fire Protection section 2 18 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A Provide ratings as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein Do not utilize breakers scheduled to be phased out of production. Certify that breakers provided will have replacements available for a period of ten years B Circuit Breakers, Molded Case 1. Trip free, quick-make, quick-break, inverse time delay and instantaneous trip elements, handles clearly indicating rating and ON, OFF, or TRIPPED position, type and rating indicated and specified Multi-pole breakers to be common trip with single molded handle For nonautomatic units, omit trip. 2 Individually mounted breakers in NEMA Type 12 enclosures generally, and NEMA Type 3R for weatherproof units NEMA Type 1 where flush mounting is indicated 3. Padlocking provisions for breakers individually mounted and in switchboards, motor control center, and power panelboards 4 All breakers to be labeled for 75°C wire including enclosure 5. Interchangeable plugs designed to prevent tampering. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (17) 6 Breakers ahead of transformers to meet transformer manufacturer's recommendations regarding inrush current 7 For switchboards, power panelboards, provide single handle three pole units, unless otherwise indicated, UL labeled interrupting rating not less than the rating specified for the equipment, or the following, whichever is higher. Breaker Minimum Trip Rating Minimum Frame RMS Symmetrical 15A to 60A 10OA Molded Case 65.000A @ 240V 70A to 200A 250A Molded Case 42000A @ 240V with Adjustable Magnetic Trip 225A to 500A 600A Electronic 100,000A @ 240V Trip Molded Case 600A to 700A 800A Electronic 100.000A @ 240V Trip Molded Case C Electronic Trip Breakers 1 Microprocessor based, 9 function, true RMS sensing design with sensing accuracy through the thirteenth harmonic 2 Continuous rating determined by interchangeable (field replaceable) rating plug, sensor, and long-time pick-up switch. Anti-tampenng rating plug seal 3 Visual trip indication for ground fault 4. Externally accessible test port. 5 Adjustable long time pick-up. 6 Adjustable short time delay simultaneously adjusting magnetic pick-up and time delay or adjustable short time pick-up with I2T ramp 7 Ground fault (where indicated or specified) with adjustable pick-up and delay and switchable I2 T ramp 8 Test probe receptacles to permit testing without exposing live parts Provide one portable test kit in container suitable for storage, and obtain receipt Submit shop drawing D Settings Coordinate settings of mam circuit breakers with serving utility company equipment in accordance with the coordination study. 219 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A Heavy duty (HD) horsepower rated, quick-make, quick-break, safety type, externally operated, rating and number of poles required, capable of switching 10 times switch rating. Fused for branch circuit protection, and in elevator machine rooms, with UL rejection type clips Nonfused for motor disconnect where indicated Switch and enclosure to be labeled for 75° wire for fuse ratings 125A and larger B. Include bypassable interlock, padlock provisions, positive ON and OF^ indications, molded case breaker mechanism or visible blades, single switch mechanism to preclude mechanical single phasing, solid neutral bar for four wire feeders, copper terminals, spring loaded clips with noncurrent carrying springs Provide wiring terminals as specified under paragraph titled "Connectors and Terminations, Low voltage Conductors". C Enclosures to be NEMA Type 1 in interior dry locations and NEMA Type 3R on exterior and in wet locations D. Use manual motor starting switches for manual control and/or disconnecting of 120V fractional motors and for disconnecting of 3 phase motors up to 5HP at 230V Flush mounted in finished areas. NEMA 1 enclosure on interior, NEMA 3R on exterior. WLC/041420Q ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (18) 2.20 FUSES, LOW VOLTAGE A NEC dimension, rejection type. B 600A and Smaller: Class RK1, low peak dual element with separate overload and short circuit elements C Coordinate fuses with each other, and with circuit breakers which they are protecting D Provide label inside each switch cover indicating specific type of fuse required for replacement E Provide spare fuses per Paragraph titled "Spares" 2 21 TRANSFORMERS, DRY TYPE A Control Transformers. 1 Machine tool type designed for high inrush 2 Temperature rise below 55C at continuous rated full load. 3 Terminal board construction 4 Secondary fuse blocks 5 Rating not less than indicated or specified but adequate for inrush currents of connected control devices. 2.22 WIRING DEVICES A General. 1 Specification grade 2 General Use Ivory color (as available) unless otherwise noted or specified 3 Screw type terminals on all devices, suitable for up to No 10 solid copper conductors 4 Where not specified herein, provide configuration as indicated on drawings 5. Explosion proof devices to meet classification of location B Toggle Switches: 1 Flush tumbler, AC type, insulated base, completely enclosed 2 20A, tungsten load rated, at 277V. 3 1 pole, 2 pole, 3-way, 4-way or key operated as indicated on drawings. 2-pole unit usable for (2) 120V circuits or (1) 208V Circuit 4 Thermal overload switch, rated 1 HP at 120V. Refer to paragraph titled "Manual Motor Starters". 5 Momentary type, three position, single pole, double throw, two circuit, spring return to center OFF position. 6 Security locking switch, cam or cylinder lock all keyed alike unless otherwise noted. C Door Operated Switch' Plunger type, 6A, 125V with back box and strike plate, normally open or closed contact as required. Flush mount in doorjamb on hinged side of door D Pilot Lights (Lighting Control). Flush neon type with lucite jewel suitable for use in switch plate opening, ganged on plate with associated switch, 120V, red jewel on emergency systems, green jewel on normal systems, lighted in the ON position unless otherwise noted E. Receptacles. 1 General Number of poles and ampere rating as shown on drawings and of NEMA standard configurations. Ground pole connected to circuit grounding conductor WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (19) 2 Duplex Convenience Receptacles: 20A, 125V, grounding third pole, side wired for 2 wire circuit use Where 2 circuits are indicated, provide individual circuit for each half NEMA5-20R 3 Clock Receptacles for Surface Clocks (Non Central Systems): Flush type with recessed grounding receptacle and clock support hanger with removable stainless steel plate, NEMA 5-15R For recessed clocks, install back box furnished by clock supplier 4 Single 120V Convenience Receptacles in Floor Boxes. Grounding type, with adapters as required, for mounting in floor box. NEMA 5-20R 5 Duplex Receptacles in Floor Boxes Standard device behind special plate described under floor boxes NEMA 5-20R. 6 Ground Fault Interrupting (GFI) Receptacles- NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacle with integral ground fault protection and lift cover 7 Weatherproof Receptacles, Flush Mounting. NEMA 5-20R duplex GFI outlet in single gang extension with gasketed cast aluminum lift cover that maintains weatherproof rating with plug inserted 8. Weatherproof Receptacles, Freestanding. NEMA 5-20R duplex GFI outlet mounted in cast box, stub mounted, with gasketed cast aluminum lift cover that maintains weatherproof rating with plug inserted Provide plugged hubs in box sides for extension. 9 Special Receptacles. Letter designation appears adjacent to special receptacle symbol Simplex unless otherwise noted Refer to schedule on drawings F Motor Control (For Magnetic Starters and Individual Mounting) 1 Push Buttons, Selector Switches Oiltight for starter and contactor control, 10A tungsten lamp rated, miniature type 2 Pilot Lights Oiltight, push-to-test, miniature, transformer type. G Wall Plates 1 Device plates of one make and design for all outlets, smooth, satin finish, Type 302, stainless steel, beveled edges, to fit device 2. Galvanized pressed steel plates, to conform with box and device 3 For Exterior Locations Cast aluminum lift cover unless otherwise indicated 4 Voice/data system plates by system supplier unless otherwise noted. 5 Engrave plates as described under other paragraphs H Telephone and Signal Systems 1. Telephone Outlet on Floor Box 2" ± diameter cast aluminum standpipe or kick ring 2 Signal System, Computer, Work Processor outlet, Dictation Outlet on Floor Box Same as telephone outlet 2.23 MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLY, IN SURFACE METAL RACEWAY (GENERAL USE) A. General- 1. Provide complete raceway assembly formed of 0 040 thick cold rolled steel, with removable cover, including all required elbows, tees, couplings, cable wire clips, blank end fittings, finished ANSI 61 Gray Include approved internal ground conductor. Comply with requirements of NEC 352A and UL 5 2 Provide penodic Vz" and 3/i" knockouts and mounting holes on base Include suitable access opening for outlet box mounted flush in wall 3 See drawing for arrangement and special requirements B. Electrical Raceway: 1 Nominal dimensions 1 -7/32"D x 2-3/4"W. 2 Utilize standard devices and plates as specified under paragraph on devices WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11721/05 (20) 2 24 LOW VOLTAGE SIGNALS (WHERE NOT OTHERWISE NOTED) A Control Transformer- 40 VA minimum, at 16V and 24V, integral self-restoring circuit breaker, 120V primary, install in flush mounted outlet box unless otherwise noted v B Push Button. Quick-make and break, momentary, flush outlet box mounting, with integral plate 2.25 LIGHTING FIXTURES, GENERAL A Provide complete lighting system, wired, assembled and operable, including lighting equipment and accessories as shown on the drawings, descnbed in the fixture schedules, specified herein and covered by allowance. Accessories include canopies, suspension of proper lengths, hickeys, castings, sockets, holders, reflectors, ballasts, diffusing matenal, louvers, plaster and mounting frames, lamps, recessing boxes, supporting brackets and channels, where required to span structural members B Fixtures to be factory prewired and preassembled Catalog numbers are given for manufacturers' identification Conform to written descriptive requirements governing material and fabrication, either in the general or specific sections Where catalog numbers are indicated as modified, no modification will be required if the standard unit fully conforms to all descriptive requirements in the specifications and conforms with specified ceiling construction Fixtures to be UL labeled for location and operating conditions indicated C Fixtures of the same type to be of one manufacturer and of identical finish and appearance Where not identified on drawings, provide same type as indicated in similar locations D For recessed fixtures, provide frame and trim compatible with ceiling type and construction Refer to ceiling specifications and architectural drawings to determine types For fixtures recessed in concrete, provide galvanized steel housing with bitumastic finish approved for the purpose E Provide adequate lamp shielding, proper ventilation and heat dissipation F Secure diffusers to trim by devices not requiring tools for removal, or for relampmg Provide safety chain attachment to fixture housing for portions of fixtures which are removed for servicing relampmg G Provide shop drawings for custom and modified standard fixtures, and catalog cuts illustrating conformance with specifications for standard fixtures Drawings to indicate materials, assembly, and finish Coordinate fixture type with ceiling supplier and submit fixture compatible with ceiling system 1. Include dimensions of the assembled fixture, weight, ballast characteristics, description of lens or diffuser material and finish, socket specifications, frame, housing, reflector, special accessories, recommended lamps and list of agencies which have labeled the fixture Indicate the number and type of wires for which fixture with attached junction box has been approved. Indicate conformance with temperature rating requirements of specifications. 2 Provide (for types in quantity of 30 or more) photometric report from an recognized testing laboratory equal to the standard report furnished by E T.L, including candlepower distribution curves and tables, luminaire brightness readings, tabulation of coefficients of utilization and percent efficiency, and a description of the unit and test conditions. H Before ordenng the specified lighting fixtures (for quantities of 30 or more), make available to the Owner's representative, on request, samples for his final approval These samples may be on display at local distributor or manufacturer's showroom. The Owner reserves the right to change the fixture selection at no additional cost to himself except for actual fixture cost difference Provide credit if fixture cost is less WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (21) I. General Constructions 1 Sheet Metal: Free of tool marks and dents. Painted after punching and forming to eliminate exposed unpamted edges. Intersections and joints formed true, sufficiently rigid to prevent distortion after assembly. 2 Castings. Free of blemishes, scale and rust, and finished smooth 3 Aluminum Surfaces, Nonreflectmg: Anodized clear or with color as indicated Castings to be irradiated, sandblasted or anodized. 4 Aluminum Reflectors Treat with alzak process to provide permanent reflective surface of 85% minimum Extruded reflectors to be unscored, bright dipped and clear anodized. J. Lighting Fixture Description. Refer to schedule on drawings or in specifications and to General Requirements in other paragraphs herein for full fixture descnption. K. Provide only UL listed lighting fixtures This applies to custom fixtures, as well as manufacturers' standard fixtures that are modified L All exterior lighting fixtures to be UL listed for damp or wet locations, whichever applies Damp locations are defined as exterior protected locations Wet locations, completely exposed to the weather. M. Submit a production sample of all custom and modified lighting fixtures to the Architect for review 2.26 FLUORESCENT FIXTURE BALLASTS A General. 1 Provide ballast of proper type and voltage for each lighting fixture as scheduled on the drawings or in other paragraphs of the specifications, and meeting requirements herein 2 Provide electronic ballasts throughout Electromagnetic (core and coil) type, may be used only where electronic type are not available or not applicable 3 Codes and Standards (Minimum)- a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) b California Electrical Code c. California Energy Commission (CEC) d Certified Ballast manufacturers (CBM) e. Electrical testing Laboratories (ETL). f Energy Policy and Conservation Act (EPCA), National Energy Conservation Amendments (NAECA). g Federal Communications Commission (FCC) regulations Part 18 and National Electrical manufacturers Association (NEMA) limits for Electromagnetic Interference (EMI and Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) h Underwriters laboratories, Inc. (UL) labeling and/or listing. 4 Sound rating of "A" 5 UL Class P rated, without any components containing PCB 6 Fuse on each ballast serving 36" or 48" lamps, rated per manufacturer's recommendation. 7 Rated 50°F minimum for fixtures on interior. Rate 0°F minimum for fixtures on exterior, in parking garages and in refrigerated spaces 8 HPF throughout including for compact lamps. 9. Equip each fixture with (1) or (2) electronic ballasts as required For continuous row single lamp fixtures, use common ballast for adjacent fixtures as practical Three and four lamp ballasts are not acceptable unless specifically indicated 10 Where indicated or specified, provide radio frequency suppressor for each fixture. Where ballasts in fixture are supplied from separate conductors, provide separate suppressor for each ballast. 11 Ballast to provide normal rated life for specified lamp. 12 Start lamps in Rapid Start mode WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (22) 13 Where ballasts are located remote from fixture, install in lockable, sheet steel, ventilated enclosure, keyed alike with branch circuit panelboards Space ballasts not closer than manufacturer's recommendation. Verify maximum allowable distance of ballasts from fixtures. B. Electronic Ballasts, Additional Requirements 1. Operate lamps at frequencies between 25 and 40 KHz from 60 Hz input source with less than 10% flicker, at ambient temperature of 50°F to 105°F with 60°C maximum case temperature during operation. 2 Maximum light regulation ± 5% with ± 10% input voltage variation 3 Suitable for operation of F17T8, F25T8 and F32T8, one two or three lamps, types as indicated or specified, design for optimum operation of the specified lamps. 4 Solid-state consisting of rectifier, high frequency inverter, power control and regulation circuitry, in steel case, marked with manufacturer's name, part number, supply voltage, sound rating, power factor, open circuit voltage, RMS current draw, input watts, starting current, crest factor, efficiency and UL listing 5 Ballast life to be unaffected by lamp failure 6 Minimum ballast factor of 95% 7 Maximum current crest factor of 1 7. 8 Maximum total harmonic distortion of 15%, maximum third harmonic distortion of 10% 9 Minimum power factor of 90% 10 Withstand line transients per IEEE 587, Category A 11 Rated life of 30,000 hours based on 10 hours per day 12 Submit with shop drawings a certified test report from an independent test laboratory illustrating conformance with specified requirements 13 Submit evidence with shop drawings from ballast supplier of three projects of significant magnitude, employing the proposed ballasts, in satisfactory operation for a minimum of one year Identify projects, operating personnel familiar with the ballast performance, and frequency of ballast failure. 14 Provide extended guarantee as described under Section 16000, Guarantee and Warranties C Dimming Ballasts: 1 Meet all applicable requirements for electronic ballasts. 2 Approved for use with dimming system as furnished 3 Provide dimming with low end of five percent light output, with consistent power output for indicated lengths and quantities of lamps N 4 Provide specified dimming level uniformly through all lamps, without flicker or striations. 5 Provide soft-start at levels set at dimmer control 2 27 FLUORESCENT FIXTURE A. Temperature Rating: 1 Design fixtures to limit ballast case temperature installed in fixtures to applicable UL Standards. - 2. Conform with Guarantee Requirements. B. Fixture Construction' 1 Lampholders: Bipm type Permitting full entry of lamp pins in a vertical plane, after which entry, a 90° rotation shall properly seat the lamp. Corrosion-resistant "edge-wipe" type lamp pin contacts. 2 Lampholders, Electronic Ballasts1 Suitable for frequencies employed, meeting recommendation of the ballast manufacturer 3. Lampholder Fastening Securely fastened to brackets or socket straps in manner to eliminate flexing under normal lamp pressure. Replaceable without removing fixture from the installation. Backed by fixture housing or end plate to prevent twisting WLC/041420D ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (23) 4 Ballast. Fasten directly to metal fixture housing at three points, using captive bolts or screws, or equivalent method 5. Housings and Bodies Recessed Troffers Fabricated of die-formed, cold-rolled /""\ steel not less than 20 U.S gauge welded into a one-piece assembly using lap x ) seam construction. Breaks, bends, edges, holes and knockouts accomplished by die-forming and machine operation Alternately, fabricated of extruded aluminum sections or die-formed from aluminum sheet of not less than No 16 B and S gauge aluminum, with sections positively interlocked to provide a rigid unit A complete die-formed housing of 22U. S gauge steel will be acceptable providing the unit is ribbed, embossed or paneled with a minimum of four cross ribs so as to be equivalent in strength to the above specified a Provide wiring and ballast compartment accessible when the fixture is in the installed position Wiring secured by clips or clamps to the body of the fixture, with the cover removed. b For troffers in suspended ceilings, in addition to seismic suspension, provide four clips attached to fixtures to positively tie fixture to T-bar or ceiling channel suspension In plaster and dry wall ceilings, provide all necessary framing, support and hardware 6 Finish- Finish visible fixture trim in color designated on drawings, or baked white enamel where not otherwise noted Rustproof metal parts Provide enamel where not otherwise noted Rustproof metal parts Provide enamel finish, baked-on at a minimum temperature of 300°F Enamel reflective surface to have 87 percent reflectivity, minimum 7 Diffusers and Lenses Provide types indicated on fixture schedules and as specified herein 8 Lenses Flat lens designed to direct light down and present low surface brightness within normal viewing angles; high molecular weight virgin acrylic plastic, smooth on one side, uniform pattern of male cones or hexagonal prisms on the other, 3/16" outside dimensions Special types where noted on fixture schedule. 9 Doors. For troffers, unless otherwise specified, provide separable, hinged door constructed of extruded aluminum, with mitered corners, secured in place by inconspicuous spring loaded, visible, finger operated catches, removable without tools, but hinged to preclude accidental dislodgment in the open position Incorporate light trap between door and fixture Retain lens firmly in door with clips or equivalent, but allowing for lens replacement without special tools 10. Fixture Wiring Wire with 600V, 105°C rated, thermoplastic insulation Interconnect between sockets and ballasts, and provide 12" minimum length pigtails Provide two wire pigtail for single circuit connection, four wire for two circuit connection where two neutrals are shown on drawings Where fixture is served from two sources, barrier wiring from emergency source as required and provide notation inside fixture indicating "supplied from two sources" 11 Recessed Fixture Connection Connect to fixture outlet, with 6' length maximum of flexible conduit with conductors insulated for rated fixture operating temperature 12 Recessed Downhghts- Provide mounting frame with high power factor ballast and an attached prewired junction box, rated for through wiring with 60°C conductors, designed for installation without installing trim, diffusers or lens Verify suitability of attached junction boxes for number of conductors indicated on drawings, provide additional boxes where attached junction box capacity is exceeded. 13. Spares' Provide spare diffusers and/or lenses on basis of one for every 100 fixtures of each type or fraction thereof, but not less than two nor more than twenty. 14 Fixture Testing: Test production run unit for fluorescent troffers furnished in quantities in excess of 100 units in presence of Owner's representative. Place fixture face down on flat surface with lamps installed but without diffuser. Raise one corner until the second comer clears the surface, without dropping lamp or damaging lamp holder. Repeat test with diffuser in place. Door shall not come unlatched and no permanent set shall occur in fixture. Submit test report WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (24) C. For fluorescent fixture specified to be chain hung, provide machine type steel chain, closed welded links, hot-dipped galvanized finish, 750 Ib rated tensile strength, weighing approximately 13 lbs/100 feet, capable of supporting fixture weights of 30 to 60 Ibs 2.28 INCANDESCENT FIXTURES A Porcelain screw type with nickel plated brass shell, silicone prelubncated medium base sockets, 660W, 250V, below 300 watts and mogul base, 1500W, 600V, for 300 watts and larger, unless otherwise noted. B For recessed fixtures, provide mounting frame with an attached prewired junction box, rated for through wiring with 60°C conductors, designed for installation without installing trim, diffusers or lens. Verify suitability of attached junction boxes for number of conductors indicated on drawings, and provide additional boxes where attached junction box capacity is exceeded. C For downlight fixtures with adjustable socket heights, make field adjustment to accommodate specified lamp prior to final installation D. Provide specific UL label for use and mounting Label Use 1C Insulated ceilings Non 1C (With Thermal Overload) Fixed ceilings SC Suspended accessible ceiling PC Concrete pour ceiling Damp Location Exterior protected locations Wet Location Exterior exposed locations E Fasten fixture sockets/and reflectors securely to body to prevent rotation or rocking during relamping F Fasten or hinge trims and lenses to the fixture body so that no part of the fixture must be held during the relamping procedure Securely retain lenses in lens door so that dropping of door cannot dislodge lens G Guarantee black alzak finished reflectors against fading for a minimum of two years ; including material and replacement costs H. Where cool beam lamps are indicated, provide fixtures Ul approved for that use I For fixtures with integral low voltage transformers, provide primary and secondary fusing. 2 29 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE FIXTURES A. Provide porcelain, screw type mogul sockets with nickel plated brass shells, silicone prelubncated, UL listed at 600V, 1500 watts, securely fastened to fixture body to prevent twisting or rocking of socket when lamping or relamping For pendant units, provide balanced construction for use on swivel hanger B. For interior use, where not otherwise specified, provide integral constant wattage, "B" sound rated, fluorescent style ballasts, meeting requirements for fluorescent fixture ballasts, and including automatic resetting thermal protector and fuse Use encased and potted type where fluorescent style is not available. C. For exterior use, where not otherwise specified, provide integral constant wattage, weatherproof, minus 20°F rated, high power factor ballasts complete with automotive type fuses in plastic fuse holders, wired into primary circuit. Where specified, provide integral lummaire construction, utilizing core and coil units, to provide same performance. D. Conform with ballast guarantee requirements E \ Provide ballast compatible with specified lamps and so certify. WLC/0414200 ; ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (25) 230 EXTERIOR, FLOODLIGHTING AND DECORATIVE STANDARDS ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. A. Complete installation including poles, anchor bolts, luminaries, lamps, ballasts, wiring as detailed and/or specified, mounted on reinforced concrete bases B. UL wet location label on fixtures on exterior or in wet locations. C. Exterior pendant or pole mounted fixtures to withstand minimum lateral load of thirty pounds per square foot of exposed surface. Certify conformance on shop drawings. D. Poles for exterior fixtures to be round tapered steel (unless otherwise detailed or specified), 11 gauge minimum, height as indicated, with welded steel baseplate, four galvanized anchor bolts, eight nuts and washers and hand hole with cover Poles to be galvanized and field painted to match fixture Painting to conform with PAINTING section of specification E Stainless steel or nonferrous hardware throughout on exterior fixtures F Grounding lugs on pole mounted fixtures G Acrylic diffusers on exterior of high heat resistance type When used with H I D lamps include an ultraviolet absorber to limit yellowing index change to plus 0 5 after 4000 hours exposure to 400 watt lamp 2 31 LAMPS General- Unless specified otherwise herein, furnish and install lamps for each fixture of type and wattage indicated on drawings or other section of the specification, compatible with specified ballast For fixtures on exterior or in cold locations, use lamps suitable for 0°F start Refer to paragraph titled "Spares" Lamps to be as follows where not otherwise specified Fluorescent Lamps (minimum Values) 1 General Rapid start, suitable for operation with electronic ballasts UON, 3500K, RE 835. 2. T8 Lamps 20,000 hour life, CRI 84; 17 watts, 1,375 lumens for 24" lamps, 25 watts, 2,200 lumens for 36" lamps, 32 watts, 2,950 lumens for 48" lamps 3 Compact Lamps' Four pin (UON) CRI 82, 10,000 hour life, 9 watts, 600 lumens, 13 watts, 900 lumens, 18 watts, 1,200 lumens, 26 watts, 1,800'lumens, 32 watts, 2,400 Lumens; 42 watts, 3,200 lumens lengths per fixture requirements Incandescent Lamps Inside frosted or as recommended by fixture manufacturer, 130V rated Metal Hahde. Phosphor coated, unless otherwise noted, universal burning type, used with compatible ballasts in enclosed fixtures Breaking of outer glass to disconnect supply to arc tube CRI 70 minimum. Initial Life Watt Base Lumens Hours Comment 100 E 17 7,900 10,000 Enclosed Fixture 175 BT28 14,000 10,000 Enclosed Fixture 250 BT28 20,500 10,000 Enclosed Fixture WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 , (26) E. High Pressure Sodium: Diffuse coated, CRI 22 unless otherwise noted, universal burning type, used with compatible ballasts Watt Base Initial Lumens Life-Hours 50 BT25 3,800 24,000 70 BT25 5,860 24,000 100 BT25 8,800 - 24,000 150 ED 25 15,000 24,000 250 BT28 26,000 24,000 2 32 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A Provide California Energy Commission approved, UL listed, passive infrared occupancy sensors in individual rooms, at locations, at locations indicated on drawings B Passive infrared Wall Sensor 1 Automatic on-off control of lighting loads in rooms as indicated 2. Rated for both incandescent and fluorescent lighting Up to 600 VA at 120V and up to 1200 VA at 277V with zero minimum Capable of switching electronic fluorescent ballasts 3 Horizontal field of view, minimum 170° x 15 feet for hand motion 4 Two position switch, automatic mode, and override of the automatic mode to turn lighting off even if room is occupied, automatic on mode shall activate only 50% of the lights, 2nd half of the lights must be manually turned on (2005 Title 24), automatic off mode shall turn off all lights (2005 Title 24) 5 Delayed automatic "off" (time-out) adjustable from minimum of 1 minute to a maximum of 20 minutes Movement in the room during the time-out penod to reset the time delay. 6 An ambient light override that may be set so that when sufficient ambient light (daylight) is present, the lighting will not turn on Adjustable from full daylight to less than 40 foot-candles 7 Ivory (unless otherwise noted) injection molded thermoplastic device body for mounting on a single gang plaster ring, with stainless steel GFI style (rectangular opening) plate 8 Two year manufacturer's warranty C Ultrasonic Ceiling Sensor: 1 Automatic on-off control of lighting loads in rooms as indicated. Unit complete with low voltage power supply, relay for switching multiple circuits with local manual switches single or multiple sensors in opposite directions as indicated on drawings. 2 Each sensor to have a field of range minimum of 25' x 25' for hand motion Multiple sensors to double the range. Transmitter and receivers angled 30° down form horizontal. 3 Sensor to have on-auto switch, adjustable time delay between 1-20 minutes, adjustable sensitivity and normally closed relay to leave lights on sensors failure 4. Housing made of rugged high impact injected molded plastic colored white. 5. Two-year manufacturer's warranty 2 33 DIMMERS. Rating as indicated on the drawings conforming with the following A For control of individual or small groups of circuits, provide complete assembly including dimmer, ON-OFF switch, and secondary circuit protection where more than one circuit is indicated to be supplied from one dimmer. Ratings as indicated on the drawings. B. Individual Dimmers. UL labeled, 120V, 60 Hz, solid-state type, integral ON-OFF switch, flush mounting back box with satin finish stainless steel plate. C Certify, per California Title 24, that dimmers will provide flicker free operation throughout dimming range without causing premature lamp failure WLC/0414200 : ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (27) 2 34 EMERGENCY STANDBY SYSTEM General' Provide complete system, employing new and current equipment, meeting the requirements of NFPA 110 and NFPA 37, designed to automatically supply standby service within 10 seconds, on failure of normal power, to stair and egress lighting, exit lights, and designated equipment, including the following components. 1 Diesel engine driven electric generating set, 60 Hz, 3 phase, 4 wire, 1800 RPM, rated as shown on the drawings for standby electrical service, capable of 100 percent of full load operation for two hours without damage to the generator set Substantiate ratings with manufacturer's standard published curves Special or maximum ratings are not acceptable Engine to start from contact closure in automatic transfer switch or switches 2 System to start largest motor with remainder of load on, with maximum voltage dip of 16 percent KW rating to be exclusive of engine driven radiator fan 3 Sub-base tank including float switch assembly, pump and flexible fuel piping to engine Provide all test fuel and full tank after testing 4 Engine start-stop control system mounted on generator set control panel Remote annunciator where indicated 5 Battery and automatic charger 6. Remote mounted automatic transfer switch and control with accessories as specified 7. Exhaust silencer and piping 8 Wiring, in conduit, between components 9. Branch circuit panels (specified under other paragraphs). 10 Generator ground 11. Shop drawings, operating instruction manual, testing, field instruction, identification per applicable paragraphs of specification. SCAQMD permit form complete with information required for filing Manufacturer to Provide 1 Factory assembled and tested generator set 2. Certified independent test laboratory data of generator set characteristics Computer calculation to substantiate selection of unit in conformance with specification requirements 3 Service engineer and replacement parts locally available within a radius of one hundred miles 4 Guarantee Engine Characteristics: 1. Water cooled inline, or Vee-type two or four-stroke cycle, turbocharged, after cooled, compression ignition, counterbalanced, operating on low sulfur domestic burner oil as required by SCAQMD Main bearings before and after each connection rod. 2 Equipped With: Fuel, lube oil, and intake air replaceable element filters, lube oil coolers, fuel transfer pump, fuel priming pump, gear driven water pump, and breather pipe for oil addition 3. Engine Governor Maintained frequency regulation not to exceed 3% (1 8 Hz) from no load to full rated load. Frequency transient recovery time not to exceed three seconds. 4 Emissions Equip engine with suitable emission control equipment to ensure that gaseous exhaust emissions conform with all State and Federal Standards for diesel engines. Reduce NOX emissions in accordance with BACT requirements 5 Fuel oil consumption rate not to exceed 0.4 pounds of fuel per BHP per hour at 100% specified rating. 6. Mounting. On a structural steel skid subbase with vibration isolators and seismic snubbers, preapproved by State of California with an assigned "R" number, per paragraph titled "Noise and Vibration0. 7 Shutoff Valves. At jacket heaters and at inlet and outlets sides 8. Drain: Crankcase dram pipe at least 8" above slab with accessible shutoff valve and flexible hose WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (28) D. Generator Characteristics 1. Three-phase, 60 Hz, single bearing, splash and drip proof, synchronous type with brushless exciter, built to NEMA Standards Class H insulation on starter and motor rated for Class F insulation, protected with 100% epoxy impregnation and overcoat of resilient insulating material to resist fungus and abrasion deterioration Incorporate reactive droop compensation for generators in parallel Provide bus bar generator terminations in top saddle mount, drip proof junction box. 2. Generator mounted regulator, volts per hertz type, to match characteristics of the generator and engine; voltage regulation ±2% from no load to full rated load, voltage level adjustment minimum of ±5%, shock mounted and epoxy encapsulated for protection against vibration and atmospheric deterioration Provide power to regulator by means of ceramic type permanent magnet pilot exciter. Voltage transient recovery time not to exceed three seconds with application or removal of full load at 0 8 power factor 3. System to sustain 300 percent short circuit current for 5 seconds minimum and permit up to 80% thyristor loading "4. Shielding to prevent radio interference. Surge protection against transient conditions 5. Rotor bearings to have B-10 bearing life of 40,000 hours 6 Stator winding waveform harmonic distortion not to exceed 5% total RMS measured line to line at rated load E Cooling System' 1. Radiator Engine mounted with blower type fan with shroud and guard, sized to maintain safe operation with engine delivering 100% rated load for 2 hours, at 120°F, airflow restriction from the radiator not to exceed 05" H2O, accessible dram system, adapter for duct connection 2 Antifreeze Fill cooling system with a solution of 50% ethylene glycol 3 Jacket Water heater Unit mounted, immersion stat operated, thermal circulation type; maintain engine jacket water at 90°F, single phase, 60 Hz, 120V, served from emergency panel, automatic shut off with engine running For units on the exterior, confirm minimum ambient temperature at location of the engine F Fuel System: 1 Engine mounted primary and secondary fuel filters, fuel priming pump, fuel pressure gauge and water separator 2. Including radiator mounted fuel oil cooler complete with flexible fuel line connections 3 Fuel Storage Tank Fuel storage tank, fuel transfer pumps, and piping between fuel tank and day tank, provided under Division 15 Provide wiring in conduit between storage tank high level float switch, fuel fill line solenoid and high level alarm at remote fill. G Sub-base Tank 1. Provide an atmospheric, sub-base tank system of double wall construction, complying with all local, state, and federal codes and regulations. Listed per UL 142 for the mechanical construction and UL 508 for the control and alarm panel. All components assembled, mounted, wired and plumbed by the manufacturer, and tested as a complete package prior to shipping from the factory Weatherproof unit at exterior locations 2 Pressure test to 6 psi to ensure there are no leaks in the system, and that the system produces enough vacuum to lift diesel fuel 18' 3 Tank capacity to be sized for 24 hours of stand-by runtime for 100% of the load. Provide fuel for testing and full tank after testing. 4. Constructed of minimum 12-gauge steel. Tank welding by certified welders After construction, all welding slag and spatter to be completely removed and all surfaces thoroughly cleaned of scale and protective coatings Interior of tank epoxy coated Exterior surfaces primed with red oxide primer and finish painted with enamel of the manufacturers standard color. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11721/05 (29) 5 Include the following items and features a On-off float switch installed on top of the tank, connected in parallel with the emergency generator run relay contacts, to operate the remote fuel transfer pumps b Low-level float switch with dry alarm contacts, set to alarm at 50% fuel remaining c High-level float switch with dry alarm contacts d Leak alarm with dry relay contacts e 2" NPT manual fill with cap. f 1" NPT engine supply with pipe stem, g 1" NPT engine return with pipe stem h. 1" NPT tank dram with valve, i %" NPT secondary containment dram with valve j Provision for overflow and vent connections at the top of the tank above the fuel level Schedule 40 black iron vent pipe with standard black malleable iron screwed fittings, k Schedule 40 black iron pipe with standard black malleable iron screwed fittings and stainless steel flexible reinforced fuel line connectors between tank and engine. I Gasketed 6" square inspection plate in the top of the tank m Mechanical type fuel level gauge on the top of the tank 6 Engine suction and engine return connections to be above the fuel level in the tank with standpipes extended below the critical low fuel level 7 Float switches to be the totally sealed magnetic type, designed and approved for immersion in fuel oil, with contacts rated 10A minimum at 120V 8 Leak detector connected to generator control panel and remote annunciator. H. Exhaust System 1. Exhaust Silencer Critical type silencer, three chamber construction, sized and installed per manufacturer's recommendation; dram at lowest point with dram shutoff valve accessible from floor. Where silencer is not supported from building structure, provide separate frame so that weight is not supported by the engine Indoor silencer to be fully insulated with 4" thick calcium silicate and with aluminum jacket Insulate pipe and fittings with same thickness and fiberglass jacket Provide aluminum jacket on exterior. 2 Coordinate size of exhaust pipe to ensure that measured exhaust back pressure does not exceed generator set maximum limitations and obtain generator set manufacturer's approval Connect to engine with flexible connection I. Automatic Starting System: 1 Starting Motor. 24V DC electric starting system with positive engagement dnve 2 Automatic Controls in Generator Control Panel Shutdown for low oil pressure, high water temperature, overspeed, overcrank, auxiliary contact for activating accessory items; 30 second single cranking cycle limit with lockout. 3 Batteries: Lead-Acid, pocket plate, alkaline, plastic cell, heavy duty diesel starting type, of voltage compatible with starting system characteristics; ample capacity to crank the engine through four cranking cycles without recharging, one cranking cycle equal to five 10 second cranks with a 5 second rest between cranks; the minimum voltage level per cell not to drop below 0 85V at a temperature of 60°F, all necessary mtercell, mtertray, and engine connectors, cables sized to carry maximum starting currents, fully charged and ready for service. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 ,(30) 6. 7. Battery Charger 120V AC supply, magnetic amplifier, constant potential type with output not less than 10 ampere/or five percent of battery capacity, able to return battery to 80% of rated capacity within 8 hours, and designed for load limiting Charger to float at 1 40 to 1.44V per cell and equalize at 1 5 to 1 55V per cell, with individual adjustments and an automatic equalizing timer, and to hold preset voltage plus one percent with voltage variation of ± 10%. Include AC voltmeter and ammeter; DC voltmeter, DC ammeter, DC breaker and fuse, on-off switch, voltage surge suppressor, 24 hour timer, AC failure alarm relays and fused AC input. Mount charger in console with instrument through face UL listed. Console Freestanding, enclosed and ventilated, corrosion and shock resistant, earthquake type for Seismic Zone 4, steel console to house batteries and charger. Located adjacent to engine generator and bolted to floor Provide integral indicating light and nonpowered contacts for remote low DC voltage indication at annunciator and at building control system Accessories' Include all necessary interconnecting conductors and connectors sized for maximum current, water level tester and spare parts Wiring' Extend to associated engine generator in conduit and to 120V charging circuit Generator Control Panel 1 Generator Mounted Drip proof enclosure, vibration isolated, dead front, 14 gauge steel, hinged lockable door; panel light with switch, positioned as indicated on drawings, with liquid tight flexible conduit connection to generator 2 Include a Voltmeter, 3", 2% accuracy, selector switch, b Ammeter, 3", 2% accuracy, selector switch c Frequency meter, 3" dial or digital type d. Automatic starting controls e. Voltage level adjustment rheostat f Engine oil pressure gauge f g Engine water temperature gauge h Nonpowered contacts wired to terminal strips for connection to remote annunciator panel, i Fault indicator light and audible alarm (with silencing switch) for low oil pressure, high water temperature, overspeed and overcrank including nonpowered contact for remote alarm j. Four position function switch marked AUTO, MANUAL, OFF/RESET, and STOP k. RUN relay with three Class C contacts Relay to operate tank on/off float switch. I. Running time meter, nonreseting m Low and high fuel level alarm indicators n. Leak detection alarm (tank), o. Adjustable time delay, 0-15 minutes, on engine shutdown after transfer switch retransfers to normal Set a 5 minutes p. Mam circuit breaker and subbreakers where indicated. 3 Timers and time delay relays to be dash pot, motor driven or solid-state 4 Provide wiring in conduit to fire alarm control panel to indicate building is on emergency power. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (31) K. Remote Annunciator Panels Provide number as indicated of audible and visual status and alarm indicators with battery backup, housed in steel cabinet suitable for recessed mounting unless otherwise indicated, with stainless steel front panel, solid state with LED lamps. Include audible alarm with silencing switch and pilot light, lamp test switch, and indications as follow External Audible Item Contact Light Alarm Battery Voltage High Red No Low - Red No Normal Green No Normal Power Yes Green No Generator Running Yes Green No Generator Supplying Power Green No Pre Low Oil Pressure Yellow Yes Low Oil Pressure Red Yes Pre High Coolant Yellow Yes High Coolant Red Yes Low Engine Temperature Red Yes Overspeed Red Yes Overcrank Red Yes Not in Auto Position Flashing Red Yes Low Fuel, Tank Yes Red Yes Leak Detection, Tank Yes Flashing Red Yes 1. Provide wiring in conduit per suppliers' requirement between annunciator and generator set controls and tank Locate annunciator in ire control room or location as directed. L Mam Line Circuit Breaker and Subbreakers. Generator mounted, per paragraph titled "Circuit Breakers, Molded Case" If remotely mounted, include all installation and interwinng costs M Housing For generator sets located on exterior, enclose set and accessories in factory built, insect screened, ventilated, raintight, sheet metal housing with hinged access panels equipped with locking hasps, hinged gasketed controlled panel door, ANSI 61 finish over rust-inhibitor of exterior lacquer lacquer, 2 mil thick N Submittals- Include certified test data of furnished unit with performance curves, verification of emission conformance, wiring diagrams, dimensional data Submit to Fire Marshall for review in addition to architect O Manuals, Identification, Tests Refer to Section 16000, General Requirements and Materials 2 35 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH' A Size and voltage indicated on the drawings, listed per applicable UL standards as a recognized component for emergency systems, rated for all classes of loads including 100% tungsten lamp loads. Transfer switches serving fire pumps are to meet NFPA 20 and are to be provided under mechanical section of the specifications B Electncally operated, mechanically held device utilizing momentarily energized, positively locking, incorporating arc barriers for mam contacts Mam and arcing contacts replaceable from front of switch without disconnecting power conductors Bus and contacts of silver-plated copper. C Solderless copper saddle type incoming and outgoing feeder terminals per paragraph titled "Connectors and Terminations, Line Voltage Conductors" in Section 16000, General Requirements and Materials. D. Transfer in either direction within one-sixth of a second. ( \ \ V / WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (32) E. For four wire systems where neutrals pass through transfer switch provide 4 pole switches with fully rated, overlapping neutral transfer contacts. F. Withstand and closing rating, based on tests conducted at rated voltage per UL standards, to equal or exceed the available short circuit, but not be less than the following Minimum Withstand Switch Rating Amperes (RMS Symmetrical) 260A and Less 22,000 261Ato400A 35,000 -*V. G Manual operating handle to stop contacts at any point in cycle H Enclosure with hinged lockable door, wall mounted, NEMA 4 exterior, NEMA 12 drip proof on interior I Service Certify that the manufacturer maintains a factory warehouse located within 50 miles of the job site, at which spare parts are stocked, and where a factory trained, full time field service engineer primarily assigned to field service, is permanently stationed J ' Operations and Accessories Solid-state logic panel including 1 Time delay on momentary dips in normal source (0-6 0 seconds), set at 1 0 second 2 Time delay on transfer to emergency for controlled loading of generator (0-5 minutes), set at 0 minutes Where multiple transfer switches are shown, set life safety switches at 0 minutes and other switches at 20 second intervals 3 Time delay on retransfer to normal (0-30 minutes) set at 30 minutes Override if emergency source fails and normal is available 4 Close differential voltage sensing of all normal source phases (pick-up 85-100% of nominal and drop out 75-98% of pick-up), set at 85% drop out and 95% pick- up. 5 Voltage (85-100% pick-up) and frequency (90-100% pick-up) sensing of the emergency source to prevent premature transfer, set at 90% voltage and 95% frequency. 6 Test switch (momentary type) 7 10A engine starting contacts (1 -N O ) 8 Pilot lights to indicate switch position (green on normal and red on emergency) 9 Auxiliary contacts as required for indicated operation (1-closed on normal and 2- closed on emergency, minimum) AC rated 10A, 480V 10. Instrument type ammeter and selector switch conforming with paragraph titled "Metering" where shown on drawings. 11 In-phase monitor on switches Monitor to control transfer/retransfer operation between live sources to that closure on the alternate source will occur only when two sources are within ± 60 electrical degrees, maximum Monitor to function over frequency difference range of ±2 hertz, minimum, with a maximum total transfer-operating time of one sixth of a second In event of frequency difference in excess of ±2 hertz and/or failure of the load-carrying source, monitor to be automatically bypassed Monitor shall not require mterwiring with generator controls nor active control thereof Alternately, provide adjustable time delay (0-5 minutes) to allow for motor shutdown on retransfer to normal 12. Time delay and sensing functions to be readily field adjustable over indicated ranges and operate without drift over-4°F to 158°F Logic panel to be complete with enclosure and mterwiring. 13 Automatic exerciser system with test run adjustable in 15 minute increments through 24 hour, 14 day dial K. Requirements and Tests' 1 Temperature Rise: Measurements to be made after overload and endurance tests WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (33) 2 Withstand: UL listed to withstand the magnitude of fault current available at the switch terminals when coordinated with respective protective devices as shown on the plans at X/R ratio of 6 6 or less 3 Dielectric: Tested after the withstand test at 1 960V AC RMS minimum. 4. Voltage Surge. Control panel voltage surge withstand test per IEEE Standard 472-1974 and voltage impulse withstand test per ICS-1-109 5. Certify, upon request, that the complete unit meets or exceeds the seismic requirements of the California Administrative Code Title 24 and Uniform Building Codes 2.36 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTUREERS, MATERIAL A Insulated Bushing O.Z Gedney types A, B and copper lug BLG, equivalent by Midwest Electric B EMT Fittings - Steel Raintight Appleton TW Series, Grouse-Hinds MW Series. Steel City TC710 Series, Thomas and Belts 5120 Series, Tomic 20 Series C Liquidtight Flex type U.A. with built-in bond wire, American Flex Conduit, Anaconda, O Z. Gedney D Gutters and Wireways Circle AW, Hoffman Engineering Company, Square D E. Nonmetallic Conduit, Polyvmyl Chloride, Schedule 40, 90°C Rated Can-Tex Industries, Carlon, Certain Teed, Kraloy Plastics F. Hubs: Myers, Appleton G Conduit Seals' Crouse-Hmds Type EYS, equivalent by Appleton H Expansion Joints' O Z Gedney Type "DX" or combination of fittings, equivalent by Appleton See conduit installation specifications I Wall Entrance Seals Thunderlme Link-Seal, O Z Gedney Type WSK J Caulking Compound Tremco - "Acoustic Sealant", Manville - "Duxseal", Interchemical - "Pressite 579.64", Chase Foam K Penetrations, Fire Rated Wall or Partitions' UL rated assembly. L Flashing- Stoneman 1 100 Series, equivalent by Archer M Conduit Wrapping Polyvmyl tape - 20 mil Vz lap by Manville, Minnesota Mining "Scotch" or 40 mil PVC coating by Occidental Coating Company, Robroy. N Steel Outlet Boxes' 4" square by 11/2h deep minimum, Appleton, Bowers, Raco, Steel City. O. Acoustical Outlet Box Pads. Harry A Lowry Associates, Nelson Electric FSP. P Prefabricated Outlet Box Assemblies: G B Electric, Caddy Q Cast Boxes and Conduit' Appleton, Crouse-Hmds, Pyie/National, O.Z Gedney R Floor Boxes. Hubbell "Dual Level" fully adjustable Type 1 , round cover Rectangular for ganged boxes For flush duplex outlets S-3925 cover Steel City 600 Series, Walker 880 Series. Afterset. Hubbell PT7 Series. Equal by Steel City, Walker S Cast Iron Floor Junction Boxes: Appleton, Thomas and Belts, O Z Gedney T Precast Concrete Pull Boxes, Transformer Pads. 1 . Enclosure: Associated Concrete producls, Brooks Producls. 2 Waterproofing: Sonneborn Hydrocide Equivalent by Dow Corning WLC/0414200 _ ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/2 1/05 (34) 3. Hardware Inwesco 10A Series Racks and Hooks, 11A31 Insulators, Equivalent by A B Chance ;U. Hand Hole: Brooks Products No. 3-RT, equivalent by Associated Concrete Products. V. 600V Conductor Installation Accessories ' 1 Steel Spring Connectors (No. 8 and Smaller) Scotchlok Types R and Y, Ideal Wirenut. 2 Solderless Connectors (No. 6 and Larger) Copper or Bronze Bolted Saddle Type Burndy - "Versitaps", Thomas and Belts "Locktite", 0 Z Gedney solderless, Teledyne Penn-Union Vi-tite 3 Power Distribution Blocks. Square D Series 9080, equivalent by Marathon Special Products "> 4 Compression Connectors (Motor Connections No 8 and Smaller) T&B Stakon, Burndy equivalent ' 5 Tape: Scotch #23 rubber tape and #88 vinyl tape Sola Basic, Sierra-Tomic 6 Sealant Scotchkote No known equal 7 Pulling Compound Powdered Soapstone, Ideal Yellow 77, Wirelube, Mmerallac #100, Sierra-Tomic 8 Cable Supports. O Z Gedney split wedge, Kellems cable clamps W Ground Connectors. 1 Conductor Joint Exothermic - Cadweld, Thermoweld Compression - Burndy Hyground X Vibration Isolators- Manufacturer: California Dynamic Corporation, equal by Mason Ind., Type Description Amber/Booth, Sause (Vibrex) HN Neoprene Hanger RH* MSL Spring Mount RJEQ* HS Suspension Hanger CH30* WMN Neoprene Mount RBA *Preapproved for California Y Seismic Bracing Systems B-lme, NUSIG or California approved equivalent Z Afterset Anchors: Hilti Kwikbolt, Phillips "Redhead" wedge type 2 37 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS EQUIPMENT (Subject to conformance with specification) A Switchboards: 1 2500A and Smaller General Electric Type AV2 line. 2 Equivalent by Siemens, Square D, Cutler-Hammer. B Power Panelboards, Terminal Cabinets General Electric, Siemens, Square D, Cutler Hammer. C 208/120V Lighting and Outlet Panelboards: General Electric Type AE and AQ with TEY, TED4, TFJ and THQB, TQD branch breakers. Equivalent Square D, Cutler Hammer D. Motor Starters. Allen Bradley, General Electric, Siemens, Square D, CH. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (35) E Contactors and Relays. 1 Mechanically held 20A - ASCO Bulletin 917, 30A and larger - ASCO Bulletin I 920 2. Magnetically Held Contactors: Same as for motor starters. 3 Magnetically Held Relays Industrial grade with normally open and normally , closed contacts Manufacturers same as for motor starters Equivalent to Square D Class 8501, Type H, General Electric CR2810 4 Time Delay Relays Manufacturers same as for motor starters Equivalent to General Electnc CR2820B Series F Time Switches' All with spring would reserve, contacts as required 1 7-Day Tork TWLE Series, equivalent by Paragon. 2 24 Hour with Astro Dial Tork TZ-LE Series, equivalent by Paragon G Photoelectric Cells. Fischer Pierce 6690 Series with S476-15 receptacle mounted on cast box Equivalent by Paragon, Tork H Photoelectric Smoke Detectors (Where not Part of Fire Alarm System) Electro Signal Lab Inc. 600 Series, self-contained 120V. I Disconnect Switches (Heavy Duty, Quick-Make, Quick-Break) 1 800A and Smaller General Electric, Siemens, Square D, Cutler Hammer Rejection type for fused units 2 Motor Switches. For 120V, 230V up to 5 HP, 460V up to 10HP Square D Class 2510 Equivalent by General Electnc, Cutler Hammer ' j J Fuses 1 600A and Smaller Low peak, dual element Class RK1, Buss LPN-RK (250V) LPS-RK (600V) Equivalent by Gould Shawmut, Littlefuse. K Wiring Devices. 1 Maintained Switches Hubbell 1221-1 Series, equivalent by Arrow Hart, Bryant, Pass/Seymour 2 Momentary Switches Hubbell 1557-1, Arrow hart 1995 Series 3 Door Operated Switches Arrow hart 4029/4030, Edwards 502/503, Pass/Seymour 1200 Series 4 Pilot Lights (Ganged with Switch)- Neon type, Arrow Hart #1720, voltage and color as specified, equivalent by Pass/Seymour 5 Duplex Outlets Hubbell 5352-I, equivalent by Arrow Hart, Bryant, Leviton, Pass/Seymour 6. Clock Receptacle with Stainless Steel Plate. Arrow Hart 452, General Electric 4224-5, Hubbell 5235 7 Clock Edwards No 2941B-4 Equivalent by Raulands 8 Floor Box Mounted Outlets Hubbell, Lew, Walker. a Duplex receptacle on floor box - Hubbell "Low Con" style, satin aluminum b Power outlet on floor box - Hubbell "Low Con" style with furniture feed plate, c. Low Tension- 2" diameter IPS cast aluminum standpipe, or kick ring, equivalent to Walker 810-2 with support. 9 Locking Type Duplex Receptacle. Hubbell 4700I with 4720 Plug, equivalent by Arrow Hart. 10 Special Receptacles NEMA configurations as specified and or shown on drawings, Arrow hart, Hubbell 11. Ground Fault Interrupting Receptacles- Hubbell GF 5362-I, with WP26 lift cover. Equivalent by Arrow Hart WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (36) 12 Weatherproof Receptacle, Flush Mounting. Hubbell GF 5362-I with WP26 Lift Cover Equivalent by Arrow Hart. 13. Weatherproof Receptacle, Freestanding: Hubbell GF 5362-I with WPF526 Lift Cover (FS box mounting). Equivalent by Arrow Hart 14. Plates - Smooth Satin Finish, Type 302, 0035" Stainless Steel: Arrow Hart, Hubbell, Leviton. 15 Surface Metal Multi-Outlet Raceway: Wiremold 3000 and 4000 Series, equivalent by Walker/Parkersburg. Special types as indicated 16 Low voltage control transformer, 30VA - Edwards No 599 Equivalent by Acme, General Electric, Cutler Hammer 17 Low voltage push button, momentary - Edwards No 852 Equivalent by Eagle L. Lighting Fixtures: 1 Conform with all requirements described under "Lighting Fixtures, Lamps and Accessories" in addition to scheduled descriptions Submit itemized conformance list with bid 2 Lighting Fixture Schedule Verify ceiling construction on Architectural drawings Supply fixture types compatible with ceiling. 3 Lenses equal to KSH Pattern 19 3/16", where not otherwise noted 4 Ballasts, Electronic: Advance, Magne Tek Triad, Motorola, Valmont 5 Ballasts, Core and Coil: Advance, Universal, Valmont Energy saving type equivalent to Universal SLH Series 6 Lamps General Electric, Osram, Phillips, Sylvania M Occupancy Sensor. Novitas, My-Tech, Watt-Stopper N Dimmers 1 Solid-State Lightoher, Lutron, Prescolite. O. Emergency Standby System ' 1 Engine Generator Set Caterpillar, Cummins, Detroit Diesel, Onan, Kohler 2 Generator Caterpillar, Kohler, Leroy/Marathon 3 Transfer Switch ASCO, Russelectnc, Zenith. 4 Batteries Alcad, Nife 5 Battery Charger - Charles/Sens, La Marche, Nife. 6 Console La Marche, Nife 7 Engine Exhaust Silencer, Critical type: Donaldson, Maxim, Nelson, Burgess Manning 8 Governor Woodward, Barber Colman. , 9. Meters General Electric, Westmghouse ' 10. Sub-baseTank. Pryco, Simplex PART 3- EXECUTION 3 1 SITE CONDITIONS A. Examine the drawings of all trades and all specification sections, survey the existing conditions, and include all necessary allowances in bid proposal. B. Resolve all conflicts with code requirements, site conditions and the work of other trades C. Verify the locations of all existing utilities prior to construction and protect them from damage D. Pay all costs incurred due to damage of existing utilities or other facilities WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (37) 3 2 LOCATIONS A Drawings are essentially diagrammatic, and although the size and locations of equipment are generally shown to scale, make use of data in all Contract Documents, and informational documents, and verify this information against field conditions B Drawings indicate the required size and points of termination of conduits, and the number and size of wires and suggest proper routing of conduit Install conduit with all necessary offsets, junction boxes, and fittings to conform to the structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom, maintain required accessibility, and satisfy the requirements of the governing codes and the standards of good practice. C Architectural and structural drawings and specifications take precedence over the electrical drawings in the representation of the general construction work Civil drawings take precedence in the representation of site work Refer to the drawings, specifications, and reviewed shop drawings for all work, in order to coordinate electrical work with other work of the project D. When changes in indicated locations or arrangements are necessary due to conditions in building construction, rearrangement of furnishings or equipment, or conflict in location, make such changes at no cost to Owner, provided that the change is ordered before conduit is installed and that length of conduit run is not revised by more than ten percent (10%) of indicated run, for conduits 1" nominal or smaller, and five percent (5%) for larger conduits E Bring discrepancies between different drawings, between drawings and actual field conditions, or between drawings and specifications, promptly to the attention of the Architect for decision, and stop pertinent work subject to resolution of the conflict F Equipment in mechanical, electrical and signal rooms or spaces has been laid out in accordance with the requirements of typical equipment of the class indicated Modify wiring and location and pay all costs, to meet to the requirements of the particular, manufacturer's equipment which is installed, where it is different from that shown on the drawings Do not use equipment which exceeds space or which infringes on required aisle or access space. G Coordinate the location of the lighting fixtures and framing with the ceiling construction so that the overall pattern is acceptable to the Architect. Architectural reflected ceiling drawings, plans and details govern Locate lighting fixtures in mechanical and equipment rooms to avoid ductwork, piping and equipment Coordinate location with trade supplying equipment pnor to lighting fixture installation. H Locate sleeves, floor and wall outlets, and devices serving equipment, built-in fixtures and appliances, in accordance with dimensions on the respective equipment drawings of the equipment supplier I Provide clarifying details where required by inspecting authority and obtain Architect's and Inspector's approval prior to installation 3.3 RESPONSIBILITY A Provide complete functioning systems and include all labor, material and associated tools and transportation required for the system to operate safely and satisfactorily Provide empty conduit systems where specified, complete, clear, and with pull wires, ready to accept conductors and allow for equipment installation B Provide all work indicated on the drawings whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications C. Coordinate the installation of electncal items with the schedules for work of other trades to prevent delays in total work. Assume responsibility for any cooperative work which must be altered due to lack of proper supervision or failure to make proper provision in time Perform alterations to Architect's satisfaction, and pay all costs WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (38) D Resolve code conflicts prior to installation. Remove and replace all work conflicting with codes or, in the Architect's opinion, not meeting specified requirements and pay all costs. 3.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Provide an experienced superintendent in charge of erection of the work, together with all necessary journeymen, helpers and laborers required to properly unload, erect, connect, adjust, operate and test the work involved to provide a neat, workmanlike installation. Latest industry standards are considered minimum B For the actual fabrication, installation, and testing of the work of this section, use only thoroughly trained and experienced personnel who are completely familiar with the requirements for this work and with the installation recommendations of the manufacturers of the specified items Where specified, provide factory personnel for testing and adjusting C For major equipment such as transformers, switchboards, panelboards, transfer switches, motor control centers, circuit breakers, control devices, etc , submit letters from principals of the equipment manufacturing company, with bid proposal, specifying the location of factory authorized parts and service organizations intended to serve the subject project D For signal, communication and specialized systems, perform all work in accordance with instructions provided by, and under the supervision of, factory authorized agents. Provide evidence that the factory agent has five projects equal in scope to specified systems, operating satisfactorily. Submit a letter, with bid proposal, from principals of the equipment manufacturing company specifying the location of factory authorized parts and service organizations now in service intended to serve the subject project, the length of time which they have been in operation (which shall not be less than three years) and the guarantee available for the continued operation. 3 5 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING A General. Provide excavation, backfilling, and pumping required for work under this section, in accordance with requirements of Earthwork Section, Division 2, of the specifications Remove surplus materials as directed B Existing Paving Where trenches are required through existing paving, resurface, after installation, to match existing in accordance with appropriate sections of Division 2, using accredited journeymen of respective trades. C Conduit Trenches Provide cover over buried conduit, where not otherwise detailed or noted, and in accordance with NEC limitations, as follows- 30" over duct banks; 30" over secondary and signal conduits outside building, 24" for 1 Vz" and larger secondary and signal conduit within building footprint. Cut trenches to bottom of conduit, allowing for concrete encasement where specified, and make cuts as narrow as possible For nonmetalhc conduit without encasement where permitted elsewhere herein, excavate 4" below conduit and backfill with sand Snake conduit to allow for expansion In rock, excavate 6" below conduit and backfill with gravel for encased conduit and sand for direct buried conduit Separate signal and power conduit in a common trench by 12" of tamped earth or 6" of concrete. For electric and telephone utility services, conform with utility company requirements where more restrictive D Within Building Footpnnt. Run buried conduit, 1V4" nominal and smaller, 6" minimum below slabs in contact with earth. Encase as descnbed for underground conduit Conduits with diameter less than 1/3 of slab thickness may be run in slab on grade where practical and where accepted by the Architect in writing. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11721/05 (39) 3.6 EQUIPMENT PADS AND CURBS A. Install floor mounted switchboards, generators, motor centers, transfer switches and transformers on 3" high level concrete pads in basement, ground floor where on grade and roof levels, in mechanical rooms on all levels, and where indicated. Coordinate with equipment supplier so that device handles do not exceed 6'-6" above working surface per NEC. Extend pad in front of devices or metering to maintain code or utility company height limits B. Provide exact pad size, location, and conduit entries based on equipment shop drawings to concrete section for construction 3 7 SLEEVES, OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING A Locations of Openings Locate all chases, shafts, sleeves, openings, anchors and inserts required for the installation of the electrical work during framing of the structure and before concrete placement Obtain approval from the Architect, in writing, for penetration of structural members or blockouts through slabs for grouped conduits, prior to installation B Cutting and Patching Provide, per Architect's requirements, cutting, core drilling and associated patching required due to improperly located or omitted openings, using accredited journeymen of the respective trades and without cost to Owner In a like manner, patch openings in existing walls or floors cause by removal of conduit Do not sleeve, cut nor drill structural members nor footings without Architect's written approval Fill all blockouts and preformed openings provided for work under this section with concrete in a manner to maintain the fire rating integrity of the floor or wall C Location of Sleeves 1 Place conduits which rise through slabs on grade before concrete is poured 2 For 1" or smaller conduits penetrating non-rated interior walls, solidly grout around conduits in concrete and masonry and solidly plaster around conduits in plaster or dry wall 3 For all conduits penetrating rated walls and floor slabs and for 11/4" or larger conduits penetrating walls, provide sleeves of ample size to provide Vz" minimum annular space. Center conduit in sleeve and support independently of sleeve D Types of Sleeves' 1. Sleeve Assemblies Provide UL listed assemblies for penetrating rated walls or floors in accordance with their fire rating. Requirements herein are minimum Submit shop drawings. 2 Suspended Floor Slabs Standard weight, galvanized steel pipe, stubbed 1" above finished floor Cap unused sleeves to maintain floor rating 3 Interior Walls and Partitions Adjustable galvanized sheet steel with wall flanges and plaster lip Provide 22 gauge for 2" and smaller conduit, 20 gauge for larger conduit. 4 Membranes: Stub sleeve 6" beyond membrane and provide flanges suitable for sealing of membrane Obtain Architect's approval of sleeve detail 5. Exterior Walls Below Grade. Provide, where entering rooms below grade, sealing fitting consisting of oversized sleeve and modular mechanical type seal consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between conduit and sleeve (or wall opening for existing walls). Tighten bolts to form watertight seal. Install per manufacturer's directions. E Installation: Cut all sleeves smooth, ream and install perpendicular to floor or wall F Escutcheons' In finished locations exposed to public, provide chrome plated split type escutcheons held on by setscrews where conduits pass through floors, walls, and ceilings. Provide plates on conduit extending through sleeves WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (40) 3 8 CAULKING A Provide as specified herein and detailed on the drawings B Conduit Penetration. Through exterior walls, caulk conduit penetrations for full wall thickness for waterproofing. At fire rated floors and partitions, pack sleeves with approved packing for full sleeve depth and caulk both ends C Conductor Penetration Where sleeves or openings in fire rated floors and partitions contain conductors not enclosed in a raceway, provide UL approved seal of the sleeve or opening per manufacturers' instructions and code requirements D Compound Characteristics Putty like, workable with hands down to 35°F, firm up to 300°F; remain pliable when exposed to air, adhere to metal, plastic, concrete, masonry and cable insulation; harmless to hands; seal without causing deterioration of materials sealed E Fire Rated Walls, Partitions or Floors' UL classified fire retardant assemblies 3.9 FLASHING A Wherever conduit extends through roof, install a four pound seamless lead flashing assembly and counter flashing. Coordinate installation of flashing with roofing installation Provide pitch pockets as option and where indicated 3 10 NOISE AND VIBRATION A General Provide systems free of noise and/or vibration transmission to building from transformers, rotating machinery or electrical equipment through structure or conduit connections. Provide sleeved openings for all conduit penetrations between rooms of low and high ambient sound levels, caulked to ensure airtight resilient closure Correct, at no cost to Owner, conditions resulting in noise transmission to facility from work under this section B Connections Connect to motors, transformers and all isolated or vibrating equipment with 24" minimum length of liquid tight flexible conduit, slack connected C Vibration Isolation- Provide between structure and vibrating or rotating equipment furnished and/or installed under this section. Design Equipment Deflection Isolator Engine Generator, Motor Generator 2 0" MSL* 'Equipped with preapproved seismic restraint as noted by an assigned "R" number D Switchboards, Distnbution Boards, Transfer Switches- Manufacturer to size, brace and arrange bus within gear and design enclosure to preclude hum and vibration Provide sound baffles and shock mounts for mechanically held relays and contactors E Wmng. In multiple runs of feeder conductors in conduit or wireway, twist associated phase and neutral conductors together to avoid abnormal field generation F Equipment Frames- For vibrating or rotating equipment to be isolated, provide mounting frames and/or brackets to carry the load of the equipment without causing mechanical distortion or stress to the equipment. G Machinery Rooms. 1. In machinery and electrical rooms located above occupied spaces, do no penetrate floor slab without specific approval in writing. Where floor has membrane, avoid penetrations and run all conduit overhead WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (41) 2. In general, run conduits to motors and equipment overhead For overhead drops exceeding 8' in length or floor risers over 2' high, provide unistrut or pipe brace to floor or structure For slabs in contact with earth, run conduit as specified under other paragraphs herein. Verify stub-up location with equipment supplier. 3. Do not run conduit through vibration isolated (floating) concrete slabs H. Outlets- 1. Do not use back-to-back outlets or through boxes. Separate outlets on opposite sides of wall by 12" minimum unless otherwise detailed 2 In rated walls provide separation as required by Code 3 In sound insulated floors, ceilings, and wall partitions, provide acoustical outlet box pads, pliable, putty-like, V thick, per manufacturer's instructions Include boxes for receptacles, switches, telephone and data outlets Isolate all conduit within the sound rated floor ceiling assembly from the building construction at points of support or contact by means of approved resilient sleeves, mounts or underlayments V4" thick 4 For residential occupancies observe applicable local ordinances. 3 11 SEISMIC AND BRACING REQUIREMENTS A. Scope Brace electrical systems and equipment to withstand lateral and vertical forces that result from earthquake or wind, in accordance with NUSIG guidelines B Equipment Anchor all equipment, switchboards, panelboards, transfer switches, motor and engine generator sets and transformers by securely bolting them in place to the building structure Install vibration isolation devices where specified Provide bolts, anchors and bracing to withstand acceleration of 0 5 g Equipment manufacturer to submit weight, center of gravity and method of fastening required for seismic anchoring 1 For equipment weighing 1000 pounds or more, submit calculations for anchorage prepared by a structural engineer, registered in the State, conforming to all applicable codes C. For conduits, 2" nominal and larger, suspended more than 12", provide diagonal bracing to structure at hangers, at changes in direction, and on approximate 30' centers, installed along with conduit in accordance with NUSIG and using approved components. Rework of other trades due to late installation of bracing is the responsibility of this section D For conduits crossing seismic separations, provide approved fittings or combinations of fittings, that permit horizontal expansion or contraction and vertical and angular deflection Selection of fitting to be based on the dimension of the separation and conduit size Refer to Raceways and Wireways". E Lighting Fixtures: 1 Pendant Fixtures. Provide approved seismic fixture suspension allowing for 45° swing in all directions without impacting adjacent obstructions or structure. For stem mounted fixtures, provide approved seismic ball aligners at fixture and outlet box, and 3/32" stainless steel aircraft cable in each stem and with the circuit conductors, continuous from the fixture housing, through the outlet box, and attach directly to the structure above Within the fixture housing, provide a mechanically crimped cable loop and secure to the housing with a closed eye bolt nut and lock washer At the structure above, provide a cable loop and closed eye threaded lag screws and steel wedge drilled anchors. Level and adjust fixtures and remove cable slack before attaching to the fixture housing a. Where pendant fixtures are indicated to be cable supported, provide 3/32" (minimum) stainless steel aircraft cables, cable to rod swivel adapters, 1/4-20 rod extensions above the ceiling to the structure. Brace the rod seismically with a rod fitting and (3) 12 gauge steel wires extended from the rod to the structure at 120° angles. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (42) b If a 45° swing cannot be achieved, brace fixtures to prevent contact with the adjacent obstruction or structure. All fixture suspension assemblies to be State of California approved c Submit a sample of the seismic ball aligner and details of the cable attachments and assemblies with the fixture ship drawing submittal Suspended acoustical ceiling system. Suspend recessed fixtures with two 12 gauge wires at opposite ends per California building Code Chapter 47. Support recessed fluorescent fixtures from building structure with steel support wires, two 10 gauge at diagonal corners or four 12 gauge at four corners Allow V slack in wires Attach fixture positively to ceiling members with attachments having a capacity of 100% of the fixture weight in all directions Support fixtures weighing over 50 pounds directly from structure with approved hangers, and attach the fixture positively to ceiling members. Attach surface fixtures to mam runners with a minimum of two approved clamping devices, 14 gauge minimum, and support each clamp from ceiling structure with 10 gauge steel wire 3 12 GROUNDING SYSTEM A General Provide service and separately derived system grounds with resistance to ground of three ohms or less and in accordance with applicable code requirements. Maintain equipment ground continuity through entire system including raceways, wireways, equipment enclosures, lighting fixtures and devices Provide grounding as specified and as shown on drawings. Include equipment ground conductor in all nonmetalhc conduits, in all feeders as scheduled on the drawings and in branch circuiting where indicated on the symbol list. Use green insulated copper ground conductors sized per tables herein In steel frame buildings, bond a minimum of two columns to service ground with conductors sized for service ground Bond to building reinforcing bars embedded in concrete footings or foundation, which equal 20 feet of Vz diameter steel, prior to concrete pour. B Service Ground 1 Provide service ground bus consisting of a copper bus bar with a minimum of six ground studs, enclosed in a sheet steel box with a removable cover See details on drawings. Terminate all ground conductors at service ground bus Locate at ' accessible location in mam electrical room or as otherwise indicated Engrave "Service Ground Electrode". Where additional ground buses are indicated, provide similar construction 2. Provide ufer ground consisting of 30' length of bare copper conductor extended full length and embedded along bottom of building concrete foundation in direct contact with earth, supported to provide 2" concrete encasement minimum Bring loop out at center to service ground bus Extend to foundation reinforcing steel .. / 3 Provide, in accessible location, exothermic bond to a minimum of two steel columns or to reinforcing of two concrete columns with insulated ground conductor in steel conduit to service ground bus 4 Bond from building cold water main, 2" or larger, within 5' of building entry, to service ground with insulated ground conductor in steel conduit to service ground bus Make the cold water pipe system continuous by bonding around insulating joints. Utilize cast bronze heavy-duty ground clamps with bronze bolts and nuts 5 Extend neutral and equipment ground from service switchboard (ahead of service mams and neutral bus link) with insulated conductor in steel conduit to ground box. 6 Extend separately derived system grounds to service ground box when located in same building as service In separate buildings, provide separate service grounds 7 Service Ground Conductor Service (or Transformer Embedded Cold Water & Service Ground Secondary) Amperes AWG AWG Conduit 400A and Less 1/0 1/0 1" 500A-800A 2/0 2/0 1" WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (43) 8 Where required to obtain specified resistance to ground, drive additional ground rods, number as required, and connect to service ground box with insulated conductor in steel conduit 9. Where ground loop is provided in mam electrical room, extend both ends of loop conductor to service ground box in steel conduit. C Separately Derived System Grounds 1. Ground transformers and generators from neutral bus or bushing to mam service ground at service ground bus D Separately Derived System Grounding Table 208/120V KVA AWG Size-Conduit 15 and Less 8 %" 30,45 6 %" 75 2 3/4" 112-1/2 1/0 1" 150 1/0 1" E Ground Continuity 1. Provide green THWN insulated ground conductor in all nonmetalhc conduits, each conduit run for primary and secondary feeders and where indicated for branch circuits For lighting circuits, connect ground wire to fixture ground lead where available or bond to fixture housing by mechanical means. Connect grounding conductors to ground busses in panels, motor control centers and switchboards, and to terminals on devices, and bond to all equipment Bond feeder grounds to all metallic pull and junction boxes. Provide copper ground conductor, sized not less than following (up to 600V systems) Circuit Device to Up 25 70 110 225 550 700 Setting, Amperes' to to to to to to to 20 60 100 200 500 600 800 Ground Conductor AWG Size 12 10 8 6 2 1 1/0 a For parallel feeders or circuits, run ground in each conduit Refer to schedule on drawings 2 Provide ground bushings, fittings, and jumpers as required at expansion and seismic fittings, isolated sections and wherever ground continuity is broken Provide ground bushings on conduit stub-ups and bond to enclosure and ground bus 3 Bond plug strip, light track, isolated metal parts of lighting fixtures, and ground terminal of receptacles to equipment ground 4. Provide separate green ground conductor in circuits serving isolated ground outlets, ground fault outlets, and all outlets in computer rooms and room with raised deck floors. F Antennas and Masts Provide 1 #8 (minimum) THWN copper ground conductor in %" conduit from antennas and masts to service ground, or 2" or larger cold water pipe. G Communications Ground: Provide 1 #6 (minimum) THWN copper ground conductor in %" conduit from mam telephone room and/or telephone terminal to service ground box if available or to cold water pipe 2° or larger. Extend to other telephone terminals where indicated WLC/0414200 / ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 ' (44) H. Materials and Methods: For ground loop and/or buried ground conductor, use soft drawn stranded copper conductors size as scheduled Snake buried conductors to allow for settlement Bury ground loop conductors 12" minimum below concrete slabs on grade Install continuous conductors without splices Where joints are required, use exothermic welding or UL approved compression connection to join all conductor strands, providing completed joint equivalent to or larger than conductor. Obtain inspection before covering joints Provide service and separately derived system ground conductor embedded at bottom of foundations and extend to ground bus Bond to steel columns or reinforcing steel of concrete columns with suitable copper to steel exothermic connections I Ground Electrodes' 1 Where specified or required, provide ground rods driven a minimum of 10' into the earth. Locate in precast concrete hand holes Engrave cover "Grounding Electrode" Where driven ground rods are precluded by rock, propose and submit equivalent alternate for review 2 Ground rods to be of cone pointed electrolytic copper bonded to carbon steel core, sectional type where over 10' in length, die stamped near top with name or trademark of the manufacturer and length of rod in feet, diameter sufficient to permit driving without damage, but not less than 5/8" 3 Bond ground wires to rod with exothermic weld or UL approved compression connection 3 13 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND WIREWAYS A Deliver raceways and wireways to the site in standard lengths, and store where continuously protected from moisture and weather B Conduit sizes on the drawings are minimum, sized for copper conductors, for normal (THW) insulation. Use %" trade size minimum for underground runs Increase sizes where required by physical conditions, or conductor insulation's Do not combine runs without written approval Allow for grounding conductor as described under paragraph titled "Grounding System" C. Conceal conduit from view above ceilings, below floors or in walls where possible Refer to Architectural Sections and Details to determine conduit routing required to conceal conduit D Do not run in concrete slabs without written permission from the Architect Conduits with diameter less than 1/3 thickness of slab (thickness is measured above flutes of deck) shall, where permitted in suspended slabs, be limited to 5% of slab in 100 sq ft. area with a minimum spacing of 1 '-0" o.c as per code for fire resistive two hour floor. Route conduit to maintain slab fire resistive rating and structural integrity as acceptable to the enforcing agency Obtain agency approval prior to pouring concrete E Conduit may be exposed to view in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, shop and utility areas and where indicated. Install all conduit runs parallel with or perpendicular to structural members Surmount obstructions by use of bends, offsets, and where necessary with junction and pull boxes. For surface mounted outlets and small junction boxes within 7' of floor, use cast boxes and/or condulets. F. Cut conduits and raceways square and free of burrs Ream conduit ends and clean conduits before pulling conductors. G. Cap open ends of conduits with approved manufactured conduit seals until ready to pull in conductors Install as complete system, mechanically and electrically continuous between outlets, gear and equipment WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (45) H. Where conduits or wireways cross expansion or seismic joints, provide approved expansion fittings, or combinations of fittings, which allow deflection in all directions equivalent to twice the movement allowed in the structural design For conduits 1 %" trade size or smaller, 18" minimum length of weatherproof flex, slack mounted, may be used. I For bends and offsets in conduit 1" and larger, use larger radius factory fittings not less than 8 times the nominal conduit size or bend with a hydraulic bender meeting NEC Table 346-10 exception Refer to additional requirements under Paragraph titled "Interior Telephone and Data Systems Provisions" Replace all flattened, deformed or kinked conduit J Route raceways and wireways so as to prevent insulated conductors from being subjected to high ambient temperature conditions Maintain the following minimum clearances 1 Crossing nonmsulated pipe or duct - 3" 2 - Crossing insulated pipes or ducts -1" 3 Parallel to nonmsulated pipes or ducts - 3" 4 Parallel to insulated pipes or ducts - 6" K Provide No 14 AWG black iron pull wire or polyethylene or nylon pull rope in all empty conduits and stubs over 10' in length, extending at least 12" beyond conduit Pull rope tensile strength to be 240 pounds up to 11/a" conduit and 800 pounds for larger conduit Submit pull rope data with shop drawings L Terminate branch circuit, communication and signal conduits turning frorrrfloor into interior removable nonmasonry partitions, freestanding appliances and equipment, with flush floor couplings before extending conduit. M Terminate conduits in concrete light pole bases a vertical distance of 4" above top of foundation and inclined towards the light pole hand hole Extend conduit stubs a minimum distance of 3' from outside of concrete foundation and cap Before pounng of concrete bases, position all conduits at correct height and bond together Hold anchor bolts and conduits in place by means of templates until concrete sets Allow 72 hours for concrete set before erecting standards N Secure rigid or IMC conduits to panels, pull boxes, wireways and enclosures with locknuts, inside and out, and provide impact resistant plastic, insulated throat or malleable iron bushings at terminations in pull boxes, wireways, signal cabinets, boxes and enclosures Zinc insulated throat hubs with "O" ring gaskets may be used in lieu of double locknut and bushing For feeder conductors No. 4 AWG and larger, provide steel or malleable iron insulating bushings with plastic liner For EMT provide insulated throat connectors secured with locknut on interior of box or enclosure For flexible conduit, provide insulated throat die cast twist-in connectors secured with locknut on interior of box or enclosure, or steel twist-in connectors with plastic bushing, and locknut. At switchboards and bottomless gear and equipment, terminate conduits with ground bushing bonded to ground bus with code size conductor. No 8 AWG minimum Use approved coupling or unions. Running thread, threadless coupling, or split coupling connections are not permitted, O. Where conduit enters the top of drip proof gear, make connection with bolt on hubs P Field thread rigid and IMC conduit conforming to American Standard Pipe Threads tapered for the entire length at % inch/foot. Treat threads with protective coating to prevent corrosion, but maintain electric continuity. Q For underground steel conduit coat all joints and points where wrenches have been applied, with bitummastic paint R Extend underground stub outs as shown on drawings, but 3' minimum beyond building foundations or concrete paving adjacent to building S. Where conduit extending into building from site enters occupied level, slope conduits to dram away from building and seal to prevent entrance of moisture into building. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (46) T. Provide compound filled sealing fitting for conduits terminating in or passing through hazardous areas per applicable sections of code and as indicated U. In vehicle maintenance and garage areas, consider area within 18" of floor as hazardous Run conduit overhead and keep conduit, devices and equipment out of hazardous area where possible Unless otherwise indicated, area classification is Class I, Division I, Group B. V Route openable raceways and wireways so as to be readily accessible. W Gutter and wireway dimensions indicated on the drawings are minimum Provide sufficient cross section to contain conductors including all splices in accordance with code allowed percent fill Where covers occur on bottom, provide removable wire supports not more than 3' apart X Refer to paragraph titled "Identification" for additional requirements 314 CONDUIT A Use Rigid Steel conduit in all sizes, or Intermediate Steel conduit up to 3" In slab on grade, on exterior, encased in exterior masonry or concrete walls; in wet locations, in refrigerated spaces, in exposed locations within 7' of floor or walking surfaces, in suspended slabs, but only where permission is obtained from Architect in writing for conduit to be run in slab B. Use Rigid or Intermediate steel conduit for trade sizes 21/z" and larger installed above grade throughout C For Underground Installations / 1 Use Rigid, Intermediate Steel, or Schedule 40 PVC below building and rigid or intermediate steel or Schedule 40 PVC outside buildings unless otherwise noted Provide rigid or intermediate steel conduit elbows (2" minimum above floor) for stub-ups and risers Use PVC conduit with PVC risers, terminating in PVC threaded couplings flush with 4" high raised concrete pad, for 400 Hz conductors, and at Contractor's option for telephone, signal, communication and data systems For fire alarm systems use rigid or intermediate steel only 2 Encase in concrete envelope of rectangular cross section not less than 3" beyond any surface of conduit Where steel conduit extends above grade from concrete encasement, paint conduit with two coats of bitummastic paint for 12" minimum on both sides of junction with concrete Use precast concrete or plastic separators to secure uniform spacing between conduits of 2". Concrete to have 2,500-psi minimum compressive strength at 28 days Reinforce envelope with No 4 rebar rods at four corners parallel to conduit, with 1 Vz" of concrete cover, and with No 3 ties on two foot centers (minimum) where crossing fill or loose soil, other utility mams, at sharp slopes and where run below the building For runs over 150', provide bends with a minimum radius of ten times the internal radius of the conduit. Ball mandrel conduit. Where conduits are under building, mandrel before any slabs are poured Route conduit to avoid column footings and foundation Equip conduit with end bells for termination in manholes Slope conduit away from building and towards manholes or pull boxes with pitch of 3" per 100' Submit sections and details 3 For utility company conduits, obtain and observe utility company standards Obtain and observe utility company standards Obtain utility company approvals D In corrosive soils wrap underground steel conduit system with plastic wrap before encasing Where Architect indicates in writing that soil is noncorrosive, underground steel conduit and couplings may, in lieu of concrete encasement, be protected with plastic wrap or coating 1. Factory wrap with one-half lap of twenty mil thick identified polyvmyl tape to provide uniform forty-mil coating. Field taped joints shall provide equivalent coating WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11721/05 (47) 2 Factory coat with forty mil thick PVC coating bonded tcXconduit Coating on couplings shall extend beyond coupling ends for one conduit diameter up to 11/a" 3 Extend wrap for 12" minimum where conduit emerges from ground \ E. Use Rigid or Intermediate Steel or Electric Metallic Tubing in Trade Sizes 2" and Smaller for Dry concealed locations, exposed locations above 7' from floor or walking surfaces, in electrical and telephone rooms at all heights. F. Use Flexible Steel Conduit, Vfe" minimum trade size, 6' maximum length, for connection to lighting fixtures from fixture outlet Where structural conditions make use of rigid conduit or tubing impractical, obtain written permission from Architect to use flexible conduit G Use 24" Minimum Length of Liquidtight Flexible Steel Conduit, Vz" Minimum Trade Size, Slack Connected for. Connection from outlet to motor and other moving or vibrating equipment, code length to lighting fixtures in damp or wet locations, to transformer housings, to kitchen equipment, all flexible connections in exposed areas. Where conduit stubs into bottom of dry type transformer, without connecting to enclosure, bond conduit to enclosure and omit flex connection. H. Provide bend radius for flexible conduit not less than 5 times the trade size I For connection to exterior lighting standards from normal system, Schedule 40 PVC may be used without encasement outside of building area Use rigid steel under building stubbed 5' beyond building, and in concrete pole base Include ground wire and size conduit accordingly For emergency circuits, use wrapped steel conduit or concrete encased PVC J Where penetrating floors or fire separations, use UL listed fittings and/or devices to maintain separation integrity K Where crossing existing pavement, place conduit under pavement by approved jacking method Keep jack pits 2' clear of edge of pavement Do not undermine paving with excessive water If jacking cannot be accomplished, obtain Architect's permission in writing to cut and patch paving L When forming bends in nonmetallic conduit, apply heat without distorting or discoloring conduit 3.15 SUPPORT AND FASTENING OF RACEWAYS AND WIREWAYS A. Support vertical conduits passing through sleeves with UL approved riser clamps secured to the conduit and resting on the building structure Support vertical conduits 1V4" and larger a minimum of once, and on 15' centers maximum For vertical conduits smaller than 1%" provide standoffs on 8" centers maximum. Support conduits adjacent to walls with preformed channels Support freestanding risers with conduit racks of angle iron or channel iron members, rigidly bolted or welded together and adequately braced For securing vertical conduits 1" or smaller to metal studs, horizontal 1/4" diameter steel pencil rods tied with No 16 gauge galvanized steel, twisted tie wires, is acceptable B Install ngid steel conduit with threaded couplings Support conduits 1" and larger on 10' intervals, smaller than 1" on 7' intervals, all sizes within 3' of connection to box, cabinet or fitting C. Support electnc metallic tubing on maximum spacing of 10' and within 3' of connections to box, cabinet or fitting including couplings. D Support flexible metal conduit on 4' intervals, within 1' of outlet box or fitting (except at connections to recessed lighting fixtures) and within 2' of vibrating equipmenti E Support gutter and wireways at 5' intervals and at changes of direction, in a manner to allow full access. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (48) F Attach to field poured concrete with preset inserts for conduits 3" and larger and with preset inserts or steel wedge screw anchors for smaller sizes Shot driven studs are not permitted without written approval from the Architect Submit size, quantity and approximate weight with request to use shot driven studs. Secure conduit with cast conduit clamps and cadmium plated machine or lag screws G Attach to plaster, dry wall or hollow masonry walls with metal toggle bolts. H Attach to solid masonry walls with steel wedge anchors. I Do not fasten rigid conduit or tubing to equipment subject to vibration or mounted on shock mounts i J. Secure conduits IVi" and smaller to steel deck where permitted by Architect with cast or malleable iron conduit clamps and 1" minimum cadmium plated or galvanized sheet metal screws. K Where attaching to steel members, use beam clamp, welded threaded studs or machine screws L Where not otherwise specified herein, support all sizes of suspended ^conduit from structure with factory made pipe hangers with split hinged malleable iron or spnngable steel pipe rings and solid round mild steel rods, V4" diameter for up to 1W conduit, 3/8" diameter up to 2" conduit and 1/z" diameter for larger conduit Friction type conduit support hardware and attachments are not acceptable. Where required conduit spacing is more frequent than available structural members, provide intermediate steel support as required M Provide trapeze type hangers where three or more conduits run parallel and clamp conduit to hanger Provide diagonal seismic bracing for suspended runs of conduits 2" trade size and larger. Use unistrut type channel for trapeze assemblies Lathing channels are not acceptable N. Provide plated or galvanized hangers, threaded, rods, channels and metallic support and fastening material or provide two coats of rust resistant paint, in all damp or corrosive locations (e g., vehicle maintenance garage, labs) ' O Do not use perforated metal strap or wood as support material P Support conduit to" structure above suspended ceilings 3" minimum above ceiling to allow removal of tile Do not support from T-bars or T-bar hanger wires Maintain 2" clearance above recessed light fixtures Q. Above fixed ceiling and in stud walls, tie conduit 1" or smaller to furring, support channels capable of carrying the weight, or studs with No 16 gauge galvanized wire ties 4' on center, maximum R Attached to precast or prestressed concrete as described under applicable sections of the specifications Coordinate installation of precast unistrut or inserts where required, or obtain written approval from the Architect of alternate support methods 3 16 INSTALLATION OF BOXES A. Use new, bright stock and store where continuously protected from weather. B. Install all outlets and boxes in readily accessible locations. C. Provide additional pull or outlet boxes as required to meet code requirements or to facilitate pulling of wires Locate in utility areas, above accessible ceilings, or in approved locations D. Size boxes for devices contained and the number of wires passing through or terminating therein, not less than 4" square by 11/z" deep, or equivalent configuration Use pull and junction boxes of adequate size for splices and terminations contained therein WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (49) E For door alarms and switches, use special boxes designed to fit in door frame F For receptacles 30A rating and greater, use 2-1/8" deep box with two gang ring and plate to match device. G Use 4-11/16" square box with round plaster ring, for surface mounted ceiling fixtures H Where more than one switch is shown at one location, group behind common plate Use ^ gang boxes for three or more devices Provide barrier between 277V switches controlling two or more circuits. I Use 4-11/16" square by 2-1/8" deep boxes, minimum size, for more than two flexible connections to lighting fixtures J For wall mounted telephone, data, computer, dictation, MATV or intercom outlets, use 4- 11/16" square by 2-1/8" deep box with one gang flush plaster ring K Recess boxes in finished areas, and wherever possible in utility, mechanical and electrical spaces. Provide extension rings and/or plaster rings to finish flush with finished surfaces Install approved factory made knockout seals where knockouts are not intact, and close all openings L Use cast metal, gasketed boxes for locations noted on drawings and as follows Stub mounted outlets, surface mounted outlets within 7' of the floor; wet or corrosive locations, outlets on exterior or within exterior walls facing the exterior. For flush mounted outlets, provide adapter plates Provide threaded plugs in unused hubs c M. For concrete work, use concrete boxes which allow the placing of conduit without displacing the reinforcing bars Use masonry boxes in block and masonry walls N Use extension rings with blank covers for surface extension from flush box O Support light fixture outlets to building structure and equip with fixture stud and hanger bar or supporting device as required, including outlets for fixtures furnished by others Support lighting fixtures in excess of 60 pounds to structure independently of outlet box P Do not use back to back outlets or through boxes. See paragraph titled "Noise and Vibration" Q Provide boxes for all devices. For devices not specified or scheduled, use boxes as approved, adequate for device to be installed R Combine devices in ganged box with suitable barriers behind common plate where indicated, specified or detailed Provide separate or barriered boxes for normal and emergency devices S Provide flush mounted box with horizontal single gang ring for surface mounted multi- outlet assembly in metal raceway T Install boxes in a rigid manner, with box hangers, expansion shields in masonry, and machine screws on metal work Do not nail to structure Use plated or galvanized screws throughout U Secure pull and junction boxes to the structure independently of the conduits by means of bolts, rod hangers or brackets WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (50) V Prefabricated Outlet/Junction Box Assemblies The following types of box assemblies are acceptable, subject to a shop drawing submittal review and the basic specification requirements for outlet and junction boxes. 1 Wiring device outlet box attached to the back of a one piece vertical galvanized steel bracket that incorporates a back wall support flange, and is designed to mount in the floor track of a metal stud partition. Bracket height as determined by the designated device mounting height. Plaster ring attachment to front of bracket Support flange to assure that box is held in a rigid manner when the dry wall material is attached to both sides of the studs. 2 Branch circuit junction box screwed to a IVfe" black iron channel that is secured to the structure above. Branch circuit conduits supported from structure above independently of box assembly per specifications W For communications and signal systems, refer to paragraph titled "Communications and Signal System Provisions" X Provide designations per paragraph titled "Identification" 3 17 INSTALLATION OF DEVICES A Unless specifically directed otherwise, install switches with single gang vertical plate on latch side of door Verify door swing before installation B Unless noted otherwise, install duplex receptacles, single receptacles, telephone and communications outlets vertically Receptacles with ground slot up Where horizontal mounting is required, locate ground slot to right when facing outlet C Connect receptacle grounding screw to equipment ground conductor where conductor is called for, otherwise bond to outlet box with green ground conductor D Plumb and align all devices and install plaster rings flush with wall surface so that plates fit tight against wall and device surface without strain E On exterior, and interior locations subject to moisture, use weatherproof devices F Within six feet of sinks, basins or sources of running or standing water, use GFI outlets 318 DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Check architectural details and building equipment drawings before installation of outlets, to determine required outlet mounting heights Install outlets, under this work, to clear built-in features, furniture and equipment. 1 The electrical drawings take precedence as to quantity and type of outlets and general location 2. Where architectural elevations have been provided, the elevations take precedence as to mounting height and spacing. 3 Outlets, by symbol, are generally +18", +42", or as noted on the electrical drawings If an outlet occurs behind casework and there is no architectural elevation, locate the outlet above the counter Where counter has a backsplash, mount outlet at +4" above top edge of splash. If there is no backsplash, mount at +4" above top of counter 4 If outlets occur back to back, paragraph titled "Noise and Vibration" takes precedence regarding separation between boxes 5. If an outlet is symbolized at +42" above a counter and there is a conflict, use the +4" mounting height above top of splash or counter. 6 Verify mounting height of outlets below counters for garbage disposal, hot water dispensers or undercounter refrigerators with equipment shop drawings 7. Where a cord slot is detailed in countertops, mount outlet below counter at +18" B Install outlets for specific equipment or appliances per equipment suppliers' instructions WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (51) C. Mounting height for wall mounted outlet is from centerlme of outlet to finished floor, and is indicated on the drawings by "+" D Where Not Otherwise Noted or Detailed, Use Mounting heights herein Indicated 1. Switches and Push Buttons' +42" 2 Receptacle'+18" 3 Receptacles for Fixed Equipment. To suit equipment 4. Receptacles in Equipment Rooms. +42". 5 At communication and/or telephone terminal backboards, provide multi outlet raceway (Plugmold) below backboard at +8" 6 Desk Mounted Telephone, Data and Intercom outlet +18" 7 Backbox for Wall Mounted Telephones- +42" 8. Signal System Device Requiring Manual Operation +42" 9 Manual Fire Alarm Reporting Station- +48" 10 Fire Alarm Audible/Visual or Visual Alarm +80" to bottom of strobe (ADA Strobe) 11 Thermostats +48" 12. Signal System Audible Device Locate outlet so that device clears finished ceiling by 1", where not otherwise indicated. 13 Clock Outlet +84". Above door, locate outlet so than bottom of clock clears top of door frame by 1" unless otherwise indicated 14 Bracket Light Outlet +96", unless otherwise indicated 3.19 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS A Store conductors where continuously protected from sunlight, heat and weather B Install all conductors (line and medium voltage, low voltage, signal and control) in conduit Complete conduit system and clean and dry conduit before pulling in conductors Install conductors after general construction work in area has progressed sufficiently to avoid conductor damage C. Circuit as indicated on plans and single line diagrams D Provide conductors of identical lengths in parallel feeder runs. E Use fish tapes with ball type heads for pulling conductors Pull conductors in without kinking wires or scoring conduit F Use only lubricant, which does not damage conductors, as a pulling aid G Fan branch circuit and control conductors, size 1/0 and smaller, in panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers and terminal cabinets and tie with plastic ties suitable for conductor size. Lace larger conductors with marline for 1/z" on 12" centers with intermediate tie wraps Identify spare conductors (line, control and signal), and ground both ends to enclosure case H Run neutral conductors continuous to panel. Do not combine. Run feeders continuous to panel or equipment without splices Do not splice or tap in equipment enclosures or conduits Make necessary splices or taps only in junction boxes, pull boxes or in oversize wiring gutters designed for the purpose at panelboards I Use No. 12 AWG minimum for lighting and power and No 14 AWG minimum for signal and communications and control, except where special conductors are specified J Allow 18" minimum free length of conductor where terminating in outlet or pull box Provide longer lengths where indicated. K. Do not loop through receptacle terminals; connect by means of conductor taps joined to branch circuit conductors L Where branch circuit conductors extend from ground fault interrupting breakers, enclose conductors in plastic tubing within panelboard. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (52) M See paragraph titled "Identification and Warning Signs" 3.20 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING A For lighting and outlet branch circuits, use factory colored conductors For motor circuits and feeders, use pressure sensitive colored tapes, in 2" wide minimum bands, at all panelboards, safety switches, motor starters, motor and equipment outlets Where more than one multi-conductor circuit is run in a conduit, tape each multi conductor circuit together with its neutral at each junction point and outlet B Color Codes for Line Conductors Color Conductor 120/208V Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue Neutral White Traveler Brown Equipment Ground Green Instrument Ground and Green with Isolated System Ground Yellow Stripes C Color code conductors of cables used in communication and signal systems and control conductors in supervisory panels Use white for grounded conductor and green for equipment ground, exclusively 3 21 CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS, LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS A For joints, splices, taps and connections for 600V conductors, use solderless connectors B For branch circuit conductors No 8 AWG and smaller, use steel spring with semi rigid insulating shell, or setscrew type, taped C Terminate all solid conductors, No. 10 AWG and smaller by a fast holding application of the conductor directly to the binding screws of the equipment to be connected D For conductors No 6 AWG and larger, use copper or bronze bolted saddle connectors and lugs, or compression type at Contractor's option, sized for conductors For conductors No 1 AWG and larger, use lugs with two bolts through tongue, minimum or equivalent anti-turn construction (submit sample) Connectors and lugs which are crimp type or which apply setscrews directly to the conductors are not acceptable. For breaker connection where manufacturer submits in writing that saddle lug termination is not available, dip conductor ends in solder prior to termination Fasten lugs with flat and spring washers and hex nuts E In panelboard feed through gutters, use copper power distribution blocks to extend conductors from feeder to panel. F Coordinate equipment terminations with equipment supplier to insure that terminals provided conform with requirements specified herein G For connections at motors, use lugs on motor and branch circuit conductors, bolted and taped For conductors No 8 AWG and smaller, crimp lugs to conductors H. Splice grounding conductors by means of exothermic welding and terminate by means of approved grounding connectors. Do not solder. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (53) I Tape all nonmsulated connections with lap wound layers of vinyl plastic tap (Scothch #88) or lap wound layers of rubber tape covered by lap wound layers of friction tape, to provide insulation equivalent to 150 percent of the conductor's insulation, but in no case less than three layers Split bakelite casings with stainless steel spnng clips designed for specific connectors may be used alternately. J. Position all splices in pull boxes and junction boxes, so they are accessible from the removable cover side of the box K Provide waterproof connections in wet locations Pencil and roughen conductors and apply rubber tape equivalent to insulation thickness. Cover with two half-lapped layers of 8.5 mil, all weather, vinyl plastic tape, suitable for below freezing application, and coat with sealant Form conductors into drip loops so that water does not collect on connections Blow out conduit to remove moisture and seal conduit ends with waterproof compound. L Torque all electrical conductor terminations in accordance with equipment manufacturer's directions and industry standards 3 22 CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS, SIGNAL SYSTEM AND CONTROL CONDUCTORS A Run conductors continuous from equipment to terminal cabinets and devices. Do not splice B In terminal cabinet and junction boxes terminate on solder terminals, screw type terminals, telephone type punch terminals or wire wrapped terminals C At equipment or devices terminate on screw type terminals or with plug and socket connections D For flexible connection use stranded conductors and crimp type lugs E For shielded conductors, make shield continuous and isolate shields from ground and other shields 3.23 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A Maintain required aisles, work space and clearances in front of equipment and behind accessible sections of freestanding equipment not less than indicated and as required by code. B For equipment less than 600V to ground, maintain 3' clear minimum in front, 3Vz between accessible side and grounded surface, and 4' between rows 3 24 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING HEIGHTS A Install panelboards and cabinets on a common wall with tops even Mount panels at 78" to top unless approved otherwise B Mount individual switches, starters, or controls at 72" from finished floor to top Where required to be lower by equipment arrangement or configuration, maintain 18" to bottom from finished floor. 3 25 EQUIPMENT FASTENING A Fasten floorstandmg equipment with four Vz bolts minimum Grout channel sills, where provided, into concrete pad. Fasten surface mounted equipment in excess of 20 pounds to a minimum of two structural wall members Provide support channel spanning structural members where equipment does not span two members 3.26 PANELBOARD PROVISIONS A Install three %" conduits minimum from each flush mounted panelboard into accessible ceiling space above and below panel and cap WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (54) 3 27 LIGHTING FIXTURE INSTALLATION A Connections. Use Underwriters' Laboratories approved solderless connectors as specified elsewhere herein, for splicing B Blocking: Provide supplementary blocking and support under this section, as required to support fixture from structural members adequate for fixture weight C Pendant Fixtures Unless otherwise specified, suspend fixture with one piece steel stems 3/8" ID minimum, with matching canopies, and finished with enamel or lacquer finish of color to match fixture or ceiling, as directed by Architect Where pendant fixtures are indicated to be cable supported, provide 3/32" (minimum) stainless steel aircraft cables and cable to rod adapters Provide a ceiling plate at each ceiling fitting, with baked enamel finish color to match fixture or ceiling, as directed by Architect Provide a white #18/4 (minimum) Type SJ cord at one end of fixture row. Provide two supports per 4', 6' or 8' fixture, and uniformly spaced pattern for continuous rows D Pendant Mounted Fluorescent Fixtures, Continuous Rows. Provide rigid coupling between fixtures, fastened to each fixture with a minimum of two bolts Hang fixtures with two supports per 8' or 4' fixture. Limit continuous rows to 40' length separated by IVz" minimum with separate circuit connections to separated rows Do not nipple between separated rows Provide an approved swivel at the junction of stem and fixture Where indicated, provide channel bracing of rows of fixtures E. Surface Mounted Fixtures Secure to structural members or to structural channels which span structural members with %" minimum machine screws F Refer to paragraph titled "Seismic and Bracing Requirements" for additional requirements G. Fixture Outlets In accessible tile ceilings, locate outlet within 4' of fixture, rigidly fastened to structural member or suspended from structure with rod or channel In nonaccessible ceilings, provide access to outlet through fixture housing utilizing approved outlet assembly. Provide fixture outlet for each fixture, or continuous row of fixtures, or, in demountable ceilings, for a cluster of fixtures which can be connected by 6' flexible connections H Connections Do not use fixtures as pull or junction boxes between separated fixtures Do not flex between separated, suspended fixtures Surface mounted fixtures, separated by not more than 6" in utility areas, may be nippled together Connect from recessed fixtures to fixture outlet with 6' length of flexible conduit and conductors with insulation type described under paragraph titled "Conductors" I Machine Rooms. Prior to installation, coordinate light fixture location in machine rooms with equipment, piping, and ductwork to properly illuminate room and avoid interference's Use only ceiling mounted or stem mounted fixtures in elevator machine rooms. J For wall mounted fixtures on exterior, mount on cast gasketed boxes See Installation of Boxes K. Adjustable Fixtures- Aim adjustable fixtures as directed by Architect For exterior units, adjust during evening hours to Architect's satisfaction. L. Location Locate fixture outlets, recessed fixtures, and determine the length of custom, continuous row cove or "reverse cove" fixtures, by reference to Architectural reflected ceiling plans and details, and measurement of building construction. Do not scale electrical drawings M. Lamping. For initial lamping of overhead fixtures during construction, omit diffuser installation Prior to final acceptance and when directed by the owner in writing, clean the fixtures, remove construction lamps, relamp with new lamps and install diffusers. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11721/05 (55) N For fixtures recessed in ceilings rated one hour or more, box around fixture to maintain ceiling integrity Allow free space around fixture, 1" for fluorescent and 3" for incandescent fixtures. O Electric Signs and Outline Lighting' Provide branch circuits and code required disconnects for signs and outline lighting provided under other sections or by Owner Coordinate location with equipment supplier 3.28 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND PLUMBING CONTROL A Provide Under This Section- I. Motor starters, disconnects, circuit protection, items of industrial control, individually mounted controls, as specified or required 2 Control wiring in conduit, to remote line voltage control devices, where indicated on the drawings, and where not included under the mechanical or building automation sections 3 Connections to motors, motorized smoke dampers and controls as shown, but coordinated with equipment supplier 4 Verification of point of connection to motors with equipment supplier prior to conduit installation. For roof mounted exhaust fans, rise within housing where possible 5. Connection to package unit controls furnished as part of equipment 6 Installation and connection of separately mounted electric line voltage thermostats and controls furnished with equipment, as indicated 7. Connection to devices in piping or ductwork (such as aquastats, solenoids, float switches) installed under Division 15 8 The Following is Specified to be Provided Under Other Divisions 9 Furnishing and installation of motors, motorized smoke dampers 10 Furnishing of thermostats, and controls that are part of equipment I1. Connection to devices in piping or ductwork (such as duct detectors, aquastats, solenoids, float switches) installed under General Conditions and General Requirements B Refer to General Conditions and General Requirements, Divisions 15 and 17 of the specifications, and mechanical and electrical drawings to establish complete scope of work 3 29 INTERIOR TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS PROVISIONS A Provide complete telephone and data raceway systems as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein, including all distribution conduit, wireways, blockouts, sleeves, grounds, pull wires, plywood backboards, outlets and plates indicated on the drawings for wiring provided under other sections or by Owner Minimum conduit to be W trade size for telephone/data outlet B Conduit bends with a minimum radius in feet equivalent to the diameter of conduit in inches, and not exceeding the equivalent of two 90° bends in a single run Where over two 90° bends are required, install accessible pull box in run Bush ends of all conduits Do not use condulets C Terminate conduits at terminal backboards 6" above floor or within 12" of top of backboard To reduce bends, backboard may be extended up to conduit stubs D Plywood Terminal Backboards' 8' high by length indicated, for telephone, data or signal systems where indicated on electncal drawings, of %• thick, APA exterior grade Douglas Fir A-C treated with fire retardant chemical to provide a flame spread rating of not more than 25 when tested according to ASTM E84. Install backboards over plaster or gypsum wallboard, not directly to studs Use full sheets where practicable and attached to piaster walls with 1/4" flat head toggle bolts Attach to gypsum wallboard using fire retardant, nonexplosive contact cement, applied in strips spaced 16" on center horizontally or vertically across plywood, and in a continuous band around perimeter of plywood Install /^~\ plywood with clear face exposed to view. ( J WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (56) 3.30 COMMUNICATIONS AND SIGNAL SYSTEM PROVISIONS A Provide complete raceway systems, including outlets, device and equipment back boxes, sleeves, grounds, pull wires, terminal cabinets and plywood terminal backboards as indicated on the drawings for wiring systems provided under other sections or by the Owner. B Provide back boxes for devices and equipment and terminal cabinet dimensions as required by system supplier 3.31 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED EQUIPMENT A Where electrically operated equipment indicated on the drawings is specified under other divisions of the specification, provide, unless otherwise indicated, all conduit, wiring and connections under this section, as required for proper operation, and in accordance with wiring diagrams furnished by equipment supplier B Install controls furnished by equipment supplier, and provide disconnect switches within sight of controller. C Refer to equipment specification for coordination of work 3.32 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A Materials and Equipment Cover all switchboards, transfer switches, panelboards, busway, lighting fixtures, signal system equipment, etc, stored or installed on the site, with polyethylene sheets or approved equivalent, to protect equipment from moisture, plaster, cement, paint, or other work of other trades Cover outlet boxes with cardboard or plastic closures Plug or cap conduit ends until final connection Protect conduit stubs, stub-ups and risers from construction equipment B Storage- Provide proper and adequate storage facilities Store conductors, raceways and fittings, in dry, protected locations C Damage Replace all damaged or defective work, materials or equipment Install sensitive or delicate equipment after major construction work is completed D Parts: Store and protect all portable and detachable parts or portions of the installation such as spare parts, fittings, fuses, keys, locks, adapters, locking clips and inserts until completion of the work. As a precondition for acceptance of the work, deliver to the Owner's representative and obtain itemized receipt. Include receipts with the Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual(s) required under other paragraphs of the specifications E Site Cleaning- Periodically remove waste and rubbish and maintain order. F Equipment Finish. Clean and polish finished metal surfaces Clean and prepare pnme coated gear for painting G Light Fixtures: Remove dust and handpnnts from light fixture surfaces Clean diffusers before project acceptance H Electrical Equipment: Clean exterior and interior of all equipment. Vacuum interiors, do not blow out Apply permanent identification and remove temporary and unauthorized notations I. Acceptance Remove all debris, dirt, grease and oil from building surfaces, caused by work under this section. Clean out and vacuum electric rooms. 3.33 PAINTING In Equipment and Utility Areas Provide factory finished equipment including prime coat and medium dark gray finishing over rust-inhibitor WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (57) B Outdoors and in Wet Locations Provide additional factory coat of exterior lacquer for a two mils finish thickness Indicate finish on shop drawings. C In Public Areas Provide shop prime coat for equipment installed flush in painted walls. Finish painting is under Specification Section "Painting". D Touchup: Use factory supplied paint for touchup of rusty or scratched surfaces Replace marred or scratched plated finishes. E Supports: All conduit hangers, racks and structural supports for electrical material and equipment under other paragraphs to be galvanized or plated to be field painted, if not plated, under this work in conformance with Specification Section "Painting" 3 34 IDENTIFICATION AND WARNING SIGNS A Nameplates - General 1. Provide laminated, engraved plastic nameplates with Vz" high letters for all switchboards, motor control centers, transfer switches and panelboards Provide similar nameplates with 3/8" high letters for transformers, time switches, individually mounted breakers, switches and controls, and with sheet metal screws Adhesive mounted nameplates are not acceptable Refer to single line diagrams and schedules for actual designations and circuit numbers 2 Include nameplate schedule on shop drawings submittals 3 Indicate on Gear nameplates. a Line 1 Equipment Designation b Line 2 Voltage, Phase, Number of Wires, Amperes (Switchboards) KVA (transformers, generators) c Example SWITCHBOARD MSS 120/208V, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE, 400 AMPERES -A Indicate equipment and/or equipment controlled and designation on component nameplates Examples a Swbd Breaker- CIR 3 - PANEL 3AA b Motor Switch TOILET EXHAUST FAN EF-3 c Time Switch TSA - PARKING LIGHTS (served from Panel A) d Fire Alarm Terminal Cabinet Fire alarm system 24V DC 5 Install panelboard nameplates behind panel door in public area and on panel face in equipment rooms B Nameplate Color Schedule 1. 120V through 240V. Black letters on which label 2 Emergency System: White letters on red label 3. Devices Connected Ahead of Service mams: Letter color as for switchboard on yellow label 4. Communication or Signal Systems White letters on black label Identify system ~ C Stenciled Designations. Provide readily visible block letter stenciled designations for the following with Vz" high minimum letters on background of contrasting color, colors as outlined under nameplates 1 Junction and pull boxes and cabinets of signal and communication systems identifying system and voltage 2 Feeder conduit runs on 25' centers and on both sides of wall and floor penetrations, where visible from floor and above demountable ceilings. Indicate circuit designation and number on all feeders. Indicate system on all signal and communications system conduit sized 1Vfe" and larger WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (58) D Labels 1 At all fusible devices, either individually mounted or part of gear, provide a label (as supplied by fuse manufacturer) or nameplate inside each switch cover, indicating specific type of fuse required for replacement. 2 Provide label, in addition to UL label, for each switchgear, switchboard, panelboard, transfer switch and motor control center indicating the short circuit rating of the gear as constructed and the minimum rating of devices allowable. Submit with shop drawings. E Emergency System 1 Identify all enclosures per Article 700 of the NEC 2 Paint junction box covers and covers of multi-outlet assemblies red 3 Use visibly red receptacles and devices Alternately engrave plates 'EMERGENCY SYSTEM" and fill in with red enamel F Conduit and Conductors 1 Tag feeders at panels, switchboards, pull boxes, and other accessible enclosures, indicating source, voltage, circuit number and conductor ampere rating. Tags to be readily readable after installation 2 In exterior or wet locations, provide metal or laminated plastic discs as above attached with nylon cord. 3 In interior dry locations, provide metal or laminated plastic discs as above, attached with nylon cord. 4 Tag exposed ends of conduit stubs indicating system, name of panel, switchboard, etc., of origin and conduit size 5 Identify all branch circuit system conductors with premarked, self-adhesive, wraparound cloth wire markers, indicating circuit number and name of panel, cabinet, etc, of origin, at panelboards, motor centers, switchboards, terminal cabinets, wireways, junction boxes and at outlet boxes containing more than one neutral wire. 6 Identification Format Examples. a Switchboard Feeder - SAA-1 480/277V-225A b Transfer Switch Subfeeder- 3ATS-1 480V-800A c Panel AA Branch Circuit . - AA-10 7 Provide, above underground conduits stubbed for future use, engraved flush bronze marker anchored in 4" square by 12" deep concrete block, flush with grade, indicating system, conduit size and point of origin G Devices Engrave on each device plate with 3/16" high block letters filled with black enamel where noted and as follows" 1 Lock switch and switch with pilot light - device controlled 2 (J Switch for fan, motor, unit heater - equipment controlled 3 Switch where lights or equipment are out of sight - equipment controlled 4. Switches in gangs of three or more - description of lights or equipment switched 5 Receptacles over 150V to ground and/or 30A and higher rating - voltage and ampere rating. 6 Where wording is not indicated, allow for ten letters p'er device and use wording as directed H. Warning Signs Conform with the latest edition of NEC Provide 18 gauge steel, white porcelain enameled signs with 1" high black letters in all electrical and communication rooms and closets reading ELECTRICAL (or SIGNAL) ROOM- NO STORAGE PERMITTED WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (59) Panel Schedules Provide typewritten panel schedules on inside of panel doors behind clear plastic. Indicate as-built number and type of outlets served and general location of outlets or fixtures and/or item of equipment served Where modifying existing panels, provide new typewritten schedules reflecting modifications provided under this work Diagrams and Posted Signs: 1. Where project has service from a standby generator source, provide a sign, framed and mounted behind clear plastic, and located at the mam electric room service switchboard, describing the standby source, including voltage, rating, and location 2 For signal and communication systems, provide block wiring and location diagram mounted behind clear plastic and posted at system control location or as directed Submit diagram for review with shop drawings 3 35 TEST AND CERTIFICATION General Provide testing in accordance with NETA requirements, as specified under individual equipment and system specifications and as follows 1 Upon completion of the work, and as a condition for acceptance, test all components and systems in the presence of the Owner's representative to demonstrate compliance with the specifications Provide tests as specified and as required by the code or enforcing authorities Adjust, repair and/or replace defective material and equipment 2 Provide supervisory personnel experienced with the particular systems involved, and where specified, arrange for the presence of factory representatives to direct indicated testing Check all field connections prior to testing 3 Provide all required testing instruments and pay all costs for testing and for any resulting repair or replacement 4 Tighten all bolted connections and meggar all equipment and bus prior to testing. 5 Tabulate all test data and prepare certified typewritten report covering all testing performed and include in Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual(s) Test and Measurements Include all required factory service engineering time to cover the outline testing Submit a per diem cost to cover additional testing which may be requested Ground Resistance Test ground resistance at service, substation, generator, and at the secondary of each transformer, sized 75 KVA and larger Perform test in accordance with the latest edition of James G Biddle manual on "Earth Resistance Testing" and describe tests and results in test report Where ground resistance is in excess of specified values, add ground electrodes as required to meet specifications Perform tests before associated slabs are poured so that corrective measures are not precluded Switchboards 1 For each building service switchboard and switchboard served from separately derived systems (generator, transformer) isolate neutral bus from ground by removing neutral bus from ground by removing neutral bus link and test neutral bus for infinite resistance It may be necessary to disconnect DC inverters Correct all unintentional neutral grounding and repeat test until infinite resistance is obtained. Submit test report Reinstall bus links 2 Set, test and operate each operable device For motors served from motor starters provide under this section, provide certified listing of nameplate motor data along with overloads provided in associated starters Replace overloads as required for code compliance Include list in Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual. Ground Fault Detectors: Verify proper neutral grounding and installation of ground fault detector. Test operation of each detector using factory authorized test equipment. WLC/0414200 v ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (60) G Conductors Test for continuity, proper neutral connection, short circuit and improper ground Meggar all feeders with switchboards and/or panels connected, but with branch loads disconnected, and meggar circuits for 20 HP and larger motors Insulation resistance to be not less than cable manufacturer's recommendation H Panelboards: Test with mam disconnect open, branch circuits connected, wall switches closed, lighting fixtures and/or outlets permanently connected, without lamps, for neutral ground, short circuit, continuity, improper ground, and multiple neutral grounds I Engine Generator. Factory test with load of 100% of rated capacity at 104°F ambient for two hours pnor to shipping Submit certified test data 1 Provide Witnessed Field Test 2 Provide variable resistive and/or building loads, test instruments and required fuel. 3 Run generator at 0,1/4, Vz, and % load until readings are constant for 10 minutes duration Then run generator for 2 hours at 100 percent of rated load 4 Take Readings, Tabulate and Submit Report Including Frequency, voltage, current, water temperature, oil pressure, oil temperature, generator hot spot temperature Include both observed values and manufacturer's acceptable values J Signal and Communication Systems- Factory engineer to test each system to demonstrate specified operation of all components For code required systems arrange for code authorities to witness test K Receptacles 1 Verify that all receptacles are installed per manufacturer's instructions and terminal connections are secure and clean Test for polarity 2 With the Aid of a GFI Tester, Such as Hubbell #GFT2-G, Test GFI Receptacles a Hot - neutral - ground connections b. At two and three milliamps respectively, GFI shall not trip within 10 seconds c At five milliamps, GFI shall trip within one second 3 Test isolated ground receptacles for ground isolation L Perform fluorescent troffer tests prior to installation M Adjustments After project loads are in full operation, and at a time acceptable to the Owner 1 Take voltage readings at each transformer Where voltage on secondary of building transformers is above or below required rating in excess of 21/2 percent at full load, make appropriate tap changes 2 Take current readings on each phase at each panel. Adjust branch circuiting between phases where required to balance phase currents within 10 percent Reflect revisions in panel schedules. Circuit revisions shall not compromise multi-wire circuits sharing a common neutral 3 Tabulate adjustment data by transformer and panel and submit with test data N Thermographic Inspection 1 After project loads are in full operation, perform a thermographic inspection of the electrical equipment and connections at a time acceptable to the Owner and in the presence of his authorized representative 2 The inspection is to locate high resistive points by comparing temperature levels to reference temperatures. WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000 Consultant 11/21/05 (61) 3. Utilize an infrared camera with a range of -20°C to 900°C and an accuracy of 0.1 °C Equip camera with a minimum of three lenses 7° telephoto, 20° wide angle and 4° extra wide angle Utilize camera to detect infrared wave lengths and convert them into video signals projected onto a monitor screen in the form of a line thermal image to be photographed for inclusion in the report Heat loss survey to be in both gray step mode and color. a Inspect the entire electrical system including 1) Switchboard, panelboards. 2) Circuit breakers, disconnect switches. 3) Standby generator, automatic transfer switches b Include in test report thermographs and photographs of defective equipment and connections. Outline probable cause, severity of defect and corrective measure recommendations. c Correct deficiencies as agreed upon at no cost to owner Rephotograph corrected areas and resubmit data indicating satisfactory condition 4 Non Metallic Conduit Test a Provide witnessed test of all conduits, after installation, for clear bore, using ball mandrel, brushes and snake Use Lignum Vitae ball of diameter equal to approximately 85% of conduit inside diameter For utility conduit, test in presence of utility representative Clear all conduits which reject ball mandrel Bear all cost involved, including chopping concrete, replacing conduit and restoring surfaces to original condition b Maintain record of testing indicating "left clear, tagged, capped" listing conduit designation, diameter, location, date of test and testing personnel Submit certified copies in triplicate END OF SECTION WLC/0414200 ELECTRICAL 16000^ Consultant 11/21/05 (62) SECTION 16726 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC EQUIPMENT 1 PART 1-GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A This Section includes equipment for amplifying, distributing, and reproducing sound signals 1 3 DEFINITIONS A Channels Separate parallel signal paths, from sources to loudspeakers or loudspeaker zones, with separate amplification and switching that permit selection between paths for speaker alternative program signals B Zone Separate group of loudspeakers and associated supply wiring that may be arranged for selective switching between different channels C VU Volume unit 1 4 SUBMITTALS A Product Data For the following 1 Preamplifiers 2 Power amplifiers 3 Microphone 4 Volume limiter/compressor 5 Telephone paging adapter 6 Tone generator 7 Equipment cabinet and rack 8 Monitor panel 9 Loudspeakers 10 Microphone outlets B Shop Drawings Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer 1 Design Calculations' Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints for central control cabinets 2 Equipment Details- Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location of each field connection. 3 Control panels 4 Rack arrangements 5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include the following a Identify terminals to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance b Single-line diagram showing interconnection of components, c Cabling diagram showing cable routing C. Calculations For sizing backup battery WLC/0414200 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC EQUIPMENT 16726 Consultant 11/21/05 (1) D. Coordination Drawings' Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1 Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification Submit certification that public address and music equipment, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." Include the following 1 Basis for Certification Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified " 2 Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit' Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions 3 Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements F Qualification Data For Installer G Field quality-control test reports H Operation and Maintenance Data For public address and music equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Installer Qualifications Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project 1. Maintenance Proximity Not more than 2 hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. B Source Limitations Obtain public address and music equipment through a single source authorized by manufacturer to distribute each product C Electncal Components, Devices, and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use D Comply with NFPA 70 E Comply with UL 50 1 6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of system components and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. WLC/0414200 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC EQUIPMENT 16726 Consultant 11/21/05 (2) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURERS A Available Manufacturers. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following 1 Atlas Soundolier, Atlas Sound 2 Bogen Communications International, Inc 3 Or Equal 2 2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A System Functions Include the following 1 Selectively connecting separate zones to different signal channels 2 Selectively amplifying sound among various microphone outlets and other inputs. 3 Communicating simultaneously to all zones regardless of zone or channel switch settings 4. Paging, by dialing an extension from any local telephone instrument and speaking into the telephone 5 Producing a program-signal tone that is amplified and sounded over all speakers, overriding signals currently being distributed 6 Reproducing high-quality sound that is free of noise and distortion at all loudspeakers at all times during equipment operation including standby mode with inputs off; and output free of nonuniform coverage of amplified sound 2 3 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A Coordinate features to form an integrated system Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions B Equipment Modular type using solid-state components, fully rated for continuous duty, unless otherwise indicated Select equipment for normal operation on input power usually supplied at 110 to 130 V, 60 Hz C Waterproof Equipment Listed and labeled for duty outdoors or in damp locations 2 4 PREAMPLIFIERS A Comply with TIA/EIA SE-101-A, either separately mounted or as an integral part of power amplifier B Output Power Plus 4 dB above 1 mW at matched power-amplifier load C Total Harmonic Distortion Less than 1 percent D Frequency Response Within plus or minus 2 dB from 20 to 20,000 Hz E Input Jacks Minimum of two One matched for low-impedance microphone, the other matchable to cassette deck, CD player, or radio tuner signals without external adapters F Minimum Noise Level Minus 55 dB below rated output. G Controls- On/off, input levels, and master gain 2 5 POWER AMPLIFIERS A. Comply with TIA/EIA SE-101-A. B Mounting Rack mounted. WLC/0414200 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC EQUIPMENT 16726 Consultant 11/21/05 . (3) C Output Power: 70-W balanced line D Frequency Response. Within plus or minus 2 dB from 50 to 12,000 Hz. E Minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 60 dB, at rated output F. Total Harmonic Distortion- Less than 3 percent at rated power output from 50 to 12,000 Hz G Output Regulation Less than 2 dB from full to no load H Controls On/off, input levels, and low-cut filter I Input Sensitivity Matched to preamplifier and providing full-rated output with sound-pressure level of less than 10 dynes/sq cm impinging on speaker microphone or handset transmitter 2 6 COMPONENTS A Microphone Comply with TIA/EIA SE-105 1. Type. Dynamic, with cardioid polar or omnidirectional characteristic 2. Impedance 150 ohms. 3 Frequency Response Uniform, 50 to 14,000 Hz 4 Output Level Minus 58 dB minimum 5 Finish Satin chrome 6 Cable C25J 7 Mounting Desk stand with integral-locking, press-to-talk switch 8 Quantity of Microphones As shown on drawings, but not less than 2 9 Quantity of Desk Stands As shown on drawings, but not less than 2 B Volume Limiter/Compressor Equip each zone with a volume limiter/compressor Install in central equipment cabinet Arrange to provide a constant input to power amplifiers 1 Frequency Response: 45 to 15,000 Hz, plus or minus 1 dB minimum. 2 Signal Reduction Ratio At least a 10 1 and 5 1 selectable capability 3 Distortion 1 percent, maximum 4 Rated Output: Minimum of plus 14 dB 5 Inputs. Minimum of two inputs with variable front-panel gam controls and VU or dB meter for input adjustment C Telephone Paging Adapter: Arranged to accept voice signals from telephone extension dialing access and to automatically provide amplifier input and program override for preselected zones 1 Minimum Frequency Response: Flat, 200 to 2500 Hz 2 Impedance Matching- Adapter matches telephone line to public address equipment input D Tone Generator- For clock and program interface r^. 1 Signals Produced: Minimum of seven distinct, audible signal types including wail, warble, high/low, alarm, repeating chimes, single-stroke chime, and tone. 2. Pitch Control. Chimes and tone. 3 Volume Control All outputs. 4 Activation-Switch Network Establishes priority and hierarchy of output signals produced by different activation setups. E. Wall Mounted Equipment Rack: Comply with TIA/EIA-310-D House amplifiers and auxiliary equipment in standard TIA/EIA 19-inch racks. 1. Group items of same function together, either vertically or side by side, and arrange controls symmetrically. 2. Power-Supply Connections Approved plugs and receptacles. WLC/0414200 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC EQUIPMENT 16726 Consultant 11/21/05 , (4) 3. Arrange all inputs, outputs, interconnections, and test points so they are accessible at rear of rack for maintenance and testing, with each item removable from rack without disturbing other items or connections. 4 Blank Panels: Cover empty space in equipment racks so entire front of rack is occupied by panels 5 Enclosure Panels. Ventilated rear and sides and solid top. Use louvers in panels to ensure adequate ventilation 6 Finish- Uniform, baked-enamel factory finish over rust-inhibiting primer 7 Power-Control Panel: On front of equipment housing, with master power on/off switch and pilot light, and with socket for 5-A cartridge fuse for rack equipment power 8 Service Light At top rear of rack with an adjacent control switch 9 Vertical Plug Strip Grounded receptacles, 12 inches oc the full height of rack, to supply rack- mounted equipment 10 Maintenance Receptacles Duplex convenience outlets supplied independent of vertical plug strip and located in front and bottom rear of rack 11 Spare Capacity 20 percent spare space capacity in rack for future equipment F Monitor Panel" Mounted above amplifiers 1 Equip with VU or dB meter, speaker with volume control, and multiple-position rotary selector switch 2 Connect selector switch and volume control to permit selective monitoring of output of each separate power amplifier via VU or dB meter and speaker G Cone-Type Loudspeakers Comply with TIA/EIA SE-103. 1 Minimum Axial Sensitivity TIA/EIA pressure rating of 45 dB 2 Frequency Response Within plus or minus 3 dB from 50 to 15,000 Hz 3 Size 8 inches with 1-mch voice coil and minimum 5-oz ceramic magnet 4 Minimum Dispersion Angle 100 degrees. 5 Rated Output Level 10 W 6 Matching Transformer Comply with TIA/EIA-160 Full-power rated with four TIA/EIA standard taps. Maximum insertion loss of 0.5 dB 7 Flush-Ceilmg-Mountmg Units In steel back boxes, acoustically dampened Metal ceiling grille with white baked enamel H Horn-Type Loudspeakers Comply with TIA/EIA SE-103 1 Type Single-horn units, double-reentrant design, with minimum full-range power rating of 15 W 2 Matching Transformer Comply with TIA/EIA-160 Full-power rated with four TIA/EIA standard taps Maximum insertion loss of 0 5 dB 3 Frequency Response Within plus or minus 3 dB from 250 to 12,000 Hz 4 Dispersion Angle 130 by 110 degrees 5. Mounting Integral bracket 6 Units in Hazardous (Classified) Locations Listed and labeled for environment in which they are located I Volume Attenuator Station Wall-plate-mounted autotransformer type with paging priority feature 1. Wattage Rating 10 W, unless otherwise indicated 2 Attenuation per Step 3 dB, with positive off position 3 Insertion Loss 0 4 dB maximum. 4. Attenuation Bypass Relay. Single pole, double throw. Connected to operate and bypass attenuation when all-call, paging, program signal, or prerecorded message features are used Relay returns to normal position at end of priority transmission 5 Label. "PA Volume." J Microphone Outlet. Three-pole, polarized, locking-type, microphone receptacles in single-gang boxes Equip wall outlets with brushed stainless-steel device plates Equip floor outlets with gray tapered rubber or plastic cable nozzles and fixed outlet covers WLC/0414200 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC EQUIPMENT 16726 Consultant 11/21/05 (5) K Conductors and Cables Jacketed, twisted pair and twisted multipair, untinned solid copper 1 Insulation for Wire in Conduit- Thermoplastic, not less than 1/32 inch thick 2 Microphone Cables. Neoprene jacketed, not less than 2/64 inch thick, over shield with filled interstices. Shield No 34AWG tinned, soft-copper strands formed into a braid or approved equivalent foil Shielding coverage on conductors is not less than 60 percent 3 Plenum Cable Listed and labeled for plenum installation PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION A Wiring Method Install wiring in raceways except within consoles, desks, and counters. Conceal cables and raceways except in unfinished spaces B Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow surface contours Secure and support cables by straps, staples, or similar fittings so designed and installed to avoid damage to cables Secure cable at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, or fittings C Wiring within Enclosures Bundle, lace, and tram conductors to terminal points with no excess Use lacing bars in cabinets D Control-Circuit Wiring Install number and size of conductors as recommended by system manufacturer for control functions indicated E Separation of Wires Separate speaker-microphone, line-level, speaker-level, and power wiring runs Install in separate raceways or, where exposed or in same enclosure, separate conductors at least 12 inches for speaker microphones and adjacent parallel power and telephone wiring Separate other intercommunication equipment conductors as recommended by equipment manufacturer F Splices, Taps, and Terminations Arrange on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets, and equipment enclosures G Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces Provide matching networks where required H Identification of Conductors and Cables Color-code conductors and apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so they identify media in coordination with system wiring diagrams. I Wall-Mounting Outlets Flush mounted. J Floor-Mounting Outlets Conceal in floor and install cable nozzles through outlet covers Secure outlet covers in place. Trim with carpet in carpeted areas. K Conductor Sizing- Unless otherwise indicated, size speaker circuit conductors from racks to loudspeaker outlets not smaller than No 18AWG and conductors from microphone receptacles to amplifiers not smaller than No 22 AWG. L Weatherproof Equipment For units that are mounted outdoors, in damp locations, or where exposed to weather, install consistent with requirements of weatherproof rating M. Speaker-Line Matching Transformer Connections: Make initial connections using tap settings indicated on Drawings. N Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables " WLC/0414200 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC EQUIPMENT 16726 Consultant 11/21/05 (6) 32 GROUNDING A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common- mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments B Signal Ground Terminal Locate at mam equipment cabinet Isolate from power system and equipment grounding C Install grounding electrodes as specified in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding " 3 3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Manufacturer's Field Service Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections Report results in writing ( B Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports 1 Schedule tests with at least seven days' advance notice of test performance 2 After installing public address and music equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements 3 Operational Test Perform tests that include originating program and page messages at microphone outlets, preamplifier program inputs, and other inputs Verify proper routing and volume levels and that system is free of noise and distortion 4 Signal-to-Noise Ratio Test Measure signal-to-noise ratio of complete system at normal gam settings as follows a Disconnect microphone at connector or jack closest to it and replace it in the circuit with a c signal generator using a 1000-Hz signal Replace all other microphones at corresponding connectors with dummy loads, each equal in impedance to microphone it replaces Measure signal-to-noise ratio b Repeat test for each separately controlled zone of loudspeakers c Minimum acceptance ratio is 50 dB. 5 Distortion Test Measure distortion at normal gam settings and rated power Feed signals at frequencies of 50, 200, 400, 1000, 3000, 8000, and 12,000 Hz into each preamplifier channel For each frequency, measure distortion in the paging and all-call amplifier outputs Maximum acceptable distortion at any frequency is 3 percent total harmonics 6 Acoustic Coverage Test Feed pink noise into system using octaves centered at 500 and 4000 Hz Use sound-level meter with octave-band filters to measure level at five locations in each zone For spaces with seated audiences, maximum permissible variation in level is plus or minus 2 dB In addition, the levels between locations in the same zone and between locations in adjacent zones must not vary more than plus or minus 3 dB. 7 Power Output Test Measure electrical power output of each power amplifier at normal gam settings of 50, 1000, and 12,000 Hz. Maximum variation in power output at these frequencies must not exceed plus or minus 1 dB 8 Signal Ground Test: Measure and report ground resistance at pubic address equipment signal ground. Comply with testing requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding " C Retestmg Correct deficiencies, revising tap settings of speaker-line matching transformers where necessary to optimize volume and uniformity of sound levels, and retest Prepare a wntten record of tests D Inspection. Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. Prepare a list of final tap settings of paging speaker-line matching transformers 3 4 STARTUP SERVICE A Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service WLC/0414200 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC EQUIPMENT 16726 Consultant 11/21/05 (7) B Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements C Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions 3 5 ADJUSTING A On-Site Assistance Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting transformer taps, and adjusting controls to meet occupancy conditions 3 6 DEMONSTRATION A Engage a factory-authorized service representative to tram Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain public address and music equipment Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training " END OF SECTION WLC/0414200 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC EQUIPMENT 16726 Consultant 11/21/05 (8) SECTION 16750 VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A This Section includes wire, cable, connecting devices, installation, and testing for wiring systems to be used as signal pathways for voice and high-speed data transmission 1 3 DEFINITIONS A EMI Electromagnetic interference B IDC- Insulation displacement connector. C LAN Local area network i D PVC: Polyvmyl chloride E STP Shielded twisted pair F. UTP Unshielded twisted pair 1 4 SUBMITTALS A Product Data. Include data on features, ratings, and performance for each component specified B Shop Drawings- Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of each individual component Show equipment assemblies, method of field assembly, workspace requirements, and access for cable connections C System labeling schedules, including electronic copy of labeling schedules, as specified in Part 3, in software and format selected by Owner D Wiring diagrams Show typical wiring schematics including the following. 1 Workstation outlets, jacks, and jack assemblies 2. Patch cords 3 Patch panels E. t Cable Administration Drawings As specified in Part 3 F Product Certificates. For each type of cable, connector, and terminal equipment, signed by product manufacturer G Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification Submit certification that distribution racks and their components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work." Include the following: 1 Basis for Certification Base certification on the maximum number of components capable of being mounted in each rack type Identify components on which certification is based. Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation 2. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." H Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit Identify center of gravity of each rack-mounted component and of each assembled rack type, and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. WLC/0414200 VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING 16750 Consultant 11/21/05 (1) I. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements J Qualification Data. For Installer K. Field quality-control test reports. L Operation and Maintenance Data- For voice and data communication cabling to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals ; 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Installer Qualifications System installer must have on staff a registered communication distribution designer certified by Building Industry Consulting Service International B Testing Agency Qualifications An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction 1 Testing Agency's Field Supervisor Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3 a Source Limitations Obtain all products except twisted-pair cables through one source from a single manufacturer b Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use c Comply with NFPA 70 1 6 COORDINATION A Coordinate layout and installation of voice and data communication cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier B Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. C Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute to other participants. D Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames and cross-connect and patch panels in equipment rooms and wiring closets to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment PART 2 - PRODUCTS 21 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following 1 Cable. a Belden Inc.; Electronics Division. V- b. Or Equal. 2. Terminal and Connector Components and Distribution Racks. a AMP Incorporated, a Tyco International Ltd. Company. b. Hubbell Premise Wiring. c Leviton Telecom. d Thomas & Belts Corporation. e Or Equal. WLC/0414200 VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING 16750 Consultant 11/21/05 (2) 2 2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. General Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated system. Match components and interconnections for optimum future performance. B. Expansion Capability Unless otherwise t indicated, provide spare conductor pairs in cables, positions in cross-connect and patch panels, and terminal strips to accommodate 20 percent future increase m active workstations 2.3 MOUNTING ELEMENTS , A Raceways and Boxes Comply with Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes " B. Backboards 3/4-inch, interior-grade, fire-retardant-treated plywood 2 4 TWISTED-PAIR CABLES, CONNECTORS, AND TERMINAL EQUIPMENT A Cables Listed as complying with Category 5E of TIA/EIA-568-A B Conductors Solid copper C. UTP Cable Comply with TIA/EIA-568-A Four, thermoplastic-insulated, individually twisted pairs of conductors, No 24 AWG, color-coded, enclosed in PVC jacket D. UTP Plenum Cable Listed for use in air-handling spaces Features are as specified for cables, conductors, UTP cable, and STP workstation cable except materials are modified as required for listing E UTP Cable Connecting Hardware Comply with TIA/EIA-568-A IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools F IDC Terminal Block Modules Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated G IDC Connecting Hardware: Consistent throughout Project H. Cross-Connect Panel Modular array of IDC terminal blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables I Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables J Mounting Backboard K Patch Panel- Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables L Number of Jacks per Field" One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus spares and blank positions adequate to satisfy specified expansion criteria. M Mounting Backboard N Jacks and Jack Assemblies for UTP Cable. Modular, color-coded, RJ-45 receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals Use keyed jacks for data service / O UTP Patch Cords. Four-pair cables in 48-inch lengths, terminated with RJ-45 plug at each end Use keyed plugs for data service P Workstation Outlets. Dual jack-connector assemblies mounted in single or multigang faceplate 1 Faceplate. Stainless steel 2. Mounting Flush, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Legend. Factory labeled, top jack "Voice" and bottom jack "Data," by silk-screening or engraving ' WLC/0414200 VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING 16750 Consultant 11/21/05 (3) 2 5 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with Division 16 Section " Electrical Identification" and the following B Cable Labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth wraparound tape markers, machine printed with alphanumeric cable designations PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Examine pathway elements intended for cables Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3 2 APPLICATION OF MEDIA A Backbone Cable for Data Service Use UTP Category 5 cable for runs between equipment rooms and wiring closets and for runs between wiring closets B Backbone Cable for Voice Service Use UTP Category 5E cable for runs between equipment rooms and wiring closets and for runs between wiring closets. C Horizontal Cable for Data Service Use UTP Category 5E cable for runs between wiring closets and workstation outlets D Horizontal Cable for Voice Service Use UTP Category 5E cable for runs between wiring closets and workstation outlets 3 3 INSTALLATION A Wiring Method Install wiring in raceways except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use UL-hsted plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. B. Install cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Category 5 rating of components and that ensure Category 5 performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end C Install cables without damaging conductors, shield, or jacket D Do not bend cables, in handling or in installing, to smaller radii than mimmums recommended by manufacturer E. Pull cables without exceeding cable manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. F Pull cables simultaneously if more than one is being installed in same raceway. G. Use pulling compound or lubncant if necessary Use compounds that will not damage conductor or insulation H Use pulling means (including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire or cable grips) that will not damage media or raceway I. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members and follow surface contours where possible J Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. WLC/0414200 VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING 16750 Consultant 11/21/05 (4) K Wiring within Wiring Closets and Enclosures Provide conductors of adequate length. Tram conductors to terminal points with no excess Use lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer L Separation of Wires Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A rules for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cabling from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. M Make splices, taps, and terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels N. Use splice and tap connectors compatible with media types 3 4 GROUNDING A Comply with Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding " B Ground cable shields, dram conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments C Bond shields and dram conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit D Signal Ground Terminal" Locate in each equipment room and wiring closet, isolate from power system and equipment grounding. E Signal Ground Bus Mount on wall of main equipment room with standoff insulators F Signal Ground Backbone Cable Extend from signal ground bus to signal ground terminal in each equipment room and wiring closet 3 5 INSTALLATION IN EQUIPMENT ROOMS AND WIRING CLOSETS A Install plywood backboards on walls of equipment rooms and wiring closets from floor to ceiling B Mount patch panels, terminal strips, and other connecting hardware on backboards, unless otherwise indicated C Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields D Use patch panels to terminate cables entering the space, unless otherwise indicated 3 6 INSTALLATION STANDARDS A Comply with requirements in TIA/EIA-568-A and TIA/EIA-569-A 3 7 IDENTIFICATION A In addition to requirements in this Article, comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Section " Electrical Identification" and TIA/EIA-606\ B System. Use a unique, three-syllable, alphanumeric designation for each cable, and label cable and jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with same designation. Use logical and systematic designations for facility's architectural arrangement C. First syllable identifies and locates equipment room or wiring closet where cables originate. D Second syllable identifies and locates cross-connect- or patch-panel field in which cables terminate , E Third syllable designates type of media (copper or fiber) and position occupied by cable pairs or fibers in field F Workstation Label cables within outlet boxes WLC/0414200 VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING 16750 Consultant 11/21/05 (5) G. Within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. H Cables, General Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. I Exposed Cables. Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet J Cable Schedule Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project, in software and format selected by Owner K Cable Administration Drawings Show building floor plans with cable administration point labeling Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Owner 3 8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports 1 'Operational Test After installation of cables and connectors, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements Test each signal path for end-to-end performance from each end of all pairs installed Remove temporary connections when tests have been satisfactorily completed 2. Copper Cable Procedures. Inspect for physical damage and test each conductor signal path for continuity and shorts Use Class 2, bidirectional, Category 5E tester Test for faulty connectors, splices, and terminations Test according to TIA/EIA-TSB67, "Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems." Link performance for UTP cables must meet minimum criteria of TIA/EIA-568-A. B Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above 3 9 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets Refer to Division 1 Section. END OF SECTION WLC/0414200 VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING 16750 Consultant 11/21/05 (6) SECTION 16770 TELEVSION SURROUND SOUND SPEAKER SYSTEM 1 PART 1 - GENERAL •x 1 1, SECTION INCLUDES A Speakers B Accessories C Wmng & Conduit 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods B Section 16030 - Boxes. 1 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A Speaker System for Television Surround Sound 1 4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of section 01300 B. Shop Drawings Wiring diagrams of field wiring to speakers C Product Data' Provide for components and accessories 1 5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A Submit under provisions of Section 01700 B Accurately record actual locations of speakers, and control equipment 1 6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A Submit under provisions of Section 01700 B Operation Data. Include instructions for adjusting, operating, and extending the system C. Maintenance Data: Include repair procedures and spare parts documentation 1.7. QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer Company specializing in public address system with ten (10) years experience B Supplier Authorized distributor of speaker equipment manufacturer 1 8. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS. A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 B Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc C. Conform to requirements of Federal Communications Commission 1 9 WARRANTY A. Two-year warranty on speakers & attenuator. WLC/0414200 TELEVSION SURROUND SOUND SPEAKER SYSTEM 16770 Consultant 11/21/05 (1) PART 2 -PRODUCTS 21. MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers- Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following- 1 Soundolier 2 IMP Systems Inc 3 Or Equal 2 2 EQUIPMENT A Ceiling Speaker 1 Description Coaxial type with an 8 inch low-frequency cone and a high-temperature voice coil assembly coaxially mounted with a wide dispersion cone tweeter 2 Performance Criteria a Power Rating: 16 Watts b 260 gram ceramic magnet c Frequency Response 50 - 20 kHz ± 5 dB d Sound Pressure Level. 100 dB SPL with one Watt input 3 Nominal Impedance 8 ohms 4 Speaker Backbox Constructed of steel and insulated with IVz" thick high density fiberglass 5 Baffles. 8 inch round, painted steel white finish with uniform perforation B In-wall Speaker 1 Performance Criteria a Band width 45-to-20,000 Hz + 3 dB b Nominal Impedance 4 ohms, c. Sensitivity 87.5 dB 2 120 watt/channel rms, 8" woofer, 1 5" Kapton voice coil 3 Speaker Backbox Constructed of steel and insulated with 1 Vz thick high density fiberglass C Subwoofer 1 Performance Criteria- a Frequency Response 45-to-500 Hz, ±3dB. b. Sensitivity 89 dB c Nominal Impedance 8 ohms. 2. Max Power output: 50 watts 3. 8" woofer, dual 11/z" voice coil subwoofer system 2 3 ACCESSORIES A. Speaker Wire and Cable- 1 Description. 18 AWG stranded (19 x 25) copper conductor, 300 volt insulation, rated 75 degrees C, paired conductors twisted together and covered with a PVC jacket 2. Conduit: Vz" minimum. WLC/0414200 TELEVSION SURROUND SOUND SPEAKER SYSTEM 16770 Consultant 11/21/05 (2) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Splice cable only in accessible junction boxes or at terminal block units. C Install input circuits in separate cables and raceways from output circuits D Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage *• E. Install cable for exposed outside speaker circuits in Liquid tight flexible non-metallic conduit (type NMT) F Use suitable cable fittings and connectors 3 2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16000 to obtain mounting heights specified and Indicated on drawings B Install wall-mounted speaker as noted on plans C Connect to head end equipment and accessories furnish by owner 3 3 ADJUSTING A Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level B Adjust the speakers' SPU volume if necessary 34 WIRING A Provide conduit and wiring from speakers to Television location for connection to owner furnished Television sound system END OF SECTION WLC/0414200 TELEVSION SURROUND SOUND SPEAKER SYSTEM 16770 Consultant 11/21/05 (3) SECTION 16785 MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM 1. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1 2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following 1 Master antenna television systems using cable television service as the signal source 2 Broadband coaxial cabling for distributing television signal to interface points. 1 3 DEFINITIONS A Agile Receiver. A broadband receiver that can be tuned to any desired channel B Broadband For the purposes of this Section, wide bandwidth equipment or systems that can carry signals occupying in the frequency range of 54 to 1002 MHz A broadband communication system can simultaneously accommodate television, voice, data, and many other services C Carrier A pure-frequency signal that is modulated to carry information In the process of modulation, it is spread out over a wider band. The carrier frequency is the center frequency on any television channel D CATV: Community antenna television; a communication system that simultaneously distributes several different channels of broadcast programs and other information to customers via a coaxial cable. E. CCTV Closed-circuit television F CEA Consumer Electronics Association G. dBmV. Decibels relative to 1 mV across 75 ohms Zero dBmV is defined as 1 mV across 75 ohms dBmV = 20 log 10(ViA/2) where Vi is the measurement of voltage at a point having identical impedance to Va (0 001 V across 75 ohms) H Headend The control center of the master antenna television system, where incoming signals are amplified, converted, processed, and combined into a common cable along with any locally originated television signals, for transmission to user-interface points It is also called the "Central Retransmission Facility." I. MATV: Master antenna television, a small television antenna distribution system usually restricted to one or two buildings J. RF: Radio frequency K .User Interface: End point of Contractor's responsibility for Work of this Section User interfaces are the 75-ohm terminals on device plates WLC/0414200 MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM 16785 Consultant 11/21/05 (1) 1 4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System shall consist of cable television service and a coaxial cable distribution system B. Distribution of cable television service signals, which includes coordinating with Owner's selected service provider for installation of cable to the service point ready for connection into the distribution system Obtain signal levels, and noise and distortion characteristics from service provider as the point of departure for system layout and final equipment selection C Cable distribution system consisting of coaxial cables, user interfaces, signal taps and splitters, RF amplifiers, signal equalizers, power supplies, and required hardware complying with IEEE 802 7 and resulting in performance parameters specified in this Section. System shall be capable of distributing television channels as follows, according to EIA 542. 1 12 VHP Channels and FM 2 through 6 low-band VHF, FM band, and 7 through 13 high-band VHF 2. 21 CATV Channels. 2 through I (22) low, mid, and high band 3. 35 CATV Channels 2 through W (36) low, mid, high, and super band 4 40 CATV Channels 2 through EE (41) low, mid, high, and super band 5 52 CATV Channels 2 through PP (52) low, mid, high, and ultra band 6 60 CATV Channels 2 through YY (61) low, mid, high, super, and ultra band D Hardware Requirements: Use modular, plug-in, solid-state electronic components Mount amplifiers and other powered equipment in standard 19-inch (480-mm) cabinet complying with EIA 310 1 5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS \ A. Minimum acceptable distribution system performance at all user-interface points shall be as follows 1 RF Video Carrier Level Between 3 and 12 dBmV. 2. Relative Video Carrier Level. Within 3 dB to adjacent channel 3 Carrier Level Stability, Short Term Level shall not change more than 0 5 dB during a 60-mmute period 4 Carrier Level Stability, Long Term: Level shall not change more than 2 dB during a 24-hour period 5 Channel Frequency Response. Across any 6-MHz channel in 54- to 220-MHz frequency range, referenced to video, signal amplitude shall be plus or minus 1 dB, maximum. 6 Camer-to-Noise Ratio- 45 dB or more. 7 RF Visual Signal-to-Noise Ratio. 43 dB or more 1.6 SUBMITTALS A Product Data For each type of product indicated B Shop Drawings Show fabrication and installation details for television equipment. 1 Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work 2. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used: a. Nominal OD. b Minimum bending radius. c. Maximum pulling tension. 3 Wmng Diagrams' Power, signal, and control wiring; and grounding 4. Design Calculations Calculate signal attenuation budget and show calculated line and equipment losses for the system based on the functional block diagram, to show that proposed system layout can be expected to perform up to specification. Calculate signal strength from sources to headend input points for each antenna and CATV grouping. Allowable losses between components and User Interface shall be used to determine size and type of coaxial cable WLC/0414200 MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM 16785 Consultant 11/21/05 (2-) C Equipment List Include every piece of equipment by model number, manufacturer, serial number, location, and date of original installation. Add testing record of each piece of adjustable equipment, listing name of person testing, date of test, and descnption of as-left set points D Source quality-control test reports on coaxial cable sweep tests E. Field quality-control test reports F Operation and Maintenance Data For headend and distribution system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following 1 Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended to be stored at the site for ready access 2 Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of components and enclosures Show access and workspace requirements 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE ) A Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use B Comply with NECA 1 C Comply with NFPA 70. 1 8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Environmental Limitations System components shall be equipped and rated for the environments where installed B Environmental Conditions Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability. 1 Interior, Controlled Environment System components, except central-station control unit, installed in air-conditioned interior environments , shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of 36 to 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensmg NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures 1 9 COORDINATION A Coordinate size and location of raceway system, and provisions for electrical power to equipment of this Section B Coordinate Work of this Section with requirements of cable television service provider C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-m-Place Concrete " D. Coordinate installation of curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories " WLC/0414200 MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM 16785 Consultant 11/21/05 (3) 1 10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Provide no fewer than one of each item listed below Deliver extra materials to Owner 1 Fuses One for every 10, each type and rating 2. Splitters One for every 10 installed 3 Cable 100 feet, each type used PART 2 - PRODUCTS 21 MANUFACTURERS A In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1 Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified 2 2 SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS A Components Modular plug-in, heavy-duty, industrial- or commercial-grade units B Equipment Silicon-based, solid-state, integrated circuit devices C. Power Supply Characteristics Devices shall be within specified parameters for ac supply voltages within the range of 105 to 130 V D Protect signal cables and connected components against transient-voltage surges by suppressors and absorbers designed specifically for the purpose Comply with Division 16 Section "Transient Voltage Suppression" E Provide ac-powered equipment with integral surge suppressors, complying with UL1449 F RF and Video Impedance Matching Signal-handling components, including connecting cable, shall have end-to-end impedance-matched signal paths. Match and balance devices used at connections where it is impossible to avoid impedance mismatch or mismatch of balanced circuits to unbalanced circuits 2 3 MATV EQUIPMENT A Description Signal-source components, signal-processing and amplifying equipment, distribution components, and interconnecting wiring. System shall receive signals from sources, amplify and process them, and distribute them to outlets for receiving sets Equipment shall translate UHF channels to VHF channels before distribution to outlets B. Identification of Signal Sources and Channels Distributed: 1. Cable TV C. MATV System Qualitative Performance Requirements- Reception quality of color-television program transmissions at each system outlet from each designated channel and source shall be equal to or supenor than that obtained with performance checks specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, using a standard, commercial, cable-ready, color-television receiver WLC/0414200 MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM 16785 Consultant 11/21/05 (4) MAW System Quantitative Performance Requirements Level and quality of signal at each outlet from each designated channel and source shall comply with Specifications below when tested according to 47 CFR 76 2 4 MATV HEADEND COMPONENTS A Available Manufacturers 1 Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc 2. Leviton Voice & Data Division 3. Motorola Broadband Communications Sector 4 Or Equal B Headend Equipment Broadband amplifier for receiving and outputting the signals to cable distribution system Headend component performance specified in this Article is minimum acceptable, better ' performance may be required to meet minimum acceptable system performance standard in Part 1 1. House units in standard 19-inch electronic equipment cabinet complying with EIA 310 C Broadband; Amplifier. 1 Frequency Range 54 to 220 MHz > 2 Frequency Response Plus or minus 1 0 dB across passband 3. Maximum Noise 10dB. 4 Minimum Return Loss 16dB 5 I/O Impedance 75 ohms 2.5 DISTRIBUTION COMPONENTS A Available Manufacturers' 1 Leviton Voice & Data Division. 2 Motorola Broadband Communications Sector 3 Or Equal. B Distribution components shall be for signal processing and distribution downstream from headend equipment C Signal Power Splitters and Isolation Taps Metal-enclosed directional couplers with brass connector parts Where installed in signal circuits used to supply cable-powered amplifiers, power throughput capacity shall exceed load by at least 25 percent. V- 1 Return Loss 17dB 2 RFI Shielding 100dB 3 Isolation 25 dB 4 Impedance4 75 ohms for input and output terminals 5 Electrically powered components shall be UL labeled D. Distribution System Amplifiers Powered by coaxial cable system, equipped with surge protection device and external test points to allow convenient signal monitoring E Cable System Power Supplies: Plug-in modular construction, with surge, short circuit, and overload protection. F Signal Traps Packaged filters tuned to interference frequencies encountered in Project G Attenuators' Passive, of fixed value, used to balance signal levels WLC/0414200 MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM 16785 Consultant 11/21/05 (5) H Terminating Resistors' Enclosed units rated 0 5 W and matched for coaxial impedance I User-Interface Device: Flush, female-type outlets, designed to mimic power duplex outlet, for mounting in standard outlet box, with metallic parts of anodized brass, beryllium copper, or phosphor bronze Cable connector mounting shall be semtrecessed so its protrusion is flush with the plane of device plate Feedthrough-type cable connection shall not be used. 1 Cable Connector Female, Type F 2 Wall Plates Match materials and finish of power outlets in same space 3 Attenuation Less than 0 1 dB. 4 Voltage Standing-Wave Ratio Less than 1 15 to 1 2 6 CABLES A Available Manufacturers 1 Alpha Wire Company 2 Belden Inc , Electronics Division 3 West Penn Wire/CDT, a division of Cable Design Technologies, Inc 4 Or Equal. B Cable Characteristics Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for broadband MATV applications Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB minimum from 7 to 806 MHz, and shall be listed to comply with NFPA 70, Articles 810 and 820 C RG59/U, Indoor Headend Cable No 20 AWG, solid, silver-plated, copper-covered steel conductor, gas- injected foam-PE insulation Triple shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape, 95 percent aluminum braid, covered by aluminum foil with grounding strip Color-coded PVC jacket. NFPA 70, Type CATVR. D RG59/U, Indoor Distribution Cable: No 20 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor, gas-injected foam-PE insulation Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape, 40 percent aluminum braid. PVC jacket NFPA 70, Type CATV. E RG59/U, Plenum-Rated Indoor Distribution Cable No 20 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor, foam fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield, 65 percent aluminum braid Copolymer jacket NFPA 70, Type CATV and UL 910 2 7 CABLE CONNECTORS A Available Manufacturers 1 Leviton Voice & Data Division 2. Or Equal. B MATV Coaxial Cable Connectors Type F, 75 ohms C Patch Panels- Standard electrical enclosures, with NEMA 250 type suitable for environmental conditions at the installed location, with bulkheads and Type F connectors for splicing and patching coaxial cable. 2 8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL \ A. Cable products shall be sweep tested at the factory before shipping at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results WLC/0414200 MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM 16785 Consultant 11/21/05 (6) PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A Examine pathway elements intended for coaxial cable installation Check raceways, cables, trays, and other elements for compliance with accessibility for installation and maintenance, and other conditions affecting installation B Examine roughmg-m for antenna to verify actual locations of cable connections before antenna installation C Examine walls, floors, roofs, equipment bases, and roof supports for suitable conditions where television equipment is to be installed D Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3 2 INSTALLATION A Install signal line surge suppressors on coaxial cables entering headend equipment space and at antenna mounted amplifiers Comply with Division 16 Section "Transient Voltage Suppression " 33 GENERAL WIRING A Wiring Method Install cables in raceways except in accessible indoor ceiling spaces, attics, and as otherwise indicated Conceal raceways and wiring except in unfinished spaces B Wiring within Enclosures Bundle, lace, and tram conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools C. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets, and equipment enclosures D. Grounding According to recommendations in IEEE 142 and IEEE 1100 \ 3 4 COAXIAL CABLE INSTALLATION A Cable may not be installed in same raceway with power cable B Coaxial cable shall riot be spliced except on plywood backboards in wire closets, or in cabinets designated for the purpose C Outdoor connections shall be installed in enclosures meeting NEMA 250, Type 4X Connectors shall be corrosion resistant with properly designed O-nngs to keep out moisture D. Do not use water-based cable pulling lubricants with PVC-jacketed cable E Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended minimum bending radiuses F. Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 3 feet G. Pulling Cable- Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. WLC/041420Q MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM 16785 Consultant 11/21/05 (7) H. Cable Support. Install supports at intervals recommended in writing by cable manufacturer. Install supports within 6 inches of connector so no weight of cable is earned by connector Use no staples or wire ties, pull tie-wrap snug, and do not over tighten. I Signal Equalization. Where system performance may be degraded in certain operating modes, revise component connections and install distribution amplifiers and attenuators as required, providing a balanced signal across the system J Install passive circuit devices, such as splitters and attenuators, in wire closets or cabinets. Do not install attenuators as part of user-interface device outlets 3 5 HEADEND INSTALLATION A Mount headend equipment in electronic equipment cabinets recommended by manufacturer Group related items in methodical sequence B. Arrange equipment to facilitate access for maintenance and to preserve headroom and passage space Parts that require periodic service or maintenance shall be readily accessible. Headend components that require tuning adjustments shall be accessible from the front of equipment cabinets 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification " 3 7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Manufacturer's Field Service Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections Report results in writing B Inspection. Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled, and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. C Pretesting Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify that they comply with specified requirements Replace malfunctioning or damaged items Retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare television equipment for acceptance and operational testing as follows- 1 Use an agile receiver and signal strength meter or spectrum analyzer for testing 2 CATV Sources Connect receiver to an agile demodulator or CATV set-top converter at CATV service entrance to the facility D Test Schedule- Schedule tests after pretesting has successfully been completed and system has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice of test schedule E Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with Specifications Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation in all functional modes F Distribution System Acceptance Tests: 1. Field-Strength Instrument: Rated for minus 40-dBmV measuring sensitivity and a frequency range of 54 to 812 MHz, minimum. Provide documentation of recent calibration against recognized standards. WLC/0414200 MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM 16785 Consultant 11/21/05 (8) 2 Signal Level and Picture Quality. Use a field-strength meter or spectrum analyzer, and a standard TV receiver to measure signal levels and check picture quality at all user-interface outlets a Test the signal strength in dBmV at 55, 151, 547, and 750 MHz b. Minimum acceptable signal level is 0 dBmV (1000 mV) c. Maximum acceptable signal level over the entire bandwidth is 15 dBmV d Television receiver shall show no evidence of cross-channel mtermodulation, ghost images, or beat interference 3 Signal-to-Noise-Ratio Test Use a field-strength meter to make a sequence of measurements at the output of the last distribution amplifier or of another agreed-on location in system With system operating at normal levels, tune meter to the picture carrier frequency of each of the designated channels in turn and record the level With signal removed and input to corresponding headend amplifier terminated at 75 ohms, measure the level of noise at same tuning settings With meter correction factor added to last readings, differences from first set must not be less than 45 dB G Qualitative and Quantitative Performance Tests Demonstrate reception quality of color-television program transmissions at each user interface from each designated channel and source Quality shall be equal to or superior than that obtained with performance checks specified below, using a standard, commercial, cable-ready, color-television receiver Level and quality of signal at each outlet and from each designated channel and source shall comply with the following Specifications when tested according to 47 CFR 76 1 RF video-carrier level. 2 Relative video-carrier level 3 Carrier level stability, 60-mmute and 24-hour periods 4 Broadband frequency response 5 Channel frequency response 6 Carrier-to-noise ratio 7 RF visual signal-to-noise ratio H Record test results I Retest Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until requirements specified in Part 1 are met END OF SECTION WLC/0414200 MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM 16785 Consultant 11/21/05 (9) APPENDIX A STANDARD DRAWINGS CURB LINE 60' TEXTURED CONCRETE OR "INTERLOCKING PAVERS 60'o'bJm I ^PLANTED AREA 1 MEDIAN CENTERLINE I CURB LINE CURB LINE NOTE FOR STREETS REQUIRING LONGER TAPERS THE DIMENSIONS MAY BE EXTENDED IN A PROPORTIONATE MANNER DETAIL 120'TAPER 45' FLARE CURB LINE TEXTURED CONCRETE OR INTERLOCKING PAVERS DETAIL NOSE FLARE REV APPROVED DATE CITY OF CARLSBAD MEDIAN TAPER AND NOSE FLARE 6-04 CITY ENGINEER DATE SUPPLEMENTAL r\ & A A STANDARD NO OO- I I 152mm (6") 13mm (1/2")' 51mm (2")Weakened Plane Joint 0 203mm (8") 13mm (1/2")51mm (2") Weakened Plane Joint 152mm (6") CURB Area=0083m (089 Sq Ft) 203mm (8") CURB Area=01m (109 Sq Ft) (1/2") Ex.stmg Curb ^^TTri5lm^l-M 1152mm (6") Weakened Plane Joint 38mm (1-1/2") except where elevations shown indicate otherwise GUTTER NOTES: 1 Concrete shall be 308kg/M:i-C-17-MPa (520-C-2500) 2 See Standard Drawings G-9 and G-10 for joint details 3 Slope top of curb 6 35mm (1/4") per foot toward street LEGEND ON PLANS 152mm (6") curb Revision ORIGINAL Add Metnc Retormotted By Approved Kercheval 12/75 T Stanton T Stanton Dote 03/03 04/06 SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING CURBS AND GUTTER - RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE Ch&rpefson R C E 19246 Date DRAWING NUMBER Existing A C and Base See >'Note ! r Asphalt Concrete 305mm (12") mm (typ ) feather to meet existing paving See Note 1 25mm (1 I mm. Asphalt Concrete Base Material see Note 3 — TYPE A TYPE B NOTES: 1 Trench edges to be cut a minimum of 152mm (6") wider than trench for 914mm (3') wide or less, and 305mm (12") wider for trenches over 914mm (3') wide 2 Existing A C shall be cut and removed in such a manner so as not to tear, bulge or displace adjacent pavement Edges shall be clean and vertical All cuts shall be parallel or perpendicular to street centerlme, when practical 3 Base material shall be replaced to depth of existing base A C may be substituted for base material 4 A tack coat of osphaltic emulsion or paving asphalt shall be applied to existing A C. or P.C C contact surfaces, prior to resurfacing 5 Asphalt Concrete Resurfacing a) Minimum total thickness shall be one inch greater than existing A C. b) A C. shall be hot plant mix c) Finish course for Type B resurfacing shall be laid down using a spreader box 6 All A C. resurfacing shall be seal coated with an emulsified asphalt and covered with sand. Chip sealing shall be applied as required by Agency 7 Type B shall not be used on lateral crossings 8 Sloughing of trench under pavement shall be cause for requiring additional pavement and base Revision ORIGINAL Add Metric Reviewed By Approved Date Parkinson 2/95 T Stanton 03/03 T Stanton 04/06 SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING TRENCH RESURFACING TYPES A & B RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE Chairperson R C E 19246 Dote DRAWING NUMBER G-24 NOTES: 1. WHERE POSSIBLE. LOCATE 2-INCH BLOW-OFF ASSEMBLY IN PAVED STREET. 2. PROVIDE MARKER POST FOR EACH ASSEMBLY EXCEPT WHERE VALVE BOX IS LOCATED IN PAVED STREET. SEE MATERIAL ITEM (15) 1" THICK OVERLAY OF ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING INSTALLATIONS ONLY POSITION MIDWAY BETWEEN PIPELINE AND VALVE BOX "WATER MAINS-12 INCHES AND SMALLER ITEM DESCRIPTION SPEC/DWG 2-INCH BLOW-OFF ASSEMBLY FOR PIPELINES 12 INCHES AND SMALLER 15090 OUTLET ON DUCTILE IRON PIPE, 0-200 PS1 15056/D-l.l OUTLET ON CML&C STEEL PIPE. 0-300 PS1 15061/D-1.2 OUTLET ON PVC PRESSURE PIPE. 0-200 PS1 15064/D-1.3 2' COPPER WATER TUBE, TYPE K. SOFT 15057 2" COPPER CPLG WITH STOPS. COPPER SOLDER JOINTS. 0-300 PS1 15057 2' COPPER ADAPTER. COPPER SOLDER JOINT x MALE 1PT , 0-300 PSI 15057 2" FLARED TUBE STR CPLG. COPPER X MALE IPT. 0-150 PSI 15057 2" BRZ ANGLE BALL VALVE W/1NLET FEMALE IPT x METER FLG, 0-300 PSI 15080 10 2-1/2" x 2" CL 125 CAST BRONZE RDC ELBOW WITH BRZ METER FLANGE 15057/15090 11 2-1/2' BRONZE EXT NIPPLE WITH MALE IPT x OUTSIDE HOSE THREADS 15090 12 2-1/2' PLASTIC HOSE CAP WITH CHAIN RING AND CHAIN 15090 13 VALVE BOX INSTALLATION FOR BURIED ASSEMBLIES 15090/E-l.l 14 30 LB ZINC ANODE WITH ANODE LEAD WIRE AND PIPE CLAMP 16640 15 MARKER POST, REDWOOD OR SCHEDULE 80 PVC PIPE 15090 16 30" DIAMETER x 8' THICK CONCRETE RING 15090 OLIVENHAIN MUNICIPAL WATER DIST RICT Boyle Engineering Corporal-Jon 2-INCH BLOW-OFF ASSEMBLY WORKING PRESSURE 0-200 PSI STD DWG NO A-1.1 MARCH 1997 DISTRICT'S METER CUSTOMER SERVICE LINE SEE NOTE 3SEE NOTE 2 lT)OR(l2 FOR SOLDER JOINT (7 INSTALLATIONS ONLY 2I3X4X)R(5 4" THK SAND CUSHION NON-TRAFFIC AREASLOPE UPWARD 27. MINIMUM POSITION MIDWAY BETWEEN NOTES: ' PIPELINE AND METER BOX 1. WHERE SIDEWALKS ARE NOT PRESENT, LOCATE CENTER OF ANGLE BALL VALVE 5" FROM BACK FACE OF CURB. 2. AFTER THE SPECIFIED COMPONENTS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED BY OTHERS, THE DISTRICT WILL FURNISH AND INSTALL A PRESSURE REGULATOR (IF NECESSARY), METER, AND BALL VALVE IN THE INDICATED SPACE. 3. AFTER DISTRICT'S METER INSTALLATION, CONNECT CUSTOMER SERVICE LINE TO INSTALLED BALL VALVE. USE A NON-METALLIC PIPE NIPPLE AT THE VALVE. WATER MAINS - 0-200 PSI ITEM DESCRIPTION SPEC/DWG 1-1/2" WATER SERVICE ASSY FOR 1-1/2" WATER METER 15081 OUTLET ON DUCTILE IRON PIPE. 0-200 PSI 15056/D-l.l OUTLET ON CML&C STEEL PIPE. 0-300 PSI 15061/D-1.2 OUTLET ON PVC PRESSURE PIPE, 0-200 PSI 15064/D-1.3 OUTLET ON PVC DISTRIBUTION PIPE. 0-150 PSI 15070/D-1.4 1-1/2" COPPER WATER TUBE, TYPE K, SOFT 15057 1-1/2" COPPER CPLG WITH STOPS, COPPER SOLDER JOINTS. 0-300 PSI 15057 1-1/2" COPPER ADAPTER. COPPER SOLDER JOINT x MALE IPT , 0-300 PSI 15057 1-1/2" FLARED TUBE STR CPLG, COPPER X MALE IPT, 0-150 PSI 15057 10 1-1/2" BRZ ANGLE BALL VALVE W/INLET FEMALE IPT x METER FLG 15081 METER BOX AND COVER FOR TRAFFIC AREA, BROOKS NO. 67 W/CDR COVER 15081 12 METER BOX AND COVER FOR NON-TRAFFIC AREA, BROOKS NO. 67 W/CDR COVER 15081 13 METER BOX EXTENSION. BROOKS NO. 67 15081 14 30 LB ZINC ANODE WITH ANODE LEAD WIRE AND PIPE CLAMP 16640 15 CUSTOMER SERVICE LINE 1 OLIVENHAIN MUNICIPAL WATER DIST RICT Boyle Engineering Corporation WATER SERVICE ASSY FOR 1-1/2" METER - WORKING PRESS 0-200 PSI STD DWG NO B-1.3 MARCH 1997 DISTRICT'S CUSTOMER METER _ SERVICE LINE SEE NOTE 2 SEE NOTE 3 NOTES: 1. WHEN SIDEWALK ADJACENT TO CURB EXCEED 5' IN WIDTH, LOCATE ASSEMBLY AS DIRCTED BY THE DISTRICT'S REPRESENTATIVE. ASSEMBLY MAY BE INSTALLED PERPENDICULAR TO FACE OF CURB AS SHOWN OR ROTATED 90"TO BE PARALLEL TO FACE OF CURB. 2. AFTER THE SPECIFIED COMPONENTS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED BY OTHERS, THE DISTRICT WILL FURNISH AND INSTALL A PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE (IF NECESSARY), METER, GATE VALVE, AND PIPE SUPPORT IN THE INDICATED SPACE. 3. AFTER DISTRICT'S METER INSTALLATION, CONNECT CUSTOMER SERVICE LINE TO INSTALLED GATE VALVE. POUR A CONCRETE PAD ON GRADE FOR THE COMPLETED ASSEMBLY. 4. PROVIDE GUARD POSTS WHEN DIRECTED BY THE DISTRICT'S REPRESENTATIVE. WATER MAINS - 0-200 PSI ITEM DESCRIPTION SPEC/DWG 41 THRU 10' WATER SERVICE ASSY FOR 4' THRU 10' WATER METER 15081 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND PI TEE WITH CL 150 FLANGED OUTLET 15056 STEEL PIPE. CML&C AND STEEL OUTLET WITH CL 150 FLANGE 15061 CL ISO OR 200 PVC PRESSURE PIPE 12 INCHES AND SMALLER 15064 PR 18 PVC DISTRIBUTION PIPE 14 INCHES AND LARGER 15070 PI TEE WITH CL 150 FLANGED OUTLET FOR PVC PIPE INSTALLATION 15064/15070 RESILIENT SEATED GATE VALVE WITH CL 125 FLANGE x MECH JT. 0-200 PSI 15101 VALVE BOX INSTALLATION FOR BURIED VALVES I5IOI/E-I.2 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT 09867 10 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK D-3.3/D-3.4 CL 150 OR 200 PVC PRESSURE PIPE PER WORKING PRESSURE 15064 12 PI BASE BEND WITH CL ISO FLANGE x MECHANICAL JOINT 15056 13 CLASS 53 DUCTILE IRON PIPE WITH CL 150 FLANGES 15056 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK D-3.5/D-3.6 15 DUCTILE IRON 1/4 BEND WITH CL 150 FLANGES 15056 16 RESILIENT SEATED GATE VALVE WITH CL 125 FLANGES 15101 17 36' WIDE x 4' THICK CONCRETE PAD, LENGTH VARIES PER SIZE 15081 •I OLIVENHAIN MUNICIPAL WATER DISTR CT Boyle Engineering Corporation WATER SERVICE ASSY FOR 4' THRU IO- METER-WORKING PRESSURE 0-200 PSI STD DWG NO B-1.8 MARCH 1997 TO DISTRICT'S METER ( 'SEE NOTE 1 9" UJ NOTES: 1. NO OUTLETS WILL BE ALLOWED IN THE PIPING BETWEEN THE METER AND BACKFLOW PREVENTER. BACKFLOW PREVENTER SHALL BE THE SAME SIZE AS THE METER AND PIPING TO THE ASSEMBLY. A WYE STRAINER WITH NO FLUSH VALVE AND/OR PRESSURE REGULATOR MAY BE INSTALLED BETWEEN THE METER' AND BACKFLOW PREVENTER. 2. BRASS PIPE WITH THREADED FITTINGS HAVING THE SAME CONFIGURATION MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF THE COPPER WATER TUBE. 3. PROVIDE GUARD POSTS WHEN DIRECTED BY THE DISTRICT'S REPRESENTATIVE. 4. OMWD MAINTENANCE RESPONSIBILITY STOPS AT THE METER. ITEM DESCRIPTION SPEC/DWG 3/4" THRU 2" REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER ASSEMBLY 15112 COPPER ADAPTER, COPPER SOLDER JOINT x MALE 1PT 15057 COPPER WATER TUBE, TYPE K, HARD 15057 COPPER 90"ELBOW WITH COPPER SOLDER JOINTS 15057 COPPER UNION WITH COPPER SOLDER JOINTS 15057 COPPER ADAPTER. MALE SOLDER x MALE IPT 15057 REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER WITH BALL VALVES 15112 18" WIDE X 4' THICK CONCRETE PAD. LENGTH VARIES PER SIZE 15112 CONCRETE ANCHOR BLOCK WITH 1 CUBIC FOOT 15112 OLIVENHAIN MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT Boyle Engineering Corporation REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER ASSY FOR SIZES 3/4-INCH THRU 2-INCH STD DWG NO C-2.1 MARCH 1997 NOTES: 1. WHEN SIDEWALK ADJACENT TO CURB EXCEEDS 5' IN WIDTH, LOCATE ASSEMBLY AS DIRECTED BY THE DISTRICT'S REPRESENTATIVE. DETECTOR CHECK ASSEMBLY MAY BE INSTALLED PERPENDICULAR TO FACE OF CURB AS SHOWN OR ROTATED 90° TO BE PARALLEL TO FACE OF CURB. 2. FIELD PAINT ABOVEGROUND SURFACES OF PIPE, FITTINGS, AND PIPE SUPPORT PER STD SPEC 09900, SYSTEM NO. 20. COLOR TO BE OSHA BLUE. 3. DETECTOR CHECKS SHALL BE THE SAME SIZE AS THE OUTLET AND PIPING TO THE ASSEMBLY. 4. PROVIDE GUARD POSTS WHEN DIRECTED BY THE DISTRICT'S REPRESENTATIVE. LIMIT OF OMWD "MAINTENANCE RESPONSIBILITY INSTALLATION PER .,CUSTOMER, _ ITEM DESCRIPTION SPEC/DWG 4" THRU 10" DOUBLE CHECK DETECTOR CHECK ASSEMBLY 15112 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND Dl TEE WITH CL 150 FLANGED OUTLET 15056 STEEL PIPE, CML&C AND STEEL OUTLET WITH CL 150 FLANGE 15061 CL 150 OR 200 PVC PRESSURE PIPE 12 INCHES AND SMALLER 15064 DR 18 PVC DISTRIBUTION PIPE 14 INCHES AND LARGER 15070 PI TEE WITH CL 150 FLANGED OUTLET FOR PVC PIPE INSTALLATION 15064/15070 RESILIENT SEATED GATE VALVE WITH CL 125 FLG x MECH JT. 0-200 PSI 15101 VALVE BOX INSTALLATION FOR BURIED VALVES 15101/E-1.2 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT 09867 10 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK D-3.3/D-3.4 11 CL 150 OR 200 PVC PRESSURE PIPE PER WORKING PRESSURE 15064 12 PI BASE BEND WITH CL 150 FLANGE x MECHANICAL JOINT 15056 13 CLASS 53 DUCTILE IRON PIPE WITH CL 150 FLANGES 15056 14 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK-POUR BACK TO BACK D-3.5./D-3.6 15 DUCTILE IRON 1/4 BEND WITH CL 150 FLANGES 15056 16 REDUCED PRESSURE DETECTOR CHECK WITH BYPASS METER AND VALVES 15112 17 36" WIDE x 4" THICK CONCRETE PAD. LENGTH VARIES PER SIZE 15112 18 ADJUSTABLE PIPE SUPPORT 15112 OLIVENHAIN MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT Boyle Engineering Corporation REDUCED PRESSURE DETECTOR CHECK ASSEMBLY FOR SIZES 4-INCH THRU 10-INCH STD DWG NO C-3.4 MARCH 1997 WORKING PRESSURE 0-300 PSI 0-200 PSI 201-300 PSI ASSEMBLY SIZE 1" 1-1/2" 2" OUTLET SIZE 1" OR 1-1/2" 1-1/2" OR 2" 2" OR 2-1/2" INSULATING BUSHING NA OR 1-1/2" x 1" NA OR 2" x 1-1/2" NA OR 2-1/2" x 2" VALVE SIZE 1" 1-1/2" 2" ITEM DESCRIPTION SPEC/DWG DUCTILE IRON PIPE 15056 BRONZE SERVICE SADDLE WITH FEMALE IPT OUTLET 15056 INSULATING BUSHING 15080 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT 09867 WAX TAPE COATING SYSTEM 09868 DUCTILE IRON TEE WITH FLANGED OUTLET 0-300 PS!15057 COPPER ADAPTER, COPPER SOLDER JOINT x MALE IPT 15057 FLARED TUBE STR CPLG. COPPER X MALE IPT. 0-150 PSI 15057 BRONZE CORP STOP BALL TYPE WITH INLET MALE IPT x OUTLET FEMALE IPT 15080 10 DUCTILE IRON REDUCING FLANGE WITH FEMALE IPT OUTLET 15056 OLIVENHAIN MUNICIPAL WATER DIST RICT Boyle Engineering Corporation OUTLETS ON DUCTILE IRON PIPE FOR 1-INCH THRU 2-INCH ASSEMBLIES STD DWG NO D-1.1 MARCH 1997 WORKING PRESSURE 0-300 PSl 0-200 PSI ASSEMBLY SIZE 1" 1-1/2" 2" OUTLET SIZE r 1-1/2" 2" INSULATING BUSHING NA NA NA VALVE SIZE 1" 1-1/2" 2" ITEM DESCRIPTION SPEC/DWG PVC PRESSURE PIPE - AWWA C900 CL 150 OR CL 200 15064 BRONZE SERVICE SADDLE WITH FEMALE 1PT OUTLET 15064 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT 09867 COPPER ADAPTER, COPPER SOLDER JOINT x MALE 1PT , 0-300 PSl 15057 FLARED TUBE STR CPLG. COPPER X MALE IPT. 0-150 PSl 15057 BRONZE CORP STOP BALL TYPE WITH INLET MALE IPT x OUTLET FEMALE IPT 15080 •f OLIVENHAIN MUNICIPAL WATER DIST RICT Boyle Engineering Corporation OUTLETS ON PVC PRESSURE PIPE FOR 1-INCH THRU 2-INCH ASSEMBLIES STD DWG NO D-1.3 MARCH 1997 USE BRANCH SIZE OF TEE TO DETERMINE SIZE OF THRUST BLOCK PLAN VIEW INSTALL BLOW-OFF OR MANUAL AIR RELEASE ASSEMBLIES AT Q. THE END OF CAPPED PIPES Q- 6 TRENCH SECTION MINIMUM BEARING AREA OF BLOCK IN SQUARE FEET SIZE TEE CAP 4 4 6" 8 8 8" 13 13 10" 20 20 12" 28 28 14" 37 37 16" 48 48 18" 60 60 BRG AREA 2HEIGHT = WIDTH = 2 x HEIGHT NOTE BASED ON SOIL BEARING CAPACITY OF 1500 LBS/SF. SPECIAL DESIGN REQUIRED IF SOIL BEARING CAPACITY IS LESS THAN 1500 LBS/SF. PLACE CONCRETE AGAINST UNDISTURBED GROUND IN TRENCH BOTTOM AND SIDE. 4"-18" WATER MAINS - 0-150 PSI ITEM DESCRIPTION SPEC/DWG DUCTILE IRON PIPE WITH NON-RESTRAINED JOINTS 15056 STEEL PIPE, CML&C WITH NON-RESTRAINED JOINTS 15061 CL 150 PVC PRESSURE PIPE. 12 INCHES & SMALLER W/NON-RESTRA1NED JT 15064 PR 18 PVC DISTRIBUTION PIPE, 14 INCHES & LARGER W/NON-RESTRA1NED JT 15070 DUCTILE IRON TEE FOR PI OR PVC PIPE - STEEL OUTLET NOT SHOWN 15056/15064 DUCTILE IRON CAP FOR Dl OR PVC PIPE - STEEL BULKHEAD NOT SHOWN 15056/15064 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT 09867 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK 02223 OLIVENHAIN MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT Boyle Engineering Corporal-ion THRUST BLOCK FOR TEES OR CAPS WORKING PRESSURE 0-150 PSI STD DWG NO D-3.3 MARCH 1997 USE BRANCH SIZE OF TEE TO DETERMINE SIZE OF THRUST BLOCK PLAN VIEW INSTALL BLOW-OFF OR MANUAL AIR RELEASE ASSEMLIES AT THE END OF CAPPED PIPES TRENCH WIDTH TRENCH SECTION MINIMUM BEARING AREA OF BLOCK IN SQUARE FEET SIZE TEE CAP 4" 5 5 6' 10 10 8" 17 17 10' 25 25 12" 35 35 14" 47 47 16' 60 60 18' 75 75 •VBRG AREA 2HEIGHT WIDTH = 2 x HEIGHT NOTE: BASED ON SOIL BEARING CAPACITY OF 1500 LBS/SF. SPECIAL DESIGN REQUIRED IF SOIL BEARING CAPACITY IS LESS THAN 1500 LBS/SF OR FOR INSTALLATIONS WITH WORKING PRESSURE ABOVE 200 PSI. PLACE CONCRETE AGAINST UNDISTURBED GROUND IN TRENCH BOTTOM AND SIDE. 4"-18" WATER MAINS - 151-200 PSI ITEM DESCRIPTION SPEC/DWG DUCTILE IRON PIPE WITH NON-RESTRAINED JOINTS 15056 STEEL PIPE. CML&C WITH NON-RESTRAINED JOINTS 15061 CL 200 PVC PRESSURE PIPE, 12 INCHES &. SMALLER W/NON-RESTRA1NED JT 15064 DUCTILE IRON TEE FOR Dl OR PVC PIPE - STEEL OUTLET NOT SHOWN 15056/15064 DUCTILE IRON CAP FOR Dl OR PVC PIPE - STEEL BULKHEAD NOT SHOWN 15056/15064 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT 09867 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK 02223 OLIVENHAIN MUNICIPAL WATER DIST RICT Boyle Engineering Corporation THRUST BLOCK FOR TEES OR CAPS WORKING PRESSURE 151-200 PSI STD DWG NO D-3.4 MARCH 1997 ANGLE OF PIPE BEND PLAN VIEW TRENCH WIDTH TRENCH SECTION MINIMUM BEARING AREA OF BLOCK IN SQUARE FEET D LJ CD UJ Q- Q_ U_ O LlJ_J 0z< SIZE 11-1/4° 22-1/2° 33 -3/4° 45° , 56-1/4° ^7-1/2° 90° 4" 1 2 2 3 4 4 6 6" 2 3 5 6 7 9 11 8" 3 5 8 10 13 15 19 10" 4 8 12 15 19 22 28 12" 6 11 16 21 26 31 39 14" 8 15 22 28 35 41 52 16" 10 19 28 37 45 53 68 18" 12 24 35 46 57 67 85 HEIGHT =BRG AREA WIDTH = 2 x HEIGHT NOTE: BASED ON SOIL BEARING CAPACITY OF 1500 LBS/SF. SPECIAL DESIGN REQUIRED IF SOIL BEARING CAPACITY IS LESS THAN 1500 LBS/SF. PLACE CONCRETE AGAINST UNDISTURBED GROUND IN TRENCH BOTTOM AND SIDE. 4"-18" WATER MAINS - 0-150 PSI ITEM DESCRIPTION SPEC/DWG DUCTILE IRON PIPE WITH NON-RESTRAINED JOINTS 15056 STEEL PIPE. CML&C WITH NON-RESTRAINED JOINTS 15061 CL 150 PVC PRESSURE PIPE, 12 INCHES & SMALLER W/NON-RESTRA1NED JT 15064 PR 18 PVC DISTRIBUTION PIPE, 14 INCHES & LARGER W/NON-RESTRA1NED JT 15070 DUCTILE IRON BEND FOR PI OR PVC PIPE - STEEL NOT SHOWN 15056/15064 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT 09867 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK 02223 OLIVENHAIN MUNICIPAL WATER DIST RICT Boyle Engineering Corporation THRUST BLOCK FOR PIPE BENDS WORKING PRESSURE 0-150 PSI STD DWG NO D-3.5 MARCH 1997 ANGLE OF PIPE BEND EL u_o z 3 8 it J x r PLAN VIEW TRENCH WIDTH TRENCH SECTION MINIMUM BEARING AREA OF BLOCK IN SQUARE FEET Q Z LJ CD LJ 0. Q_ Ll. O Ld _J Oz< SIZE 11-1/4° 224/2° 33-3/4° 45° 56-1/4° 674/2° 90° 4" 2 3 3 4 5 5 8 6" 3 4 7 8 9 12 14 8" 4 7 10 13 17 19 24 10" 5 10 15 19 y 24 28 35 12" 8 14 20 27 33 39 49 14" 10 19 28 '35 44 52 65 16" 13 24 35 47 57 67 85 18" 15 30 44 58 72 84 107 HEIGHT --AREA WIDTH = 2 x HEIGHT NOTE: BASED ON SOIL BEARING CAPACITY OF 1500 LBS/SF. SPECIAL DESIGN REQUIRED IF SOIL BEARING CAPACITY IS LESS THAN 1500 LBS/SF OR FOR INSTALLATIONS WITH WORKING PRESSURE ABOVE 200 PSI. PLACE CONCRETE AGAINST UNDISTURBED GROUND IN TRENCH BOTTOM AND SIDE. 4"-18" WATER MAINS - 151-200 PSI ITEM DESCRIPTION SPEC/DWG DUCTILE IRON PIPE^ WITH NON-RESTRAINED JOINTS 15056 STEEL PIPE, CML&C WITH NON-RESTRAINED JOINTS 15061 CL 200 PVC PRESSURE PIPE. 12 INCHES & SMALLER W/NON-RESTRAINED JT 15064 DUCTILE IRON BEND FOR PI OR PVC PIPE - STEEL NOT SHOWN 15056/15064 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT 09867 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK 02223 OLIVENHAIN MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT Boyle Engineering Corporal-ion THRUST BLOCK FOR PIPE BENDS WORKING PRESSURE 151-200 PSI STD DWG NO D-3.6 MARCH 1997 NOTE: FIELD PAINT TOP SIDE OF VALVE BOX COVER PER STD SPEC 09900, SYSTEM NO. COLOR TO BE OSHA BLUE. 20 ^ro cn UJ O O PLAN PAVED AREA NON-PAVED AREA PIPE SLEEVE OD = 12-1/2 SECTION ITEM DESCRIPTION SPEC/DWG1CAST IRON FRAME AND LID FOR TRAFFIC LOADING 15090/15091 12" PVC GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SDR 35 15090/15091 30" DIAMETER x 8" THICK CONCRETE RING 03000 OLIVENHAIN MUNICIPAL WATER DIST RICT Boyle Engineering Corporation VALVE BOX INSTALLATION FOR BURIED ASSEMBLIES STD DWG NO E-l.l MARCH 1997 FRAME PLAN PAVED AREA . NON-PAVED AREA, 1/4" PL x 7" OD 2- 3/8" OD PLATE 3- 1/2' SQ PLATE gf rfv STL PIPE ^\ SECTION NOTES: 1. FIELD PAINT TOP SIDE OF VALVE BOX FRAME AND COVER PER STD SPEC 09900, SYSTEM NO. 20. COLOR TO BE OSHA BLUE, OSHA ORANGE, OSHA YELLOW, OSHA WHITE, OR OSHA RED DEPENDING ON VALVE PURPOSE. 2. PROVIDE EXTENSION STEM IF VALVE OPERATING NUT IS MORE THAN 5 FEET BELOW LID. IF EXTENSION STEM IS REQUIRED FOR A PLUG VALVE. USE STD DWG NO. E-1.3. CSl ozUl SOCKET ELEVATION i CM \^ . iI\ a .SC^ ^x \ 1 1 •*• \ \ 00\ ro C\J\ I ro BOTTOM VIEW ITEM DESCRIPTION SPEC/DWG CAST IRON FRAME AND LID FOR TRAFFIC LOADING VALVE SPEC 8" PVC PLASTIC IRRIGATION PIPE (PIP) SDR 41 VALVE SPEC 24' DIAMETER x 6" THICK CONCRETE RING 03000 SEALANT EXT PIPE AND INJECTOR ASSY FOR PLUG VALVES W/0 EXT STEM 15102 EXTENSION STEM, HOT DIP GALVANIZE AFTER FABRICATION VALVE SPEC OLIVENHAIN MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT Boyle Engineering Corporation VALVE BOX INSTALLATION FOR BURIED VALVES STD DWG NO E-1.2 MARCH 1997 MINIMUM = (PIPE OD NIC BELLS) + 16" MAXIMUM =(PIPE OD NIC BELLS) + 24" TEMPORARY TRENCH BOX OR SHORING WHERE REQUIRED BY SOIL CONDITIONS rMAX SLOPE PER / PROJECT GEOTECH / ENGINEER 1/2" MAX: CRUSHED ROCK ENCASEMENT TO 16" 0 PIPE 3/4" MAX. FOR PIPE > 16" 0 NOTES: l=l 11" TYPE C BEDDING STANDARD INSTALLATION ONLY IN WET GROUND CONDITIONS, WRAP BEDDING W/NON-WOVEN GEOTEXTILE MIRAFI 140N OR SIMILAR WITH OVERLAP EQUAL TO THE TRENCH WIDTH MAX. DEPTH OF TEMPORARY TRENCH BOX PER ASTM D2321 O TOP OF PIPE SEE NOTE 2 FOR EXCEPTION 4" MIN. TO 8" MAX BENEATH PIPE OR 2" MIN. BENEATH BELL WHICHEVER IS GREATER -FIRM TRENCH BOTTOM TO BE CREATED USING CRUSHED ROCK £ 1/2" AND < 1" IN SIZE. BRIDGE NATIVE SOILS UNTIL FIRM SUBGRADE FORMS. THICKNESS AS REQUIRED. 1. ALL PIPING SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE W/ ASTM D2321 (STD PRACTICE FOR UG INSTALLATION OF PIPE FOR SEWERS & OTHER GRAVITY-FLOW APPLICATIONS.) 2 OVEREXCAVATION MAY PROCEED WITH A TRENCH BOX TO BOTTOM OF TRENCH. THE TRENCH BOX SHALL BE RAISED AS FIRM SUBGRADE IS ESTABLISHED. AFTER FIRM SUBGRADE IS ESTABLISHED, THE TRENCH BOX SHALL BE SUSPENDED ABOVE TOP OF PIPE ELEVATION THE PIPE BEDDING SHALL THEN BE SET INSIDE GEOTEXTILE FABRIC, THE PIPE INVERT SHALL BE SET, AND THE PIPE ZONE SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH COMPACTED CRUSHED ROCK AND ENCLOSED WITH GEOTEXTILE AS SHOWN 3. (*) INDICATES MINIMUM RELATIVE COMPACTION. 4 UNDISTURBED NATIVE SOIL IS ANTICIPATED TO BE 85% RELATIVE COMPACTION AT TRENCH BOTTOM, WHICH IS SUITABLE AS "FIRM TRENCH BOTTOM". IF THE TRENCH BOTTOM IS LESS THAN 85% RELATIVE COMPACTION, CONTRACTOR SHALL PLACE CRUSHED ROCK AS INDICATED BY TRENCH DETAIL 5. PROVIDE COMPACTION EFFORT SUITABLE TO UNIFORMLY LOAD THE ENTIRE CIRCUMFERENCE OF THE PIPE. LEUCADIA WASTEWATER DISTRICT APPOVED 11/8/06 RCE CA|265U EXP 3/31/OB DRAWN PBR CHKD. CHR REV. SLD STANDARD PIPE ZONE AND TRENCH BACKFILL STD. DWG. NO. S-11 1 1/2" AC FINISH COURSE 1/2" MAX AGGREGATE PLANE 1 1/2" DEEP AND 12" BEYOND TRENCH LINE EXIST AC PAVEMENT- mcjNv^n v»iu in \ IZ EXIST. PAVEMENT PLUS 1-1/2" AC-MIN 3" SECTION 3/4" MAX AGGREGATE LJ O < CD i ______ 6" MIN. CLASS 2 AGGREGATE -BASE COMPACTED TO 95% MIN RELATIVE COMPACTION PAVEMENT REINFORCEMENT MEMBRANE NOTES: 1. TRENCH MAY BE SLOPED BACK ONLY IN AREAS APPROVED BY^ THE DISTRICT ENGINEER. PAVING IN PAVED AREAS SHALL BE REPLACED WITH AN EXTENDED "T-PATCH" TO SUIT. ALL OTHER DISTURBED OR DAMAGED IMPROVEMENTS SHALL BE REPLACED IN KIND. 2. EXIST AC SHALL BE CUT AND REMOVED IN SUCH A MANNER SO AS NOT TO TEAR, BULGE OR DISPLACE ADJACENT PAVEMENT. EDGES SHALL BE CLEAN AND VERTICAL ALL CUTS SHALL BE PARALLEL OR PERPENDICULAR TO STREET CENTERLINE, WHEN PRACTICAL. 3. FINISH COURSE OF AC RESURFACING SHALL BE LAID DOWN USING A SELF PROPELLED SPREADER BOX, UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. 4. SEE LWD STD. DWG. NO. S-11 FOR TYPICAL PIPE BEDDING & TRENCH BACKFILL 5. REFER TO AND COMPLY WITH ALL STANDARDS AS REQUIRED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION WITHIN STREET. CITY STANDARDS SHALL GOVERN ONLY IF REQUIREMENTS ARE IN CONFLICT. LEUCADIA WASTEWATER DISTRICT APPROVED 11/8/06 RCE CA026514 EXP 3/30/08 7TAJ? i/30/DB DRAWN PBR CHKD CHR REV. SLD STANDARD PIPE TRENCH DETAIL IN EXISTING STREETS STD. DWG. NO. S-12 APPENDIX B UTILITY WORK ORDERS FOR ELECTRIC, NATURAL GAS, TELEPHONE SERVICE AND CATV San Diego Gas & Electric 571 Enterprise Street Escondido, CA 92029-1244 A (Jr* Sempra Energy utility" A^T/ PROJ# 541199-010/030 March 14, 2006 City of Carlsbad Terry Smith - 1635 Faraday Avenue Carlsbad CA 92008/ Dear Terry Smith. PROJECT: Carlsbad Fire Station # 6 (5) 7201 Rancho Santa Fe Rd.. Carlsbad The engineering required for SDG&E to provide electric service to your project has been completed. Meter and service location information, and other technical information is enclosed for your use Construction responsibilities are outlined following And, the related costs are attached as the "Cost Summary Sheet". ELECTRIC SERVICE Underground service will be supplied under the provisions of Electric Rule 16. Accordingly, you are responsible for providing a clear path, the trench, backfill, conduit and concrete substructure(s) from transformer #751-1457 to your meter panel (Also, you wiU be responsible for the on-going maintenance of these facilities) We will install and connect the electnc service conductors. ACCESS If you are installing an electrically operated gate for your project, there are several things you need to know First, 24-hour access to the meters is required by the Fire Department and SDG&E. Because of the serious safety issues involved, we carinot set meters until access is guaranteed You should contact the Fire Department to obtain their specific requirements, but our minimum requirements are: 1 A Schlage VTQP Quad Section cylinder in a key switch wired to the gate controller. A list of locksmiths authorized to sell SDG&E approved locks is available on request. 2 A means of opening the gate from the inside without the use of a vehicle to activate the controller This will require the installation of an additional key switch inside the gate if there is no unsecured switch available. / TRENCHING. CONSTRUCTION. INSPECTION After you have been notified by us that your construction order has been issued, you or your contractor must notify our Construction Department by phone, 48 hours prior to having the trench ready Please call 760-432-5805 to arrange a pre-constructton meeting or to discuss any construction-related questions PROJ# 541199-010/030 2 ' March 14, 2006 Inspection of your work by our inspector is required at the: trenching; conduit installation; conduit mandreling; backfilling and compaction; substructure installation; and, completion stages. When calling our Construction Department, the following will identify your project- Project Name Carlsbad Fire Station # 6 Project Order # 541199-010/030 TRENCHING ADVISORIES Prior to trenching/excavating, please contact DigAlert (USA Markout) at least 48 hours in advance at 1-800-227-2600. We will locate and mark-out our facilities. Failure to call may result in serious injuries and/or substantial damage for which you will be responsible. You are responsible for obtaining any other necessary permits and for adhering to all applicable governmental and regulatory statutes, codes, and rules. Finally, before you begin trenching, I strongly suggest you contact the local telephone and cable television companies for their requirements and any charges they may have. CHECKLIST There are, of course, a few other things to be done before the meters actually can be set. I have prepared a checklist for your use. , Q Your work must be completed and accepted, and SDG&E's portion of the work must be completed Q Ensure that the address we have on record and your permit address match. Q Whoever is going to be responsible for the billing needs to call our Customer Contact Center and make application. The Center is open 7-24 and the number is toll free: 1-800-411- SDGE (7343) Q We must receive either permanent or temporary inspection clearances from the City of Carlsbad. COSTS All costs and offers quoted in this letter shall expire at the end of the business day on 6/14/2006. If business negotiations are not completed, or if you request revised costs after that date, an engineering fee may be required. Also, please understand that SDG&E is subject to California Public Utilities Commission decisions -any changes directed by the Commission can affect the quotes. The costs quoted in this letter include a cost component to cover SDG&E's estimated liability for State and Federal Income Tax. Note if you cancel your request, we will retain a portion of your payment to cover SDG&E's expense for processing. The remaining amount, if any, will be refunded to you. PROJ# 541199-010/030 3 March 14, 2006 Project Management offices are unable to accept payments If you wish to proceed, please mail all of the required paperwork associated with the project, the enclosed Customer Payment Remittance, and your check for $1,653.00 to: Customer Payment Services - CP61C San Diego Gas & Electric P.O. Box 129831 San Diego, CA 92112-9831 Once your check is received, your project will be issued. THANK YOU We appreciate your business and hope you are very satisfied with our service. If I may be of further assistance or should you have any questions, please call me or my assistant at the number below. Our normal office hours are 7:00 a.m. to 4.00 p.m., Monday through Friday. For additional general information, please visit our website at http //sdqe com/index htrnl. Sincerely, Maria Higgms Customer Project Planner Telephone: (760) 480-7647 MEH.rbm:jt Enclosures (^Sempra Energyjjiimy- ELECTRIC METER & SERVICE LOCATION U/Q //Tfalfr/ -^^VfnvFBHFAO EreWDERGROUND-SPECS ATTACHED T R "// 7 DJT MEET REQ'D ^HOMM'L D RESIDENTIAL PROJECT NO JOB NO A MORATORIUM EFFECT - AGENCY TYPE CONTACT PHONE »(7l*fr 'hUCTTCCl t /- DATE CRITICAL - PENDING STREET RESURFACING MONTH YEAR TCPREQ'DD ST EXC & PERMITS REQ'D D CUST DSOG&E SERVICE ATTACHMENT POINT AND/ORMETER LOCATION APPI ir.ATinw RFO-nn/f OAl i/'-**ft- t =^NOTE<lNSPEC REQ'D PRIOR TO SE_T^ BtfiTY/COUNTY D STATE GENERAL CUSTOMER INFORMATION Meter Height - 4'0" mm - 6'3" max from finish grade to center line of meter base Meters are required to be readily accessible 24 hours per day Meters must be located in a safe area free of any potentially hazardous or dangerous condition Provide 3 ft X3ft minimum clear and level working space in front of meter Where meter room is proposed, contact the Planner at the nearest SDG&E office Meter bases and meter service disconnects must be located at or immediately adjacent to each other and be identified with address and unit number it serves POLE # LADDER ARMS REQ'D D EXISTING D STOP TRENCH Of D?'//FROM POLE RISER QUAD . OVERHEAD SERVICES PROVIDE MINIMUM GROUND CLEARANCE OF Ft at point of attachment of service wires Ft over dnveway or parking area Ft at outer limit of vehicular traffic Ft UNDERGROUND SERVICE PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLATION 1 Pay all monies due D APPLICABLE D NOT APPLICABLE 2 Phone SDG&E at 3 working days pnor to trenching to arrange with inspector and initiate trenching process 3. PHONE DIG ALERT 1-800-227-2600 AT LEAST TWO DAYS PRIOR TO TRENCH- ING FOR LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILmES 4 Excavate trench, install conduit and service entrance equipment at meter location CALL ABOVE PHONE # FOR INSPECTION Do not cover conduit without inspector's-wntten approval to backfill 5 Call inspector when trerfch is backfilled and compacted for inspection If service entrance equipment is installed after backfill, CALL ABOVE PHONE # FOR INSPECTION OF THE EQUIPMENT 6 Meter will be set after inspector has approved installation, including service equipment, and receipt of city/county/state* inspection clearance ADD! INFORMATION (DetJ c JT TRENCH DGAS DtELCO DCATV SEC HEIGHT CABLE POLE CONDUIT BY D CUSTOMER SIZE. CABLE POLE BEND BY D CUST RADIUS SCH 80 SIZE . HANDHOLE BY D CUSTOMER D SDG&E D STD PAGE » , CONDUIT BY I3CUSTOMER D SDG&E SIZE TRENCH INSPECTED 1 APPROVED BY DATE PAYMENT BY CUST CBL PL S EXCESS S MISC S H~~ WIRE MAIN SWITCH "H^TEST BY PASS FACILITIES REO'D UTILITIES MAXIMUM CONTRIBUTION TO FAULT CURRENT 7 AlAr-iiPHASE H~DC n METERING Infers D SELF-CONTAINED PLANNER /PMA TELEPHONE .AMPS DATE _ .-0 ^ f SDG&E encounters hazardous or toxic material while performing construction ol your roject SDG&E will hall work immediately and it will be your responsibility to remove and/or clean up all hazardous or toxic material prior to SDG&E continuing construction SDG&E shall have no liability or obligation whatsoever to clean up remove ot remediate any hazardous or toxic materials discovered during the course of construction unless it is through negligence of SDG&E Customer-owned faallties to receive electrtcal service are subject to all applicable local and state of California inspection authority requirements Building address and/or meter base must be posted pnor to meter set information on this sheet ts void after 6 months from date Keep this nottce with building permit DISTRIBUTION WHITE ORIGINAL - Customer WHITE COPY - Distncl Operations YELLOW - Planner GOLD - C T Order 107-09212 (3/O4) i ; ? - 4p| §M si IIII is :nl! lili r*r>j i ri!i H 'i O coi rt <N1 1-4 O 1 • rlz i coi DW i H toCD i <: os< i H H i H O O 1 O tJ Mi Oi CO W1 ffl CC! egLU: i Jl£* * EC15G*w i KO;)~~ I PQ w ^ ; " iM"°") t >* O O ! * M Hi O COi Z Ot O O 1 M i Hi S i CO (S1 COis ^1 M (NI fa f*i W t < 0H I CO vo CO ' d OH i « 35 QMO i O 04 Kl Hfa I •• COO 1 W CO JW 1 §WQ is- ta2 i W HRO i co rtz * fa Qrfz i g oiO i 5 QCO M 1 Q (M"5 H i *• rt, in >u O ' W co vot> i 04 o p-OOi ' >• 01OH i H (NOwen i <n co Q O i Q iO ' SJ O§i O (S voO l •• CO t-COD i > i-l 1 Oi S Kii O CMi CO ico i 04 1 HD i o1 • ! § \ > pa i en Q t en #3: i rH CO ' m OSi (-3* i - o i O f~\ vpi pQ p^ ,_{ i ^) oi C3 Da in coi Oi U, U' CK •• £i < CO S iH 1 H COO i Z 63 fa O 1 O rij Oii i r- co Q <O i CO Q JZin i co o < 3 W 1 -3- S MHCN i co U OON i IM Z Si 5! OWm i • oi Z >* OirH 1 Oi 03 covo i Q 2 H QHO i oi O O W Q^. 1 O M M Z «-•«• ' H Oi OrH rH * fc«i rf H M0\ r oi O CO CO p4 CN 1 O O M &}Do i S J Q Q 510 1o 00 ^1o r- X COzM8Ma; ft] H § Ko BU)8 P4 r-^6 vo "^ o 'x» •J° **** 0 ^J2 a [H ac D \1 tv. 1\\ J ^&T&V w\<*i IV 1ft % c-rvz ^ v? %t5*.%v\ M ^^"O•j; *T ^fV §v|V_ >;•• PO B COORDPROVEDO O4 IBS• SOiiiiiiiiiii <#>iii •\illi ^ i M > 0) 1 |,OOi H 1 t I ) l^\ J | Hg 1 UM j 1 1 i UB 1 UM i Oi Hi M 2i QUi (iti j& iii CQ ^1*1 ! m£j; ggi ^ ff*j H-t o i Oii•*. ' hi^ l HH t I 1t Hi pj JP i 03ii i OP r m t , i Oii COMi QPu 1 oS i j_3 ^3 i JQ 1 MOi moi i O 1 r [t] i j i 5 i OW 1 00 li r- ii tn iiiiiii i W0 i H i O i QH 'ii U3 1I t 1 l 1 l 1 1 1r (N t I 1 1 l 1 t VO 1 fSI 1 fO 1tn iiiiiiiiti •• t (Qi i Q 1 >o\ i o r*1 • PI•"• ; gi i ***%.o i O VO I Ex) H 1 H H 1 U > h3i ai S 18t VO 1 CO 11* 1VO I1 1 1 1 1 1 1o r *• i tao i Ho i <CH i Q 1 04 VD 1 S• i Oco i OH 1(M 1 Qvo i W0 ! o M i CO1 t11 m i 11 1 X > i l Ua il ' Hvo i cx V ! H W i CO1 i Q> W <~4 1 £Co i DO i CO j' CO |2 O CJ•* Q Oi MSta04 oooots envoroin oo 0or-l r~ nin oo rovo CO in • M Wb]Q H2)X H Jacw ZOwto£QQ OiO (3 rii Ki CO OTI« ino om oii i r- oin co en o f-t VOvo p- M HS 2 0 Osc a O4 O. X0o ' CCHMQ faOi fa < M £ Qi Cti fi]2 o2? i-^ C52 Z O H o O O >D J hpi W < COz ••OH >^ >4 COUO Z HCd • ZHi-3 O •• -Wz w -ow^is O C9 (C W 04 *£ O ^DDUHEOO rH fMi OH OZo fa Zz ••< Uc< 5« M O ^*ff Q pcaciM EBP -OiOQW W J tf«0 MOi ftOZssaoi OiO fa toOCOOHi HM z M Lt3 c2 O OS04HO oinin t-p- O) Q WJSHCOZ M COb!M HM Mas I STINGX 3OM HP.M CO Qi 04 Oft coy WQ OZtaOi b \ CO <r t \ cw ctfW OP§ 4% [dHi£ WS 2 COmo z0 M BDoiH COz8 Q Wta 04 rtj P-4 u Soi COo g Oi 04 1: CuSI ^4HHiJ}HOa o M 1U u HOP» H COro1*1 it i fa i W vo £.* 1 MOt H M i H<COHCO WKM MOifaMfaDO KMWOC0>CO SoC3D COCOOD oo cs moo en enen en i-IHtH rH in in vo vo>HrH ID tn O OooHin §COIco in £-•-con O Jfti rt,OOJO CQOJ = Q co. OB:cj wCb OH W IN O CO p >4 ft. Q in E wMS5 MOE cs DSO* U -C4M </> < p ;s s to w u 01co gM cucacoco 5 S w w S D < o Ul(0 0. O£o 3 Q£ UJ O O*V31-13oeu 0 1•UJ_i:zUJO HH ^"t L^|M| ^™ <UOyj ^j *<X.o>0oCD I^*U Q£ iH4 <£(a£ Z3 to r—1-4Z3 1 CO(O CLa fOoo1oinUio* UJ **4 1 ,30tox'r«..-i ox Q_fOQO CO3I— t-(O SO z Ol-i t-(O 111UJcm ftHIu. £Jr CO j Of ^o UJ <cz a3' •• Ul Q. ^M 1- o » ^UJ IV* ««la »* CQ O*"^ *j\ O^ r^ r-H NTin •. h- LU™^ OOfa. at*^toeo CSJ IV* UJO o s^a:o•* (MtnJjP^ro CO UJz:o a. </) Ulx^ u> «tz4 1-4a >- A aUJz M Ula o „ ^wU C£ (w> (/) J-t A 1 STANDARD |j PAGE |-JO. 1— U) ^soTO£ tfiOUIsec £ >a fr™ Oforo* zo H4r-o_MccU UJa ^Mv^w , at-H 3 a»H 3£ «••«•• <2 0 M t- ^UoJ i-4 CM i-l to to o or- f«. r»- \r10 to to i--ro to ro a U U U U i | U U U U I «^»i^— ^MB^™^^^^^™1- *t r- r-U. UI LU U. M tn M cuOl CW I 'B VXh* in inho ^ ^3" ^MBiMtiMiB<BiBM^B«wM«i >-i 0£ IV IIIa. £0a r-Z </>Ul 3co u Q£ 1X»- o a M U. Z Z OH Ul <t0- in a: to CM 1—t- xM a o: r-3 Ul 1-4a in z: 3Ez • oO CM r- XU CM IO O3 Zon 0 o uia a a:> t-Z Z O£ M »H tf Ul£ a i i or x1-4 IH a. </> a. to a. ui a. i itf sr o ias BO x aa a a: xi-l i-l H- (/) Z Z Z Z1 1 1 1 •••t^M^^v^flM— >^^^^^ CM OO r-t CM M CM in in o toCM M fl t*.•or sr in roto ro <cr ro 0 0 0 0 0 ^— ^^^^^™*^™™»"!«nt« U O O O O Ul UJ 111 Ul Ul r~. a:UJs: ocoe uj0 -•> £u. a. oW < |-z u M <o< x a: 3oe <o a. ofli 1- ZUJ < a >Z Ul Oi Z OSas «/> »— uio < v* « au. x zen a. to a: ujz i a ea< to o zo£ v/ D£ HI a1- X Za 3 >o oUJ < IO Uto a. tu< of a >z in M ceO. N 3T 0 Ul1 XT O (Oro ro aa: « soin a. CD a a(M Ul-a- a: x z z10 a. u HI *-4za a ui «a- to< < CC 1 l O- Q. 1— r-i I-H IO On Q£ DQ Mi ro i t (o CM in i ca ro•a- (M O a iro x r- 1-4 1-1 z z z z zH 1 1 1 1 1 rooo h ^_.^^ h— ^.^^ ^^— ,^^ az3OUL. (Oh-1-4Z3 ZOl-it/1Ula oz• «— • • ^™* vroo oz ill(D 0. ^ • h- _l _l U< H4K-I Of Oft-LU Ol-LU< UJ f*\ 1 1 1fat UJzca4 OCo M*el /J^VYJ<J yoo kin H- £•— • Sh-oozz 4 O00 O t totoo.ffl rooo1o$¥"t',\f) C~.f *JJ 0 •^^o ••£ mUJrHoeiBS0 0 X -*•-to OXfl_ f/Jno 00 X. 3 CO»- 3< 0 t- 0£to x t— vtzo tH f~ ce u UJ 0 z UJuso««a» L_^^ ^»toZ 0 0 OI-l»- t— CMtO CM COui in Of 1 I-l CMu. ro•a- BO UJCO Z-J O Of X< Q_U *« Ul •E z o3 CMinLU co soa. a r- > O 1 km <\J *"^^™ VNI *•*^hi CO ^"oo < ••«ll 1UJ•• to z> _l 0uj a: xa: < a.U i-He «• GO O Q ~» >^j OQ O* QO^ 41i-< 09 »-i tO\3" ^in a: ^•• oi—O s* UJ i-l-» oo in oo fy» IIIa. *• £to <toUJ U.O O£ !"- CJ <CO O Z •if t-l«r*,!•—CM o" Z >a: 03UJ 0 1- CJa: o u0 M Za: (D^ t- i-ias to coO M Ul3 a o •• Ui UJX ft: 0i-<o3 CJ ^.« Q UJ Ij<£ ^K00z az <v Ul£ l~to U ^Ba QUla >0aea. LU o K — 1 ^MaeLU K £ H"M O Ula:u ^~" aUJ3 (/) H4 •>«^«y 3 5™ Dh-LU I-IO£ Z 34 oy 3UJOO£ ^Z ou0 l-(-u<cOl- """"" 22oIwf ^_ 0. HIceutoUla Ctf Ulay3 Z \4/ Uo h- —(-<«« <tou.uiui_i CM IO ooo N OSSO i-4 oeaeCM OsSO CM SO ""<•— 4LUUI CO |H OO 0ooCM OsNO Ooo CM OsSOtorowio • ^™* Ulz ^^ UlzUlz a_i UJ UJ221 Z3K<ae 1-a. £ UJX 1-0-£ LUXLUUI O Ul O LU — — MH.h-U. CMin ^ ooooCM Os SOro ua x zaI-CDzUJ_l h-u. o CM zI-l «er ooi-i 0Qa H 3azo Ul o r-l<r»-< OM s*-i in CM>3-ro C£xi £orou.toz<cae.\- ULJ IO<t E1_ I»1 a«a. a Ssf5SI Ol HI a:ua. 0. 0u t-u. CO X z IH coXin ao 0£ Q Z3 BUA M•». 3O 3 t-u.o(/) aet- 00 r-i CM4tt oe LU0_ Q. O CJ UlX. CO LUaeMX <o«4 »•v— 1CM in so co 00 1 azUlCO oc a in• CMCM O iH Aa z IH sy SOCMCO iHCM az Ulee> ry Z IH soro a o OS ^O !H Ma z M sT CM DOD N Nroro — _. xU LUCCt- oc LU £O 1—to3 U ^» fv ^£ oeo. CM O 0CMX — — oz LUO a. ir ^* BLOu uae 1-4 UiOSX ^H» OOHLUCO -13LUU O IZ ^ Q£ 1 Ul <J Oj£O O 1 CD OLUM fr~4 H*ao3zee ^ H*COCOzou , CO</la.a r-4eoio,m £O hOX, - LUinOCi-lI C£N0po (Muf GJ OS. CLIOao *•• •• CO=3 r- ^I-w *zo IHt- t- LUat 1-4 U. o ^m .ja: U » LU ^Z a =3 »• LUa_ ^1- o•* 5>LUce pH O«»eno ON •-< !jin •• uLU•^ Od£a. o1%.eo 00 eoCM •• Of LUaato aco 3 ouCM 1-4 r-4 •• COcc LUX1- O£A CO< OX1- 0u •• I- u •• CO COLU0£ao ^ oOf LUU. ^t-z ^CO o Xuz Of zo 1-4 1— Uo *•ceLU1— UJU f_ CO u CMCM00ini CM10•a- LUzoXOL 00ooCM Ov C3 ^A(/) wJ C£ ^U O _l a COCO O£<i^o 2oin •• COCO LUoeaa <£ O ••1—0t-lOf L^^"COna «. a LU ^CO CO t-4 LUK- a CMin *Ar-iooo^« » LUZOX0- toLUS U. ^z<f 1-4 O •*. ^HA aLUZo COLU Ooo\f •• LUZ0X0- cozhHCD r-4X LU 2on «^^r » o;CD 3C 1—ULU Oot0_ r-•*• \O1^ I O 00sy .. LU ZO X 0. CO 2E M OO MX UJ ^1-^Q£ ^z »aa:ooU AO 10o*-r-10•o ••ecoi-0 u. a Of ^^_j LU ^^ ^Of1- CM i-l » LU P ao: J; in o COoe3OX ^LU ^Ot(- J^.«J 3I LUZo oz LU CD 0. ^t •w ^»0.ou 1-iUJccE(-0 Ol-LUtO-1=3LUO a t 3— fli I~"(/> a<ro:CD O •3Z rjjj|_i i-th- 3za: tocozou 1 COc/)a.a -« o1o\tn ?i>U,4iv co O Kiy •• LUin IXf-t> ^K vOEo•Sx pH Oox Q.K)ao •• oo3t- IILI"™ vO W zo HI ^1- CO LU M U. a en CO^jac u •• LU ^<cz a=> •• LU0. fewr™* o.^ LU r-f O•• COo— 3 c?* 0*r-l^1 ^fin i—0LU OO£ 0. Of%. 00CO1& COCM M OfLUa CKo *»xaeo3: 0 1— 1oo yr O t-4 <cuo_J (Min •0 ioco .* LUZO X0. COuz: u. z< ^Ha ^0Q aUJzo (/)LUQ oz ••1-0 H-1o: to Ma I-H O f,.. UJ LU X CO 1-4 Oo • •zo M 1- o O I_J t a .^•p— Q_0_<c (-00 CO h-t «M-«-w o Q£UJaoz<1— O. CO 1 H" ^5O Uo - - 1- — -II- t-O- £O£ ^OL&c c/)IjX Q£^_^^ H-^ *t cy - —^=> >a or a: •••Wl COUJI—o o o 1— zooXzo t—4I—a.i— iona UJa .at uoi-_f2. at-H ^ ^ ai— i 3 £ |MW 1•+s O Of 1 3EU. — i — • M • • •MM • V— • • «H- • — • •«• Zo 1-4t- oo •ml CO )m| X1- Q£ OU. CO1-I-Hz3 Z(Dl^ CO UJa 0z • Mmuf 1— •• _» — — azjpoa. CO COLU LU1- 1- 0 0Z Z z zo oM l-l1- t-o o ftf ^t- l- CO COz zo oo u zo 1- uo_J o o t- 3 UJz o Ji 0000I- in CO rH X •-•LU a u LUa ULU<a LUO U *jt O KZoa 3CU. LU <a A a uLU LUrsi x 1-4 UCDon -iiu <t OK LU LU M aUJ UJ oo —I LU <C t-i-l <H- a So. I I aLU Q- ou I I aa -i aO LU .<fi*t >_ g ^'^ UJ O LU UX LUco oi oO coi CO 1 O 1 •- Z 1 3 Ul 1 1- O I < < » H-O. 1 CO1t ^1^ 1 ^^k i^^H t ^^f It tl I , l lll I l 1 NO1 * l Z1 O 1 M 1 <1 H- 1 CO1 1 Ul1 OC1 M 1 U.1 >• 1 §a. i «O t l/\1 V* O l -1 OOC 1 < MUI 1 O £n ' OH- 1 UlUICO 1 £-JO 1 < UIO 1 Z1a i iZ l<oe i a •^•^co a * <Q£ 1 ••^ OO 1 Ul^ l 0-^•oz i >^VCDO l »- ^^ UI*-4 1Ml— '1ao i3 iZO£ l 0 <tt- 1 ••C0«0 1 >Z 1 Ulo i onO l i ii CO 1 rHCO 1 OO. 1 ••a i « 1 Oi ->iii 1 ON1 ON1 ft 1 f-4 1 \Ti tnii •• 1 H- | ^\1 Ul1 -> 1 O1 OC 1 0.1 O 1 0 1 01 1 f-. , 0 1 COrf?4«*n i eo "rinftfJLJ 1 NT*5«>-*-eo i eooro i CMy •» iuim i •• QirH 1 Of 1 1 UlKso i ao i oc *». 1 0 M 1 OX 1 OCo-ro i o ffS » 1 "» l O eo Zo 1-4 H- ^Oo «Mj CM NO PS.1ooo•a- •• Ul oXa. V)Ulx: u. ^z ^l-la ••^.ea aUlzo C/) Ula oz •• t« U 1-4oct- trt a r-t O t_ UlUlX CO (M OO ••zoM r- UO1 a iii O. 1 Q. 1 < 1 (-« 1 CO 1Z IM 1i <$• — «— 1a i M CKUI 1 •OCD i ro Z< 1 (^H-O. i roco i ro 1 O t- 1 0 Z 1 03 i e O 1 CMO i •O ) ON < I NOi ro HO. 1«/) i OXCK 1 XiOL 1IV ^ | {J 30£ 1 1 r-> iOH- I^ O* l1 Z 1 H-H- 3 l U.U. 1 CSICM^ a i r^-i^t—ar i roro O-O£ 1J iiiiiiii CO 1 Ul l H- l X 0 1 H-Z 1 O l Z Z l UlO l -l i— l 1 H* 1 H-O l U.a i OC 1 0 H- 1 CMCO 1Z 1 MZO 1 OEMO I O- X 1 N± Z 1 t-O 1 MO M 1 30 H- 1 ar-4a. i zM i ona; i oaO l(O 1 CPt-ui i aMa i 3i za 1 MZ1 O i ii Mii 4. <t 1 0SK» i r-iO l 1-O 1 ONH- 1 NTCO 1 (M 1 O.a i i l-l 1 Nj- 1 A3 i a < 1 -H ia i 1-4 11 3 1Z 1 H* 1 CO1 l 1 ttO I Z0£ l 1 1 3U. 1 M 1 1 — •— CM*roi^»roro ooo 0*fSlC •5 ON I NO)rot. C O ••• mmmm <r<LUL 00 C H4 Q£ 0_ azLUCeaauoca t-au.cinCMU or. CNin• c(Me CMi- coaac Z2 MH Nj-Nj11— 1 N<tv CG IHc\ M CO 0. NJ-COa rH ^— •—— — •CO1z1 1-4 — • t-4 Or-.to IO ooo- oL CM LJ ON C *^u ro J 0 o |._LT..--_ !.._..... I H-H-U U.U. 0 CMCMmmsr NT a• J Za ozz£ OUIzo:3 UIH-OC•\ t-oc UlJ OCXJ UIO > oco 1 t/) I^J — ^» o> 1 0£ : acz:4 <M£ Q£ • MO_OCa. tM ooCMX a.ioXocH- — IW«^^M-CO1z1 M -M— too NTr**a oooe<M• ON NOro o -»__ l_ u. CMin NT ocUls:0Hco o 1 az CO x r- M 3 Z OZ UloeH- Ula x Qiiaz CO mi CO1z1 1-4 az ou. lit 111I*U UU H- H-O O Z Z z z0 0 M M H- H-0 0 3 3ex ceH- H- CO CO o oo o zoIH H-<t O oz o t— 2f Ul CD H- ^.COM ax z Ul 3O U. COCD H- > l-t_J O M<o oUl <a u. ozout U.Oo «*£ OOfZO3 3CIL. UlH- a O OUl UlISJ XM OOOC -IUl «X Z HI Ul Q£Ul M 5 ui-j 0- oo —I Ul «X (- M «£H- aoc I I auiH-ui oO I I >oa O UlaH- acui oUl OZ Ul(O OC CM -iO MO =3«O I O CO-I < 0z UJ *c0. kif Ok. o OOf MUIOf Z OH- iJ.f (/> llinj 23 WO Q I 3E UJ25*^> CH <t (^ook f CD OUl I— I MHao=>zoe4H X Oo 1 I/I</) CLa o 0 1 O'inC'jj J.HCO Z "uiin QC i— 11 k—i O P°FS-i-4 MO OX O-fO».es " ~f H «^ ^w{/) NO *Zo M Ij H M Ul OfM U. eatnV* OH 4?u UJ•C •5z a23 •• Ul Q.>• H O••2* Uloc 1-4o oao~> ON ON l-l M NTin •A H Ul -J O Of Q. 0t^ 00oosT 00ON! atUla o •^a:o•x O oo zo M ^—4 O CM \fl NO f*ta 1 Oco » Ui oza. coUlz u. ^z4Ma » ^ea a Ulzoi-i COUla oz »• HO Of H a M O H-Ul Ulz CO fOox o ••z l-l H4OO1 a ii a. ta. i4 i Hoa i</) i Z 1 M 1 1a i MOfUl 1 •ao i inZ4 I CMHO. i NTco i ro 1 O H 1 0 Z 1 0£> I OO 1 (MO 1 • O 1 ON4 I NOi to HO. 1 ~~4CO 1 Ozee i oft/i i o30! 1 1 H ^~ IOH I401 Z 1 443 t UIUI 1 1-4 M^ a it-O 1oaf iiiiiii iii CO tUl 1H 10 1Z IIz i inO 1 N H 1 UltO 0 ' £=) i oeatat i oui H I U-Zco i cootZ 1 ZO0 1 4U.O I OftO V 1 HZZ 1 40 1 UIO£M 1 COHH 1 40. 1 XUI M I 0_</>Of 1 1 40 I (OX CO 1 O.uj i in ia i MMi \^i tooi 4i ao.i 4I 0.ii *t= 1 CONJ£ 1 ONO 1 ON O 1 K) H 1 Mco i in • roa i iM i m 1 PN| 3 1 NT4 I 10 Ia i M 1 1 => 1 Z i1 1^—^— ^ ^H^H*H I COI i I^f O i ZOf 1 1 I3U. I M CM• inN NT K> O OooCM ON NOfO O 4Ul ,_, ^o:Ul oeou. z4 ^ Ul CO4XO.1to a4o. inCM to 0. Uloe.0- a40. 0. iin fNlX.^••^B* </) |z l-l CM• O r-4in NT OoooCM ON ^K) OO O 44BBUJLU-J i-l CM NO Za 3^^j 4UlOf^N 3 aa. a:4UIHoo-u.XOL.OCO O COZO4 oe.oe. t~ HHU.CO CO 1*^CO 1OX CM0 4*> "X ^-*] Q^ 3 UlCOO.UIXO.aeino M O3 aOUIcaccoeoe. 4oaeazZ3U1OOK21 Cki ^HUIO3oe.H CM NOr*» MocarocM OMNO co Q£ I }—1CDH CO1Z1*-• CM•to 1**toto ooo OHCMQ.• y ONUIM) Xtout o 0 44UIUI MM MaOf ZO-UIeaaZQ£Uleaz M Of NOzto1— f a NOtooOSaooo ON i— 1 oaoaaa zz MM NT NT1 1-4 CMcooCMCMto mi NTeaai-i i </•>izi1 i-i ooo 0,CM ON NOto O 4Ul r-4 oeUlyo CO3o ^ea ozUlea azoo ^Of Ul 03a z toi>—i - oa COc i 1-4 ~l/> 1 Z 1-4 az=>ou. W ll 1UJ O Oz z z z0 0 1-4 1-4 b~ l_ 0 0=> 3Of Of H H ^f *JF 0 0O O zol-l H4OO_> o CD r-4 coin H MSJ- NOf-4CO 1 3 ONMui Minz ear— CO4H ^.CO MXUl OfUl oe,ou.x UlCO4O Zco ao.Ul 4a o-to Oui aof4a O.HU.Oo N^ Oocz O.O HI H4 3U. LU 4a 00 ouiauiNlM Oooe -iui 4 oeuiui f f oui ui o O _l Ul 4 >-l-l 4t-a:4a. I I ui a. oo I I i-i ao uiai- onui oUJ OX Ulto eg If) oai SCOPE: THIS STANDARD SHOWS TYPICAL PLACEMENT OF UTILITIES WITHIN TRENCHES FOR DISTRIBUTION AND SERVICE IN DEDICATED R/W (STREET) AND PRIVATE PROPERTY. AND PROVIDES THE MINIMUM DEPTH AND CLEARANCE THAT MUST BE MAINTAINED BETWEEN VARIOUS UTILITIES OCCUPYING THE SAME TRENCH IN SAN DIEGO COUNTY. PROPERTY SIDE i\ (SEE STANDARD 3376 FORJ OTHER CONDUIT/TRENCH CONFIGURATIONS) PROPERTY SIDE 2" S. SL, L (por T PROPERTY SIDE PROPERTY SIDE 3" GAS NOTES: SERVICE TRENCH ON CD PRIVATE PROPERTY FIG 8 ONPUBLIC PROPERTY LEGEND GM GS P S ES ME SL L U T GAS MAIN GAS SERVICE PRIMARY ELECTRIC SECONDARY ELECTRIC ELECTRIC SERVICE MULTIPLE ELECTRIC (P OR S OR ES OR T. STACKED CONFIGURATION INCLUDING SPACERS AND 1-SACK CONCRETE SLURRY) SDG&E STREET UGHT FOREIGN UT1UTY STREET UGHT FOREIGN UTILITY (TELCO, CATV) SDG&E TELECOMMUNICATIONS - DRAWINGS ARE NOT TO SCALE. - SPACE ALLOTMENTS (OTHER THAN FOREIGN UTILITY) ARE 1/2 INCH LARGER THAN THE NOMINAL SIZE OF GAS MAIN, GAS SERVICE OR ELECTRIC CONDUIT. SEE INSTALLATION NOTE ® FOR FOREIGN UTILITY SPACE ALLOTMENT. - TYPICAL TRENCH SECTIONS ARE DESIGNED FOR INSTALLATIONS WHERE EACH OCCUPANT IS UTILIZING HIS ENTIRE SPACE ALLOTMENT. SIZE OF SPACE ALLOTMENTS MAY BE REDUCED OR ADDITIONAL ALLOTMENTS MAY BE ADDED PROVIDING MINIMUM COVER AND CLEARANCES ARE MAINTAINED AS LISTED ON PAGE 3370.2. ONLY ONE FOREIGN UTILITY SPACE ALLOTMENT FOR TELCO AND/OR CATV IS ALLOWED PER TRENCH. WIDTH AND DEPTH OF THE _TRENCH MUST BE ADJUSTED ACCORDING TO SPACE ALLOTMENTS, MINIMUM CLEARANCES AND MINIMUM COVER. - GAS PIPE REQUIRES A MINIMUM OF 12 INCHES RADIAL SEPARATION FROM ALL UTILITIES. | ©1998- 2005 San Diego Gas i Electnc Company. AJ) rights reserved. Removal of this copyright notice without permission \a not permitted under law | SERVICE GUIDE 3370.1 | Indicates Latest Revision ) | Completely Revised |New Page j Information Removed SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION (UD) TRENCHES AND UTILITY POSITIONING - S.D. COUNTY (MS SIP 74031 REVISION DATE 1-1-98 APPDjftr/CrtL« THE FOLLOWING CHARTS SHOW THE MINIMUM COVER FOR EACH UTILITY. THE MINIMUM SEPARATION BETWEEN SPACE ALLOTMENTS AND THE MAXIMUM SIZE FOR EACH SPACE ALLOTMENT. TO READ THE CHARTS, READ ACROSS AND DOWN UNTIL THE TWO JOIN IN A SQUARE. AND THAT IS THE DISTANCE REQUIRED BETWEEN THE TWO UTILITIES. EXAMPLE ES ELECTRIC SERVICE VERTICAL __ ES I (C) HORIZONTAL GS 12" UNDER VERTICAL. "ES" & "ES" JOIN AT ©WHICH REFERS .TO INSTALLATION NOTE ©. UNDER HORIZONTAL. "ES" & "GS" JOIN AT 12 INCHES WHICH WOULD BE THE DISTANCE REQUIRED FROM THE OUTER EDGE OF THE ELECTRIC SERVICE (SPACE ALLOTMENT) TO THE OUTER EDGE OF GAS SERVICE (SPACE ALLOTMENT). MAIN TRENCH, [SERVICE TRENCH PUBLIC PROPERTY] (MINIMUM SEPARATION FROM) GM GS P S ES SL ME L U T GAS MAIN (C GAS SERVICE (0$8$ PRIMARY ELECTRIC®® SECONDARY ELECT rue®® ELECTRIC SERVICE®® SDC4E S7REETUGHT®® MULTIPLE ELECTRIC FOREIGN UTILITY STREET LIGHT ©©© FOREIGN UTILITY ©®@ (TELCO, CATV) ©© SDG&E ©© TELECOMMUNICATIONS VERTICAL GM GS - 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" © 12" P 12" ' © © © © - 12" © S 12' © © © © © - 12" © ES 12" © © © © © - 12" © SL 12" © © © © © - 12" © ME 12" © © © © © 12" 12" © L 12" - - - - 12" - 12" - U <B> 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" - 12" HORIZONTAL GM GS - - - - - - - © - P - © © © © © 12" - © S - © © © © © 12" 12" © ES - © © © © 12" 12" © SL - © © © © © 12" 2" © ME - © © © © © - - © L - 12" 12" 12" 12" - Tor less 12" 12" U (H) - 12" 12" 12" - 12" - 12" *MIN. COVER 30" MIN 42" MAX 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 24" 24" 30" * ALL MINIMUM COVER DEPTHS MEASURED FROM FINAL GRADE. REDUCED DEPTHS IN NOTE ® DEPTHS THAN WHAT IS SHOWN UNDER "MINIMUM COVER". — FACILITY SPACE ALLOTMENT (UAX) 4-/2"x4-1/2" 5-1/2"x5-1/2" 5-1/2"x5-1/2" 5-/2"x5-1/2" 2-1/2"x2-1/2" 18" x 14" (4 DUCTS) 2-1/2"x2-1/2" 9" x 24" 4-1/2"x4-1/2* > ARE LESSER NOT ALLOWED. SERVICE TRENCH PRIVATE PROPERTY (MINIMUM SEPARATION FROM) GS ES ME U L GAS SERVICE ©0©©®®©© ELECTRIC SERVICE ®©@©©© MULTIPLE ELECTRIC (gXD© FOREIGN UTILITY rfTvt/YrVuYT^TELCO. CATV Vi*XMMlM> FOREIGN UnifTY STREET LIGHT @®©®1 VERTICAL GS - 12" 2" - 2" ES 12" © © 12" 12" ME 12" © © 6" 12" U - 12" 12" - 12" L 12" 12" 12" 12" - HORIZONTAL GS - 12" - 12" 12" ES 12" © © 12" 12" ME - © © - - U 12" 12" - - 12" L 12" 12" •MIN. COVER 24" MIN , 42" MAX 2 FACILITY SPACE ALLOTMENT (MAX) -1/2" x 2-1/2" 24" 5-1/2" x 5-1/2" _.. WILL VARY DUE TO24 BOARD AMPACITY 12" Torless 18"9" x 9" 18" 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" © 1998 - ZOOS San Diego Gas & Electric Company. AH rights reserved. Removal of this copyright notice without permission is not permitted under law. ] GAS STO. 74032 REVISION DATE APPDj^ 1-1-96 " ] Indicate* Latest Revision | Completely Revised 'Jew Page tnformotlon Removed SOMCE GUIDE SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION (UD) TRENCHES AND UTILITY POSITIONING - S.D. COUNTY 3370.2 INSTALLATION: A. AN EFFORT SHOULD BE MADE TO KEEP THE TRENCH DEPTH LESS THAN 60 INCHES. IF A PERSON IS REQUIRED TO ENTER A TRENCH 60 INCHES OR DEEPER, IT SHALL BE SHORED, BENCHED, OR SLOPED TO PREVENT MOVEMENT OF EARTH THAT MAY ENDANGER LIFE OR PROPERTY. THE TRENCH CONFIGURATION, UTILITY POSITIONING AND ALL OTHER RELATED CONSTRUCTION MUST CONFORM TO THIS STANDARD AND THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA PUBLIC UTILITIES COMMISSION GENERAL ORDERS 128 AND 1120, AND ANY OTHER APPROPRIATE GOVERNMENTAL AGENCY HAVING JURISDICTION OVER CONSTRUCTION. NOTE- BENCHING THE TRENCH IS FOR SAFETY REASONS ONLY AND NOT TO BE USED FOR INSTALLATION PURPOSES. (?) THE TRENCH DEPTH IN THIS STANDARD SHALL BE FOLLOWED FOR ALL NORMAL INSTALLATIONS. IN INSTALLATIONS WHERE THE TRENCH DEPTH CANNOT BE MET, GO. 128 REQUIRES ONE OF THE FOLLOWING: (1) STEEL, OR (2) SCHEDULE 40 PVC OR SCHEDULE 80 PVC CONDUIT WITH A MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS OF 0.15 INCHES, OR (3) A 3 INCH LAYER OF CONCRETE (2 SACK 3/8" ROCK) ABOVE AND 2 INCHES ON EACH SIDE OF THE CONDUIT. REDUCED DEPTHS MUST BE APPROVED BY BOTH THE CUSTOMER PROJECT PLANNER AND SDG&E INSPECTOR. (c) ANY CONDUIT COMBINATION SMALLER THAN 5 INCH. (NOT MULTIPLE ELECTRIC-ME OR SERVICE CONDUITS) ARE ^ PERMITTED WTTHOUT SEPARATION WHEN INSTALLED IN A HORIZONTAL CONFIGURATION. SDG&E TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACE ALLOTMENT IS PERMITTED NEXT TO THE ELECTRIC SPACE ALLOTMENTS WITHOUT SEPARATION. (6 INCH MINIMUM TRENCH WIDTH, 24 INCH MAXIMUM TRENCH WIDTH) (SEE STANDARD 3376 FOR CONDUIT/TRENCH CONFIGURATION). (F) BASE AND SHADING MATERIAL FOR GAS TRENCH ONLY: ^ IMPORTED MATERIAL CONSISTING OF NATURAL SAND OR MANUFACTURED SAND, EXISTING NATIVE MATERIAL. OR COMBINATIONS MAY BE USED FOR BASE AND SHADING MATERIAL PROVIDED IT COMPLIES WITH GAS STANDARD G7405 AND IS OF A QUALITY THAT WILL COMPLY WITH COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS OF GOVERNMENTAL AGENCIES. STANDARD G7405 SPECIFIES THAT THE MATERIAL MUST HAVE A MIXTURE OF PARTICLE SIZES ALL SMALLER THAN 1/2 INCHES. EXISTING NATIVE MATERIAL AND IMPORTED MATERIAL PROVIDED BY A DEVELOPER DOES NOT HAW TO BE TESTED BY AN INDEPENDENT PROFESSIONAL TESTING RRM IF, IN THE OPINION OF THE INSPECTOR, fT MEETS THE G7405 SPECIFICATION. SHADING MATERIAL FOR ELECTRIC TRENCH ONLY: ELECTRIC SHADING MATERIAL (ESM) SPECIFICATION. ACCEPTABLE MATERIAL FOR (08) DIRECT BURIED CONDUITS. NATURAL SAND, MANUFACTURED SAND, DECOMPOSED GRANITE. ROCK FREE SANDY LOAM, EXISTING NATIVE MATERIAL OR COMBINATION THEREOF. AGGREGATE COMPOSITION SHALL BE CAPABLE OF PASSING THROUGH A 1/2 INCH SIEVE. GRAVELS SHALL NOT AMOUNT TO MORE THAN 50JJ OF THE MIXTURE. SCREENING OR OTHER SUITABLE MEANS MAY BE REQUIRED AT THE DISCRETION OF THE SDG&E INSPECTOR TO MEET THIS (ESM) SHADING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION. NOT ACCEPTABLE ARE SOILS OF HIGHLY ORGANIC CONTENT IDENTIFIED BY ODOR OR SPONGY FEEL AND HIGHLY PLASTIC (SOGGY) CLAYS. SILTS OR METALLIC SLAG. BASE AND SHADING MATERIAL FOR JOINT GAS ANp ELECTRIC TRENCH: WHEN BOTH GAS AND ELECTRIC ARE INSTALLED IN THE SAME TRENCH, THE BASE AND SHADING MATERIAL WHICH COMPLIES WITH GAS STANDARD G7405 SHALL BE USED FOR THE GAS PIPE. ELECTRIC SHADING MATERIAL (ESM) MAY BE USED FOR SHADING MATERIAL ON ELECTRIC CONDUIT. BACKFILL MATERIAL FOR GAS AND/OR ELECTRIC: THE MATERIAL USED FOR BACKFILLING THE TRENCH ABOVE THE SHADING MATERIAL AND EXTENDING UPWARD TO THE SUBGRADE SHALL BE FREE OF ROCKS OR CLODS LARGER THAN 6 INCHES IN ANY DIMENSION. THE COARSE MATERIAL SHALL BE WELL DISTRIBUTED THROUGHOUT THE FINER MATERIAL THE AMOUNT OF ROCKS OR CLODS SHALL BE LIMITED. IN THE OPINION OF THE INSPECTOR. TO ALLOW FOR BAR TESTING FOR GAS LEAKS. THE BACKFILL MATERIAL SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF ALL APPLICABLE CODES, ORDINANCES AND SDG&E STANDARDS AND BE FREE OF DEBRIS AND ORGANIC MATTER. 1-SACK CONCRETE SLURRY MIX MAY BE USED FOR FOR BACKFILL MATERIAL IF THE PIPE GAS IS SHADED WITH A MINIMUM OF 4 INCHES OF COMPACTED SHADING MATERIAL 1-SACK CONCRETE SLURRY MIX IS PREFERRED FOR BACKFILL THE SLURRY INSTALLATION SHALL MEET MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF GOVERNMENTAL AGENCIES AND SDGiE STANDARDS. BASE INSTALLATION FOR GAS: FOR GAS, 3 INCHES OF BASE MATERIAL IS REQUIRED ON THE BOTTOM OF THE TRENCH TO PREVENT DAMAGE FROM ROCKS, SAGS, OR POCKETS. EARTH TRENCH BOTTOM INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRIC: fE8 & DB CQNDUIT) THE 1 INCH EARTH TRENCH BOTTOM SHALL BE STABLE WITH A UNIFORM GRADE CONTAINING NO HARD CLODS, ROCKS, ETC. THAT MAY DAMAGE THE CONDUIT. IF, IN THE OPINION OF THE SDG&E INSPECTOR, THE CONDUIT MAY BE DAMAGED, TAMPING. WETTING OR A 3 INCH BASE ELECTRIC SHADING MATERIAL (ESM) MAY BE REQUIRED. SHADING INSTALLATION: A MINIMUM COVER OF 4 INCHES OF COMPACTED SHADING MATERIAL (4 INCHES AFTER COMPACTION) SHALL BE REQUIRED ABOVE THE GAS PIPE AND ELECTRIC CONDUIT A MINIMUM COVER OF 12 INCHES OF COMPACTED SHADING MATERIAL WILL BE REQUIRED IF, IN THE OPINION OF THE INSPECTOR. THERE IS AN EXCESSIVE AMOUNT OF ROCK AND CLODS IN THE BACKFILL THE SHADING MATERIAL MUST BE INSTALLED AND COMPACTED AT EACH LEVEL BEFORE INSTALLING THE NEXT UTILITY. THE SHADING MATERIAL MUST BE INSTALLED BEFORE THE TRENCH IS BACKFILLED TO PREVENT DAMAGE FROM ROCKS. CLODS, ETC. GAS PIPE SHALL NEVER BE CONCRETE OR SLURRY ENCASED. AND SHALL HAVE THE PROPER BASE, SHADING. BACKFILL AND COMPACTION. j © 1996 - 2005 San Diego Gas & Electric Company. M rights reserved. Removal of this copynghl notice without permission is not permitted under law. | | Indlcotea Lot eat Ravislon | | Completely Revisad | | N«w Page [ [ Information Removed | §7403^SERVICE GUIDE SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS REVISION 3370.3 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION (UD) TRENCHES AND UTILITY POSITIONING - S.D. COUNTY DATE 3-1-02 COMPACTION: EXTREME CARE SHALL BE TAKEN TO ENSURE THAT SHADING MATERIAL IS ADEQUATELY COMPACTED BOTH UNDERNEATH AND AROUND GAS PIPE AND FITTINGS TO PREVENT EXCESSIVE STRESS AND SHEARING FORCES. HAND TEMP AROUND FITTINGS WHERE MECHANICAL COMPACTION CANNOT BE USED. COMPACTING WITH A HYDRAHAMMER OR SIMILAR EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED ON TRENCHES WHERE POLYETHYLENE PIPE HAS BEEN INSTALLED. WHEN THE SHEEP S FOOT METHOD OF COMPACTION IS USED. A MINIMUM OF 18" OF COVER IS REQUIRED BEFORE COMPACTING. WHEEL ROLLING WITH A HEAVY VEHICLE, COMBINED WITH ADEQUATE MECHANICAL COMPACTION, IF NEEDED. IS ALLOWED FOR COMPACTING BACKFILL MATERIAL PROVIDED A MINIMUM OF 4 INCHES OF MECHANICALLY COMPACTED SHADE MATERIAL AND A MINIMUM OF 12" OF BACKFILL MATERIAL EXISTS OVER THE GAS PIPE OR ELECTRICAL CONDUIT. WHEN FLOODING OF THE TRENCH IS DONE TO CONSOLIDATE BACKFILL. CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO ENSURE THAT GAS PIPE OR ELECTRIC CONDUIT HAS NOT FLOATED FROM ITS POSITION IN THE TRENCH. COMPACTION BY THE WATER JETTING METHOD IS NOT ALLOWED. ALLOWED. SHADING AND BACKFILL SHALL BE COMPACTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH GOVERNMENTAL AGENCIES AND SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM OF 90 PERCENT RELATIVE COMPACTION. ALL BASE. SHADING, AND BACKFILL MATERIAL MUST BE APPROVED BY AN SDG&E INSPECTOR. ONE OR MORE 5 INCH PRIMARY CONDUITS SHALL BE SLURRY ENCASED. FOREIGN UTILITIES MUST NOT BE LOCATED UNDER ANY SDG&E FACILITIES, SUCH AS HANDHOLES. TRANSFORMER PADS. ETC. i GAS ELECT. MAIN TRENCH SINGLE GAS - SERVICE SINGLE GAS SINGLE GAS SINGLE GAS i-ire./wJNUun »iit 1 INCH AND LESS 2 INCH 3 AND 4 INCHES 6 AND 8 INCHES MINIMUM wiuin 6 INCHES 9 INCHES 12 INCHES 18 INCHES ALL CONDUIT ELECTRIC JOINT UTILITIES MULTIPLE ELECTRIC SIZES INCLUDING 2-5 INCHES ALL SIZES ALL PERMITTED SIZES (6 AND 8 INCH GAS) SPACERS AND 1-SACK CONCRETE SLURRY 6 INCHES 12 INCHES 18 INCHES 9 INCHES ELECT. SERVICE TRENCH SINGLE ELECT. SINGLE ELECTRIC & FOREIGN UTILITIES (EXCLUDING GAS) ELECTRIC SINGLE ELECTRIC & FOREIGN UTILITIES (EXCLUDING GAS) JOINT UTILITIES MULTIPLE ELECTRIC 2 INCH CONDUIT 2 INCH CONDUIT ALL SIZES LARGER THAN 2 INCH ALL PERMITTED SIZES SPACERS AND 1-SACK CONCRETE SLURRY 6 INCHES 6 INCHES 9 INCHES 12 INCHES 12 INCHES 9 INCHES FOR A GAS OR ELECTRIC SERVICE, IF ANY OBSTRUCTION IS ENCOUNTERED (WATER PIPES, ETC.), A 2 FOOT WIDE X 3 FOOT LONG HOLE MAY BE REQUIRED FOR WORKING ROOM IN THE AREA OF THE OBSTRUCTION. THIS IS TO BE DETERMINED BY AN SDG&E INSPECTOR. (H) THE FOREIGN UTILITY (U) SPACE ALLOTMENT MUST BE A MINIMUM OF 6 INCHES BELOW THE GAS ^ MAIN AND 12 INCH RADIAL SEPARATION FROM ALL OTHER UTILITIES MUST BE MAINTAINED (SEE FIGURES 1 AND 5). IF (U) SPACE ALLOTMENT EXCEEDS A 9 INCH HORIZONTAL MEASUREMENT, IT MUST BE PLACED DIRECTLY ABOVE THE ELECTRIC SPACE ALLOTMENTS AND SHALL NOT EXTEND PAST THE OUTER SIDES OF ELECTRIC SPACE ALLOTMENTS. (FOR INSTALLATION PURPOSES. BENCHING THE TRENCH IS" NOT ALLOWED). SEE FIGURES 2. 3, & 4. IF (U) SPACE ALLOTMENT IS 9" X 9° OR SMALLER, IT IS ALLOWED AT THE SAME LEVEL AS THE ELECTRIC (SEE FIGURE 6). (7) ALL EB CONDUIT, REGARDLESS OF THE SIZE. SHALL BE CONCRETE ENCASED WITH 1-SACK CEMENT ^ SLURRY. DB CONDUIT MAY ALSO BE SLURRY ENCASED IF INCLUDED IN THE MULTIPLE ELECTRIC PACKAGE. IN A SERVICE TRENCH, ALL EB CONDUIT SHALL BE ENCASED WITH CEMENT SLURRY (1 SACK). DB CONDUIT MAY ALSO BE CONCRETE OR SLURRY ENCASED IF INCLUDED IN THE MULTIPLE ELECTRIC PACKAGE. | © 1998 - 2005 San Diego Gas & Eteclnc Company. AH rights reserved. Removal of this copyright notice without permission is not permitted under law | GAS STD. 7403.4 REVISION DATE 1-1-2000 APPD$KI7^ •'•-. Indicate* Latest Revision Completely Revised New Page Information Removed SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION (UD) TRENCHES AND UTILITY POSITIONING - S.D. COUNTY SERVICE GUIDE 3370.4 MNIMUM SEPARATION MAIN TRENCH UT)UTY TELCO MULTIPLE CONCRETE DUCT (CONDEX). TRANSITE. WATER, SEWER. FUEL. OIL. DIESEL. PROPANE GAS. SPRINKLER. DRAIN. LEACH LINES. STEEL GAS MAIN LARGER THAN 2", PRIVATELY OWNED UTILITIES i.e. PRIVATE TELCO. VIDEO, AUDIO. SECURITY WIRES, FIRE ALARM, STREET LIGHTING. ETC.. WATER, SEWER. EXISTING GAS OR ELECTRIC, STORM DRAINS, STEAM. IRRIGATION PIPE. SPRINKLER PIPE LARGER THAN 4". PRIVATE TELCO TRANSITE. PROPANE GAS SEWAGE LEACH LINES OR SEEPAGE PITS IRRIGATION. SPRINKLER PIPE 4" AND LESS FUEL OIL GASOLINE. DIESEL HORIZONTAL SEPARATION NOT PERMITTED IN JOIhfT TRENCH WITH GAS AND/OR ELECTRIC * 5 FEET WITH 3 FEET OF UNDISTURBED SOIL 5 FEET FROM MAIN TRENCH FOR EACH 1' DEPTH OF MAIN TRENCH .3 FEET PROVIDED DEPTH OF PIPE DOES NOT EXCEED DEPTH OF GAS OR ELECTRIC FROM GAS-15 FEET. FROM ELECT.-5 FEET WITH 3 FEET OF UNDISTURBED SOIL IN CONSIDERATION FOR THE SAFETY OF THE GENERAL PUBLIC. PERSONS ENGAGED IN CONSTRUCTION. PROPERTY, AND FOR THE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF SDG&E SYSTEM. PROPANE GAS LINES ARE NOT PERMITTED IN A JOINT TRENCH WITH SDG&E FACILITIES. * IF FIELD CONDITIONS WILL NOT PERMIT ANY OF THESE SEPARATIONS. THEN APPROVAL OF REDUCED SEPARATIONS MUST COME FROM BOTH THE CUSTOMER PROJECT PLANNER AND SDG&E INSPECTOR. ON FIELD CONDITIONS THAT WILL NOT PERMIT STANDARD PARALLEL SEPARATIONS. A 12 INCH MINIMUM SEPARATION IS REQUIRED. PROPANE GAS SHALL ALWAYS HAVE A 5 FOOT SEPARATION. UTILITY ALL WET UTILITIES. TELCO. TV, GAS, ELECT. FUEL OIL. GASOLINE. DIESEL ARC-WELDABLE PIPELINES 3" AND LARGER STEAM (SEE NOTE) VERTICAL (CROSSING) SEPARATION MIN. 6 INCHES FROM GAS. 12 INCHES FROM ELECT. 6 INCHES 18 INCHES FROM GAS. POLY PIPE 5 FEET FROM ELECT.. 5 FEET NOTE: PLACE INSULATING BARRIER BETWEEN STEAM MAIN AND POLYETHYLENE PIPE AND/OR ELECTRIC. MINIMUM SEPARATION SERVICE TRENCH IN A SERVICE TRENCH. WATER, SEWER. PROPANE GAS, SPRINKLER. DRAIN, LEACH LINES, PRIVATELY OWNED UTILITIES i.e., PRIVATE TELCO, VIDEO, AUDIO, SECURITY WIRES, ORE ALARM. STREET LIGHTING. ETC.. ARE NOT PERMITTED IN THE SAME TRENCH WITH GAS OR ELECTRIC. WHEN THESE FACILITIES PARALLEL GAS OR ELECTRIC. 12 INCHES SEPARATION BETWEEN SEPARATE TRENCHES SHALL BE MAINTAINED BETWEEN THE UTILITIES WITH AT LEAST 12 INCHES OF UNDISTURBED NATIVE SOIL BETWEEN TRENCHES. PROPANE GAS SHALL ALWAYS HAVE A 5 FOOT SEPARATION. WHEN CROSSING, A 6 INCH VERTICAL SEPARATION IS REQUIRED (EXCEPTION) WHEN THERE IS NO SDG&E GAS IN THE SERVICE TRENCH. A SINGLE NATURAL GAS UNE MAY BE INSTALLED IN THE TRENCH, PROVIDED A 12 INCH RADIAL SEPARATION IS MAINTAINED. (TH'S IS FOR AN INDIVIDUAL HOUSE ON A CASE BY CASE BASIS, NOT A GROUP OF HOUSES/BUILDINGS). FUEL OIL. GASOLINE. AND DIESEL LINES MUST MAINTAIN A 15 FOOT SEPARATION FROM GAS PIPELINES AND A FIVE FOOT SEPARATION WITH THREE FEET OF UNDISTURBED SOIL SEPARATION FROM ELECTRIC CONDUITS. IF FIELD CONDITIONS WILL NOT PERMIT THESE SEPARATIONS, THEN APPROVAL OF REDUCED SEPARATIONS MUST COME FROM BOTH THE CUSTOMER PROJECT PLANNER AND SDG&E INSPECTOR. WHEN FIELD CONDITIONS WILL NOT PERMIT STANDARD PARALLEL SEPARATIONS. A 12 INCH MINIMUM SEPARATION IS REQUIRED. PROPANE GAS SHALL ALWAYS HAVE A 5 FOOT SEPARATION. | © 1998-2005 San Dtego Gas & Electric Company AS rights reserved. Removal of this copyright notice without permission is not pemHttBd undar law. | ISERVICE GUIDE Indicates Lotsst Revision | Completely Reviled New Page Information Removed GAS SID.7403.5 SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS 3370.5 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION (UD) TRENCHES AND UTILITY POSITIONING - S.D. COUNTY REVISION DATE 1-1-96 APPD, m THE GAS MAIN SHALL BE THE LAST INSTALLED, SHALL BE ON THE PROPERTY SIDE OF THE TRENCH. AND SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM OF INCH PAD (AFTER COMPACTION) OF SHADING MATERIAL THE WIDTH OF THE TRENCH ABOVE ANY FOREIGN UTILITY, ANY CROSSING INVOL- VING GAS SHALL MAINTAIN A MINIMUM VERTICAL SEPARATION OF 6 INCHES. A GAS SERVICE ' INSTALLED IN A MAIN TRENCH OR A SERVICE TRENCH ON PUBLIC PROPERTY SHALL REQUIRE THE SAME COVER AND CLEARANCES AS A GAS MAIN. A GAS SERVICE IN A TRENCH ON PRIVATE PROPERTY MAY BE INSTALLED ON THE SAME LEVEL AS FOREIGN UTILITY OR ELECTRIC. BUT SHALL NOT BE DEEPER THAN THE ELECTRIC SERVICE. SDG&E INSPECTOR IS TO DETERMINE AT WHICH LEVEL THE GAS SERVICE IS INSTALLED ON PRIVATE PROPERTY. (T) SDG&E INSTALLED STREET LIGHT CIRCUITS, WHEN INSTALLED ALONE IN A TRENCH, SHALL BE ^ AT A MINIMUM DEPTH OF 24 INCHES EVERYWHERE EXCEPT ON PRIVATE PROPERTY. WHERE THE MINIMUM MAY BE 18 INCHES BELOW FINAL GRADE. (M) THE ELECTRIC PRIMARY WILL BE ON THE STREET SIDE OF THE TRENCH. THE SDG&E STREET ^ LIGHT CIRCUITS WILL BE ON THE PROPERTY SIDE OF THE TRENCH WHENEVER POSSIBLE. FOREIGN UTILITY STREET LIGHTS (NOT SERIES) SHALL BE ON THE PROPERTY SIDE OF THE TRENCH AT THE SAME LEVEL AS SDG&E CONDUITS AND SHALL MAINTAIN A 12 INCH RADIAL SEPARATION. ALL UTILITIES SHALL MAINTAIN A 6 INCH SEPARATION WHEN CROSSING ALL SDG&E ELECTRIC. FOR SEPARATION ON THE SERVICE TRENCH, SEE CHART ON PAGE 7403.2 (3370.2). (N) MINIMUM HORIZONTAL SEPARATION FROM GAS PIPE TO ANY FOREIGN SUBSTRUCTURE (VAULTS. ^ HANDHOLES. ETC.) SHALL BE 12 INCHES. (3) GAS LINES MUST NOT. BE LOCATED UNDER ANY STRUCTURE, SUCH AS BUILDINGS. CARPORTS. ^ PATIOS, BREEZEWAYS. EQUIPMENT PADS, AND FACILITIES. SUCH AS SPLICE, BOXES FOR ELECTRIC. CATV, TELCO. ETC. TREES OR SHRUBBERY MUST NOT BE PLANTED OVER ANY GAS PIPELINE. A THREE FOOT SEPARATION MUST BE MAINTAINED BETWEEN THE TREE ROOT BALL AND THE GAS PIPELINE. (?) IF AN AGENCY OR UTILITY SUCH AS THE U.S. GOVERNMENT. SAN DIEGO UNIFIED PORT DISTRICT, TELCO. CATV, ETC. REQUIRES CONCRETE ENCASEMENT. CONCRETE MAY BE SUBSTITUTED FOR THE BACKFILL. BASE & SHADING SHALL BE PER SDG&E STANDARDS. ON SDG&E CONDUITS. EITHER DIRECT BURIED OR CONCRETE ENCASED. A MINIMUM INCH COMPACTED SHADING MATERIAL SHALL BE INSTALLED OVER THE UPPERMOST DB CONDUITS BEFORE THE CONCRETE BACKFILL IS INSTALLED. ALL OTHER INSTALLATIONS SHALL PROVIDE THE REQUIRED MATERIALS AS SPECIFIED IN THIS STANDARD AND STANDARDS 3365 & 3376. NOTE: THE GAS MAIN. GAS SERVICE SHALL NEVER BE CONCRETE OR SLURRY ENCASED AND SHALL HAVE THE PROPER BASE. SHADING. BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION. Q. MINIMUM SEPARATION OF ANY FOREIGN UTILITY INCLUDING WATER PIPES. SEWER. ETC.. FROM SDG&E SUBSTRUCTURES SHALL BE 12 INCHES. PROPANE GAS SHALL BE 5 FEET. REFERENCE: (R) SEE STANDARD PAGE 3364.1 FOR UTILITY LOCATIONS IN LOCAL AND COLLECTOR STREETS. S. SEE STANDARD PAGE 3364.2 FOR UTILITY LOCATIONS IN MAJOR STREETS. PRIME ARTERIALS AND EXPRESSWAYS. T. SEE STANDARD PAGE 3364.3 FOR JOINT TRENCH TYPICAL LOCATION FOR UNDERGROUND CONVERSIONS. (D) SEE STANDARD PAGE 3365 FOR IMPORTED OR NATIVE BACKFILL MATERIAL. (v) SEE STANDARD PAGE 3365 FOR SLURRY BACKFILL MATERIAL. (w) CONCRETE OR CONCRETE SLURRY ENCASEMENT OF ELECTRIC CONDUITS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH STANDARD 3376. X. SEE STANDARD PAGE 3376. 3421. 3425. 3426. AND 3427 FOR CONDUIT CONFIGURATIONS ALLOWED IN THE SERVICE TRENCH. (Y) SEE STANDARD 4620 TELECOMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION. Z. FOR TRENCHING AND SHORING QUESTIONS. SEE SDG&E TRENCHING AND SHORING MANUAL j © 1998 - 2005 San Diego Gaa & Electric Company All rights reserved. Removal of Ihis copyright notice without permission is not permitted under law. ] GAS STO.74O3.6 REVISION DATE 1-1-2000 APPD)flD7^ Indicates Latest Revision |Completely Revised New Page | j Information Removed | SERVICE GUIDE SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION (UD) TRENCHES AND UTILITY POSITIONING - S.D. COUNTY 3370.6 SCOPED THIS STANDARD SHOWS THE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS USED TO CONSTRUCT UNDERGROUND CONDUIT SYSTEMS. CONDUIT AND FITTINGS IN THIS STANDARD SHALL BE USED IN BELOW-GROUND OR BRIDGE CELL APPLICATIONS. (PVC) POLWINYLCHLORIDE CONDUITNOTES: PVC CONDUIT SHALL BE GRAY OR BLACK IN COLOR. NO OTHER COLOR IS ACCEPTABLE"*;6'F*' SDGiE/. CONDUIT SYSTEM. "'-' -- -" " FOR SCHEDULE 40 AND SCHEDULE 80 ABOVE-GROUND COMPONENTS TO CONSTRUCT CABLE POLE RISERS. SEE UNDERGROUND STANDARD 4204. ALL 5" CONDUIT MUST BE ENCASED WITH CONCRETE SLURRY. (1-SACK MIX). DB CONDUIT IS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATIONS REQUIRING DIRECT BURIED MATERIAL, i.e. SAND. DECOMPOSED GRANITE (DG). NATIVE. ETC. FOR DIRECT BURIED INSTALLATIONS. DB 60 IS REQUIRED FOR 2", 3" & 5" CONDUIT. DB 100 IS REQUIRED FOR 4" CONDUIT. ALL COUPLINGS. BENDS AND SWEEPS CLASSIFIED AS DB ARE TO BE USED WITH DB AND EB CONDUIT. DB - DIRECT BURIED CONDUIT. EB = ENCASED BURIED CONDUIT. THE SHELF LIFE FOR DB CONDUIT, BENDS. AND FITTINGS EXPOSED TO SUNLIGHT IS 6 MONTHS MAXIMUM. 2-#8 FROM A RISER POLE TO THE FIRST LOCATION SHALL BE INSTALLED IN 2" CONDUIT. SCHEDULE 4O CONDUIT IS REQUIRED IN BRIDGE CELLS. SPIGOT END CONDUIT STRAIGHT SECTIONS BELLED END OR COUPLING -EZ -y: CONDUIT SIZE 2" 3" 4' 5' TYPE OB 60 DB 60 DB 100 DB 60 »• SCH40 LENGTH V 20' 20' 20" 20' 10' STOCK NUMBER 249632 249664 249710 249728 251408 ASSEMBLY UNITS 1-SACK ENCASE W/SPACERS 1EB2IN 1EB3IN 1EB4IN 1. 2DB5SL - PRIMARY 1DB2-P 1DB3-P 1DB4-P - S40-S" SEC/SERV 1DB2-S 1DB3-S 1DB4-S 1DB5-S S4D-5' (PE) POLYETHYLENE CONDUIT CONDUIT SIZE 1" 2" 3" 4" 5" TYPE SOR 9 SCH 40 SCH 40 SDR 15.5 SCH 80 COIL LENGTH 2000' 2500' 1000' 500' 20' LENGTHS STOCK NUMBER 249630 252002 252004 252006 252008 ASSEMBLY UNIT 1" PE - - - - NOTES: POLYETHYLENE CONDUIT SHALL BE BLACK OR BLACK WfTH THREE EQUALLY SPACED RED STRIPS NO OTHER COLOR IS ACCEPTABLE -"• .FOR THE 50G&E CONDUIT SYSTEM. CORRUGATED POLYETHYLENE CONPUIT IS NOT ACCEPTABLE FOR THr'SDG&E' CONDUIT SYSTEM. •••.•' . . REFERENCE: SEE STANDARD 3383 FOR SPUCING OR REPAIRING 1" POLYETHYLENE CONDUIT. NOTES: »•* S/N 280384 SCH 40 PVC MAY BE USED AS A REPLACEMENT ON A TEMPORARY BASIS. (DEPENDS ON SUPPLIER OF COUPLING). CONDUIT CQUPUNGS FIGURE A FIGURE B FIGURE C OB SWEOGE COUPLING OB MOLDING COUPLING (BOTH WITH CENTER STOPS) DB STRAIGHT COUPLING (WITHOUT CENTER STOPS. TO BE USED ONLY WHEN REPAIRING EXISTING CONDUIT SYSTEMS) FIGURES A & B COUPLING CONDUIT SIZE 2-.« 3" 4" 5" OB OR EB STOCK NUMBER 279872 279904 279936 280032 FIGURE C COUPLING CONDUIT SIZE 08 OR EBSTOCK NUMBER 279920 279952 280064 I © 1998 - 2005 San Diego Gas A Etectne Company. All nghls reserved Removal o( this copyright notice without permission is not permitted under law Indicotes Lotast Revision j [ Completely Revised | [ New Poge | Informotlon RemovedSERVICE GUIDE REVISION DATE 8-10-04 APPD TR /JW SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS CONDUIT AND CONDUIT FITTINGS 3373.1 CONDUIT PLUG CONDUIT BELL REDUCER TAB FOR SECURING PULL ROPE CONDUIT END CAP TAB FOR SECURING PULL ROPE CONDUIT SI2E 2" 3" 4" 5" STOCK NUMBER 544768 544800 544704 544736 ASSEMBLY UNITS PLUG-2 PLUG-3 PLUG-4 PLUG-5 CONDUIT SIZE X TO Z 3"-2" 4'-3" 5"-4" STOCK NUMBER 573376 573380 573384 ASSEMBLY UNITS RED3-2 RED4-3 RED5-4 CONDUIT SIZE 2" 3" 4" 5" STOCK NUMBER 203296 203328 203360 203392 ASSEMBLY UNITS RED3-2 RED4-3 RED5-4 REDB-5 90" ELBOW/24" RADIUS CONDUIT BENDS (EXAMPLES) 22-1/2" SWEEP/251 RADIUS STRAIGHT TANGENT BILL OF MATERIAL: *NOMINAL CONDUIT SIZE 2" 3" 4" 5" DEGREE OF CURVATURE 22-1/2° 45° 45° 90° So- il -1/4" 22-1/2° 45° 90° 11-1/4° 22-1/2° 45° 90° 11-1/4" 22-1/2° 45° 90° RADIUS OF CURVATURE 25'-0" 24"(SECONDARY ONLY) 36" 24"(SECONDARY ONLY) 36" 25'-0" 25'-0" 36" 36" 25'-0" 25-0" 36" 36" 25'-0" 25'-0" 36" 36" TYPE OF CONDUIT DB 60 DB 60 DB 60 DB 60 DB 60 DB 60 DB 60 DB 60 DB 60 DB 100 DB 100 DB 100 DB 100 DB 60 DB 60 DB 60 DB 60 STOCK NUMBER 321808 321920 321810 321984 321812 321876 322144 321878 322048 321884 321826 321942 322082 321882 321856 321960 322112 ASSEMBLY UNITS CONCRETE ENCASE 1 EB2-S - 1 EB2-S - 1EB2-B 1EB3-C 1EB3-S 1EB3-8 1EB3-B 1 EB4-C 1E84-S 1EB4-8 1 EB4-B 1 EB5-C 1 EB5-S 1EB5-8 1EB5-B PRIMARY 1DB2PS - 1DB2-8 - 1DB2-B 1DB3-C 1DB3PS 1DB3-8 1DB3-B 1DB4-C 1DB4PS 1DB4-8 1DB4-B 1DB4-C 1DB5PS 1DB5-8 1 DB5-B SEC/SERV 1DB2SS 1DB2S8 - 1DB2SB - 1DB3SC 1DB3SS 1DB3S8 10B3SB 1DB4SC 1DB4SS 1DB4S8 1DB4SB 1DB5SC 10B5SS 1DB5S8 1DB5SB [ © 1998 - 2005 San Dlago Gaa & Electric Company. All nghls reserved. Removal of this copyright notice without permission is not permitted under law ( 1SERVICE CUIDC Indicates Latest Revision Completely Revised New Page Information Removed SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS 3373.2 CONDUIT AND CONDUIT FITTINGS ED AND DB REVISION DATE 1-1-96 n APPD SCOPE: THIS STANDARD SHOWS REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLING A 3425 THREE-PHASE PAD FOR DEAD FRONT TRANSFORMER APPLICATION THROUGH 300 KVA-. AU3Q FOR 3750 KVA HHR DEAD FRONT BOOSTER TRANSFORMER A'ND PRIMARY METER CABINET.. " PAD WEIGHT: 1900| MAX. 2 TONLIFTING ANCHOR STOCK NUMBER PAD 513998 ASSEMBLY UNIT 3425-3 MAXIMUM PRIMARY CONDUITS ALLOWED 2 RUNS OF 4" <EB OR DB) PRIMARY CONDUIT M= PRIMARY 10* 9* 9' •r B) PRIMARY 18- ,3- 9" 9" -1" ©PRIMARY 18- n" •48"--48"- 6-3" SECONDARY-* CONDUITS 6-4" SECONDARY-* CONDUITS (BID 5-5" SECONDARY- CONDUITS MAXIMUM PRIMARY CONDUITS ALLOWED FOR PRIMARY METER CABINET >.-:y ..;..: . >-4" (200A CABLE) OXEX2"5" ^600A CftJBL^ 18" Y12* 18" STOCK NUMBER 513998 1 62660 DESCRIPTION PAD 3311 HH ASSEMBLY UNIT 3425-3 3311 -S MACRO UNIT <£) 1998 -2005 San Diego Gas A Electric Company. All nghls reserved. Removal of this copyright notice without permission is not permitted under law. j SERVICE GUIDE Indicates Latest Revision | j Completely Ravised ) [ MB* Page j [ Informotlon Removed REVISION DATE 6-9-05 APPD /If?/ JJ SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS THREE-PHASE TRANSFORMER PAD INSTALLATION 3425 3425.1 4 NOTES: - TRANSFORMER COOLING FINS MAY OVERHANG REAR OF PAD BY 6 INCHES. - IF NUMBER OF SECONDARY CONDUITS IS GREATER THAN MAXIMUM SHOWN. USE PAD PER STANDARD 3426 OR 3427 - TRANSFORMER PAD MAY NOT BE POURED IN PUCE. USE PRECAST PADS ONLY. INSTALLATION: ("A") 1 INCH EARTH IN THE BOTTOM OF THE TRENCH IS REQUIRED TO PREVENT DAMAGE FROM ^-^ ROCKS, SAGS, AND POCKETS. (B) PLACE ALL PRIMARY AND SECONDARY CONDUITS WITHIN THE PAD OPENING AS SHOWN ON ^•^ PAGE 3425.1. TERMINATE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY CONDUITS FLUSH WITH THE TOP OF THE PAD. DO NOT CUT INTO THE CURVED PORTION OF THE ELBOWS. RADIUS OF CURVATURE IS 36" MINIMUM FOR 3 INCH, 4 INCH AND 5 INCH CONDUITS. (cT) THE CONDUIT CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT BETWEEN TERMINATING POINTS LIMITS THE SECONDARY CONDUIT CONFIGURATION TO 2 WIDE X 3 DEEP OR 3 WIDE X 2 DEEP (NO ONE CONDUIT IS TO BE COMPLETELY SURROUNDED ON ALL FOUR SIDES BY OTHER CONDUITS). USING SPACERS AND 1 SACK CONCRETE SLURRY BACKFILL CONDUITS MAY ALSO BE INSTALLED SIDE BY SIDE ON THE BOTTOM OF THE TRENCH WITHOUT SPACERS OR CONCRETE SLURRY (4 CONDUITS MAX.). IN THE TRANSITION AREA WHERE THE CONDUITS FROM THE BOTTOM OF THE TRENCH START TOWARD THE SURFACE (THE STRAIGHT PORTION BY THE 9CT BEND), SPACERS MAY BE REQUIRED TO ALLOW THE 90" BENDS TO ENTER STRAIGHT INTO THE PAD OPENING. AT THE SURFACE POINT, THE CONDUITS MAY BE BUNDLED TOGETHER. USE SDG&E APPROVED BASE, SHADING AND BACKFILL. 2 WIDE X 3 DEEP 1-SACK CONCRETE SLURRY BACKFILL \ 3 WIDE X 2 DEEP QD.Q •QQpi, MAXIMUM OF CONDUITS WITHOUT SPACERS OR CONCRETE SLURRY SHADING © ANY COMBINATION OF 3. 4 OR 5 INCH SECONDARY CONDUITS MAY BE USED, PROVIDED THEY DO NOT EXCEED THE TOTAL OF 6 OR THE MAXIMUM OF EACH SIZE CONDUIT AS SPECIFIED ON PAGE 3425.1. AN EXCEPTION WOULD BE WHEN THE TRANSFORMER FEEDS ONE CUSTOMER WITH A 2000 AMP MAIN WHICH REQUIRES FIVE-5 INCH CONDUITS. NO FUTURE CUSTOMERS ARE ALLOWED IN THIS INSTALLATION. TWO EXTRA 1 INCH OR TWO EXTRA 2 INCH CONDUITS MAY BE ADDED TO SERVE STREET LIGHTS, RECREATION BUILDINGS. ETC. WHEN NUMBER OF REQUIRED CONDUITS IS LESS THAN THE TOTAL ALLOWABLE SHOWN ON PAGE 3425.1, INSTALL IN NUMBERED SEQUENCE AS SHOWN. G. IN SOFT SOILS A CONCRETE BACKFILL (1-SACK MIX.) IS REQUIRED UNDER THE PAD, 12 [NCHES BEYOND THE SIDE EDGES ..OF.PAD AND 12 INCHES DEEP. IT) - MAXIMUM NUMBER OF CONDUITS ALLOWED FOR 200 AMP APPLICATION IS 2-4" PRIMARY ••.-". - • CONDUITS. NO COMBINATION OF DIFFERENT SIZE PRIMARY CONDUITS "ALLOWED. NO' :.' --' " - ' ' -SECONDARY CONDUITS ALLOWED. ""•'. .'.-".• :; '. : '•• ••'• ' • """•'-.';•'>'. ,-. " ' 'TV-MAXIMUM NUMBER OF CONDUITS ALLOWED FOR 600 AMP APPLICATION IS 2-5" PRIMARY - :. . . CONDillTS. NO COMBINATION OF DIFFERENT SIZE PRIMARY CONDUITS ALLOWED." NO"' ':' .. ' ...SECONDARY CONDUITS.ALLOWED.;-- , .-".-•• " . "-.;.'•• ' .' .'. '.'-.' • . "K}"'"'PLACE PRIMARY CONDUITS" WITHIN" THE PAD OPENING AS SHOWN ON PAGE 3425.1 TERMINATE ^ PRIMARY CONDUITS 3" ABOVE THE BOTTOM OF 3311 HANDHOLE. 3311 HANDHOLE TO BE " INSTALLED WITH PRIMARY METER APPLICATIONS SEE 4702.1 OR 47023. DO NOT CUT THE ' "CURVED PORTION OF CONDUIT ELBOWS. RADIUS OF CURVATURE IS 36" MINIMUM FOR 4" OR 5" CONDUITS. " - • •<"•/•. .,.-.-•'.. : •."'.- .:.:.'.. •".. • :•:••/• '. ' .• [ © 1998 - 2005 San Diego Gas * Electric Company All rights reserved. Removal ofthls copyright notice without permission is not permitted under law SERVICE GUIDE t 3425.2 X] Indicates Latest Revision I Completely Revised New Page |Information Removed SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS THREE-PHASE TRANSFORMER PAD INSTALLATION 3425 REVISION DATE 6-9-05 APPD /if^/ JJ INSTALLATION CON'T: WHEN METER WILL NOT BE ATTACHED TO PRIMARY METER CABINET, INSTALL 1" CONDUIT '-REMOTE METER LOCATION. 1" CONDUIT NOT REQUIRED WHEN METER ATTACHED. •"• REFERENCE: M. SEE STANDARD 3211 FOR PAD IDENTIFICATION. N SEE STANDARD 3370 OR 3371 FOR TRENCH, UTILITY POSITIONING, SHADING AND BACKFILL REQUIREMENTS. 0 SEE STANDARD 3376 FOR CONCRETE SLURRY. P. SEE STANDARD 3481 FOR TRANSFORMER BARRIER PROTECTION. Q. SEE STANDARD 3483 FOR MINIMUM OPERATING AND CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS (PAD PLACEMENT). R. SEE STANDARD 3484 FOR PAD INSTALLATION OF PAD-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT. S. SEE STANDARD 3486 FOR RETAINING WALL REQUIREMENTS AND CLEARANCES FROM REVERSE SUBGRADE RETAINING WALLS. T SEE STANDARD 3487 FOR RETAINING WALLS. U. SEE STANDARD 3751 FOR TRANSFORMER INSTALLATION. V. SEE STANDARD 4512 FOR EQUIPMENT GROUNDING. W. SEE STANDARD 4514 FOR GROUNDING TELCO CONDUCTOR IN PAD-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT. [ © 1998 - 2005 San Diego Gas & Electnc Company All righls reserved Removal of this copyright notice without permission is not permitted under law [ SERVICE GUIDE XI Indicotes Lotest Revision [ Completely Revised | [ New Poge | | Informotion Removed REVISION DATE 6-9-05 APPD /^/ JJ SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS THREE-PHASE TRANSFORMER PAD INSTALLATION 3425 3425.3 SCOPE: THIS STANDARD SHOWS THE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING INSTALLATION USED TO PROVIDE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING. THIS METHOD SHALL BE USED WHEN DIFFERENT PARTIES ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE CONDUIT AND PAD INSTALLATION. USE PREFERRED OR ALTERNATE TRENCH GROUND WIRE IN STANDARD 4510 WHEN THE SAME PARTY IS RESPONSiei£ FOR CONDUIT AND PAD INSTALLATION. TOP VIEW 24" EXPOSED TAILOUT RUN WIRE 6 INCHES BELOW FINAL GRADEGROUND ROD CLAMP GROUND v GROUND RODv x SET SCREW v |> GROUND CLAMP CONNECTION 24" EXPOSED TAILOUT COMPRESSION CONNECTOR GH^g SECTION VIEW BILL OF MATERIAL: ITEM 1 2 3 4 5 DESCRIPTION PAD (TYPICAL) WIRE. BARE COPPER. #2. 7 STR. SOFT DRAWN GROUND ROD. 5/8" X 8'-0", COPPERWELD GROUND ROD. CLAMP COMPRESSION CONNECTOR QUANTITY 1 AS REQ'D. 2 2 1 STOCK NUMBER REFER TO WORK ORDER 812816© 603072 230016 257760 (if) ASSEMBLY UNITS - pn T/P INSTALLATION: GROUND RODS TO HAVE 6 FOOT MINIMUM SEPARATION. ADD THE SECOND 24" TAILOUT WIRE AND COMPRESSION CONNECTOR. THE COMPRESSION CONNECTOR AND THE SECOND 24" TAILOUT WIRE. SDG&E SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL REFERENCE: C. SEE STANDARD 3211 FOR EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION. D. SEE STANDARDS 3426 AND 3427 FOR PAD INSTALLATIONS OVER HANDHOLES. (?) SEE STANDARD 4002.2 FOR WIRE INFORMATION. F. SEE STANDARD 4510 FOR (PREFERRED I ) AND (ALTERNATE) TRENCH GROUND WIRE INSTALLATIONS. G SEE STANDARD 4514 FOR GROUNDING TELCO CONDUCTOR IN PAD-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT. SERVCE GUIDE REVISION DATE 1-1-98 APPD $j$/&$ Indicates Latest Revision Completely Revised New Page Information Removed SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS EQUIPMENT GROUNDING INSTALLATION (PREFERRED D) 4512.1 ", SCOPE: THIS STANDARD SHOWS EQUIPMENT GROUNDING INSTALLATION USED WHEN (PREFERRED I ) OR (ALTERNATE) TRENCH GROUND WIRE IS INSTALLED. STANDARD 4510. SUBSTITUTE GROUND RODS SHOWN ON STANDARD PAGE 4512.1 FOR TRENCH GROUND WIRE IF (PREFERRED I ) OR (ALTERNATE) INSTALLATIONS DO NOT APPLY. ^ TOP VIEW * SECOND TRENCH GROUND WIRE REQUIRED ON STD. PG. 4510.1 24" EXPOSED TAILOUT "v TRENCH GROUND WIRE(S) COMPRESSION CONNECTOR 24 EXPOSED TAILOUT SECTION VIEW 1^—GROUND WIRE(S) 24" EXPOSED TAILOUT FINAL , GRADE1 TOP VIEW (TYPICAL PAD WITHOUT HANDHOLE) 24" EXPOSED TAILOUT FINAL ,GRADE' SERVICE GUIDE 4 Indicotes Lotest Revision [ Completely Revised New Poge Informotion Removed SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS 4512.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING INSTALLATION REVISION DATE 1-1-98 APPD * 24" EXPOSED TA1LOUT TRENCH GROUND WIRE (PAD WITH 3312 HANDHOLE(S) *24" EXPOSED TAILOUT COMPRESSION CONNECTOR FINAL t GRADE* SECTION VIEW (3416 PAD WITH 3311 HANDHOLE) SERVICE GUIDE Indicotes Lolest Revision Completely Revised [ New Poge j Informotion Removed REVISION DATE 1-1-96 APPD SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS EQUIPMENT GROUNDING INSTALLATION 4512.3 BILL OF MATERIAL: ITEM 1 2 3 DESCRIPTION PAD WIRE, BARE COPPER. #2. 7 SIR. SOFT DRAWN CONNECTOR. COMPRESSION QUANTITY 1 AS REQ'D AS REQ'D STOCK NUMBER REFER TO WORK ORDER 812816 (o) 257760 (A) ASSEMBLY UNIT - GDWIRE - INSTALLATION; ®IN CASES WHERE THERE ARE TWO GROUND WIRES. SQUEEZE THE GROUND WIRES TOGETHER WITH A COMPRESSION. CONNECTOR. WHERE THERE IS ONLY ONE TRENCH GROUND WIRE. ADD THE SECOND 24" TAILOUT WIRE. SDG&E SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL THE COMPRESSION CONNECTOR AND THE SECOND 24" TAILOUT WIRE. (B) (PREFERRED I ) OR (ALTERNATE) TRENCH GROUND WIRE IS REQUIRED WHEN PREFERRED I EQUIPMENT ^^ GROUNDING INSTALLATION IS NOT INSTALLED. REFERENCE: STANDARD 3484.1 FOR PAD INSTALLATION USED FOR MOUNTING PAD-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT. (D)SEE STANDARD 4002.2 FOR WIRE INFORMATION. F)SEE STANDARD 4510 FOR (PREFERRED I ) AND (ALTERNATE) TRENCH GROUND WIRE INSTALLATION. STANDARD PAGE 4512.1 FOR (PREFERRED n) EQUIPMENT GROUNDING INSTALLATION WHEN DIFFERENT PARTIES ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE CONDUIT AND PAD INSTALLATION. G. SEE STANDARD 4514 FOR GROUNDING TELCO CONDUCTOR IN PAD-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT. Indicotes Lotest Revision | Completely Revised New Page Information RemovedSERVICE GUIDE 4 SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS 4512.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING INSTALLATION REVISION DATE 1-1-96 APPD &3IT/X SCOPE: THIS STANDARD SHOWS EQUIPMENT GROUNDING INSTALLATION USED WHEN (PREFERRED I ) AND (ALTERNATE TRENCH GROUND WIRE IS INSTALLED. STANDARD 4510. SUBSTITUTE GROUND RODS SHOWN ON STANDARD PAGE 4512.1 FOR TRENCH GROUND WIRE IF (PREFERRED I ) OR (ALTERNATE) INSTALLATIONS DO NOT APPL TO PROVIDE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING FOR TRANSFORMERS INSTALLED ON 3426 & 3427 PADS INSTALLED OVER 3314 HANDHOLES. TQp 24" EXPOSED TAILOUT COMPRESSION CONNECTOR FINAL SECTION VIEW GRADE ~\ <§> —# • i . l-k " •• - - L. j 1• i (HtNCH BILL OF MATERIAL; ITEM 1 2 3 DESCRIPTION PAD WIRE, BARE COPPER. |2. 7 STR. SOFT DRAWN CONNECTOR. COMPRESSION QUANTITY 1 AS REQ'O. AS REQ'D. STOCK NUMBER REFER TO WORK ORDER 812816 © 257760 @ ASSEMBLY UNITS - GO WIRE - INSTALLATION: (J)BUTT TRENCH GROUND WIRE AGAINST 3314 HANDHOLE. (B) IN CASES WHERE THERE ARE TWO GROUND WIRES. SQUEEZE THE GROUND WIRES TOGETHER WITH A COMPRESSION ^-^ CONNECTOR. WHERE THERE IS ONLY ONE TRENCH GROUND WIRE. ADD THE SECOND 24" TAILOUT WIRE. SDG4E SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL THE COMPRESSION CONNECTOR AND' THE SECOND 24" TAILOUT WIRE. REFERENCE: D) SEE STANDARD PAGES 3426.4 & 3427.4 FOR THREE-PHASE TRANSFORMER PAD INSTALLATION. E) SEE STANDARD 4510 FOR PREFERRED AND ALTERNATE TRENCH GROUND WIRE INSTALLATION. F} SEE STANDARD PAGE 45121 FOR (PREFERRED E ) EQUIPMENT GROUNDING INSTALLATION. G) SEE STANDARD 40022 FOR WIRE INFORMATION. SERVICE GUIDE REVISION DATE 1-1-96 APPD 'jH$5/&ffl 1 Indicates Latest Revision 1 Completely Revised New Page Information Removed SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS EQUIPMENT GROUNDING INSTALLATION 4512.5 Sempra Energy utility" SDG&E Project Management Letter of Transmittal/Communication To Subject • DPSS#. CC Terry Smith Traffic Signal 541199-040 Fran. Phone* Date' Maria Higgins 760-480-7647 05/15/2006 D Please notify us immediately if enclosures are not as noted D For Your Action D Submit Specified Hem D Approved As Submitted O Rejected D For Your Information O Revise & Resubmit Q Approved As Noted D Per Your Request D For Your Approval D For Review & Comment D Make Corrections As Noted D A Confirmation Copies 1 Description Electric Underground Meter & Service Location Comments: Project # 541199-040 - Traffic Signal at 7201 Rancho Santa Fe Rd, Carisbad Your project has been issued to our Construction Dept., you may call them for trench inspections at 760-432-5805 Please refer to the project # when you caf I If you have any questions please call me D Project Management - Metro 8315 Century Park Court, Suite 210 San Diego, CA 92123-1550 D Project Management- Orange County 622 Cammo De Los Mares San Ctemente, CA 92673-2827 D Project Management - Northern 571 Enterpnse Street Escondfefo, CA 92029-1244 D Distribution Work Flow and Planning 8316 Century Park Court, Suite 52C San Diego, CA 92123-1582 5 CDCM m Oio IUoiiuto I: 7? | O<o tnzo2xat o Iz §3 O O tuQ oc i ui "S8 1o jaa S "SI 2=0>CO A [^Sempra Energy ut.nty" :NoiNeERING DEPARTMENT PROJ# 541199-010/030 May 4, 2006 City of Carlsbad Terry Smith 1635 Faraday Avenue Carlsbad Ca 92008 Dear Mr Smith Subject Carlsbad Fire Station # 6 @ 7201 Rancho Santa Fe Rd , Carlsbad The electric/gas construction orders to serve your project have been issued to our Construction Department Please feel free to call (760)432-5805 to set up a pre-construction meeting or to discuss any construction-related questions. ( When calling SDG&E regarding your project, here are your references. Name of Job: Carlsbad Fire Station #6 Work Order. Electric- 2848870 Project Order #• 541199-010 Gas Service Order # 541199-030 Once the Agency Having Jurisdiction notifies us that your equipment has been inspected and passed, and SDG&E's work is complete, it will take approximately three days to set the meters. That assumes we already have an approved address list and application from whoever is to have the service in their name. These last few items can cause unfortunate delays if not attended to in a timely manner Your business is appreciated and we hope you are very satisfied with our service if I may be of further assistance, or if you have any questions, please call me at the number below. Our normal hours are 7 00 AM to 4'00 PM, Monday through Friday. For additional general information, please visit our website at http.//sdqe.com/index.html. Sincerely, Maria Higgins Customer Project Planner Telephone: (760) 480-7647 MEH rbm iw SUUb Hi 01 a m US 04 i n 00<N OO Ul•feui g Ul IO June 6th, 2006 City of Carlsbad 1 635 Faraday Av. Carlsbad, Ca, 92008 Attn: Terry Smith RE: Carlsbad Fire Station #6 (Si Rancho Santa Fe Rd. s/o Elfin Forest Rd. B.l.C. Log 50-0090 Job 5925963 Dear Terry, Enclosed are two sets of prints showing the telephone requirements and specifications required by AT&T California ( formerly SBC). California Public Utilities Commission Tariff A2 defines specific responsibilities for you, the owner/developer, in order to establish telephone service. Several recent rulings affect replacement of supporting structure for telephone service within your development FCC Docket No. 88-57 established a new Demarcation Point of Definition, and C.P.U.C. decisions 90-10-64 and 92-01-23 added clarification to this demarcation ruling. Effective August 8, 1993, the new Demarcation Definition known as Minimum Point of Entry (MPOE) changed AT&T California and owner/developer responsibilities. Per these rulings, for commercial projects, the owner/developer of a parcel or continuous parcels of property is responsible for all supporting substructure on that property without reimbursement from AT&T California. For residential subdivisions, reimbursements are per C.P.U.C. tariff A2 Rule 16, and is subject to a C.P.U.C. surcharge on the value of any supporting structure, in most cases. Furthermore, this supporting structure must be placed according to AT&T California's specifications in order for AT&T California to provide telephone service to the property. In order to meet your proposed in-service date oft/ct«fg ^7 we must have a 30 day lead time period to complete our work Therefore, the general contractor arid/or electrician must complete all telephone requirements by/^y / £>7. AT&T California must be notified of in-service date changes, in writing, pnor to any scheduling changes. Inspection complete dates will be adjusted accordingly to meet our 30 day requirement. Telephone facilities will be inspected and must be accepted by the telephone inspector before this 30 day interval will commence. A successful inspection by AT&T California is the only way for telephone crews to begin their work on your project and your 30 day interval, begins only with that successful inspection. Appropriate stages of construction to schedule inspection visits would be: 1. Telephone conduit is in the trench, stubbed up, but prior to shading and backfilling. 2. All other telephone requirements are met per attached specifications. These would include, but are not limited to: backboards installed, pull ropes in all conduits, provisions for grounding. Please note the requirements for backboard space and conduits, as indicated on the attachments, are sized for AT&T California's cables and terminations only. Additional backboard space will be required by other telephone equipment vendors We suggest that you include this information on your final drawings and specifications to preclude any last minute misunderstandings and difficulties. It is understood that if, due to developer's non-performance, AT&T California is required to return material, re-engineer or perform any work outside of its basic construction operations, the developer will bear all costs of such activities. In addition, if the developer and/or contractor does not complete the structure requirements a minimum of 30 days prior to required dial tone, i.e., owner move-in, AT&T California must provide service to a customer on a "RUSH" basis (giving AT&T California less than a 30 day time frame), AT&T California will bill the owner/agent. The amount charged (typically $1,500.00 or more) will be calculated to cover the additional administrative and construction charges incurred to provide service to the production units in an expedited manner, if possible. Prewiring Apartments and Condominiums: AT&T California requires that all prewire be identified and tagged 30 days pnor to occupancy. You have the option of having your contractor perform this work. However, if it becomes necessary for AT&T California to identify and tag the prewire, we will bill you at the appropriate installation rates. -3- Please indicate your understanding of these telephone requirements by signing the "AT&T California Copy" of this letter and return it in the pre-addressed envelope. For purposes of billing, RECEIPT OF THE CERTIFIED PACKAGE IMPLIES UNDERSTANDING AND CONCURRENCE. It is the owner's/developer's responsibility to insure that the "Contractor's Copy" of these requirements and due dates are given to the contractor on site. Failure to sign and return this letter of understanding does not absolve the owner/developer of financial liabilities consistent with the aforementioned requirements. If you have any questions, please call me on (760) 489-3643. Thank you for your cooperation in this matter. Chris Allhusen AT&T CALIFORNIA ENGINEER Agreed to: / Date: CARLSBAD FIRE STATION #6 fY7>T TB EXTEND Z-V Dili "TO PL. APPRiX P/L ®PiaficBdl Point of ctraccum Developer ID pdc up & extend I _il_co«diiio P O.Cto bedtbojrdas shownSeedwgjfbrdetafls I Developer to plice.FU'i»' i V." plywood bidboini £/W niltiMegropndiourcr .SetdwjUordtuib Developer to nveep up condiutsPaofic Bell to place pedeitBl See dwg 3 detail E for details CONTRACTOR NOTE ALL SUBSTRUCTURES SHOWN ARE APPROXIMATE LOCATION ONLY. PER AVAILABLE RECORDS CONTRACTOR TO VEBIFV LOCATION OF Alt SUBSTRUCTURES PRIOR TO EXCAVATION For locating existing substructures CALL - Underground Service Alert I-800-422-4133 two (2) working days before you dig MINIMUM OF 3' SEPARATION FROM POWER TRANSFORMER LOCATIONS FIRE HYDRANTS AND STREET LIGHTS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED I1 FROM WALLS HANDHOLES AND CABLE TV PEDESTALS SEE DWG -J— FOR ADDITIONAL 'SPECIFICATIONS AND TRANSFORMER BY-PASS DETAIL "This project requires excavation. Construction will vtilize and implement all Best Management Practices (BMP's) as required to ensure compliance with SBC Policy Later issues February 11, 2003 by Environmental Management concerning Storm Water Permitting andStonfl Water Pollution Prevention Plans (SWPPP 's) and in accordance Mil the Clean Water Act (1965) and EPA regulations published in 1990 as modified by the Phase 11 Rule In 1999"WE OF CONST DEVELOPER CONDUIT cONourr TenMWATio* AT EXT«I DEVELOPER TO JM COMMIT luaaa OEVELOTCH ID- - GMtMCT MUIt •£ «rtATH*WIOOf WITH >fUU. HIEooons. HO CUTTEH ran, **r K *»6U. count onIUOIM MOM - umnc MGUOMO MUST «*»e »•CLEAM WOWOM AHA txHtCaV M fMMt OF TMECMDIET 1MTH 000*3 MM • IHCMOACKHCHT IV BIMCM ON TClf MM OOUTUffDC9GMATID IACX9OAHD ffft pu _Mt (E TOLEK. DEVELOPER TD- EHOf CDBOOIT I AAH IT KT«IATHM rWM KfMU* coNoun1 TO urt not of «LCO a - vrnn «ACIUOAK> M 1 raaoMOS tau, oocisr or V<- FUKCD MO BE uaaro ID ncvncKxewcc Are OMict*«»r KR asa vsuriooiog= 2 CDICDLIKS KHOTOCIOMHK BtOOQMD SHCE HHHWE) UUS JWCT MIL 1C HMW» -ftOflC VOL OCT- W Iffipjane MIL XHutuut MO D KCSOIVID iw wcmc KU. owux oiu suas AW cuu TERIUKLS mxnaix.KOODHD Ota HUT K UCUIKD JCK RLEUDtE STXHon IQUIPDCMr M) KXU K (HOIKED TO « «E ttWUPW 3 BtOdniin «NZ UOOKH HV • NUUSnD AT-JHE DIKRCI1CM OF HE PKXTK KU. WStOnR XHH TOE RLUVKLocnoNf MMDuts«z muwme KBTK ncnosre u wnow MUKan awwcts ors» nots natMtrsax OR TO mz or vaaaMo Ncvtn twurc BCMS tR» no*. irrmi w 1UQ UCXBKBtlUO I m~|T 25 X FICOli LEVEL if SOX 1 18' c 0 F 1C ll ,18- i !(-!JI ,cx ^— Z?*— *i C C E Flf r ZOO X 4 <T c c H f JOOX ' c c c C E K r t i c c C c E « c c 0 < 1 • 11 1 I11,1 L _ "J L^_ , i 1 | 400 X | 600^1 p *" c c E H c C E K 0 G C5900X 1 1 T ecu, um. KXC atpa MPT MI. COCUnS USERS. JWJSJEO3 CF THtTWC. SHE. UKZTOL LDCUIOI. AK>HJ*£*« CH TIE MTKHD WHOM: [S] GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS WE * ft «K COPPER «KE fKOU THE COIWON CKOCM) ELECTRODE TO THEPACIFIC BEU BACKBOARD PLACE THE GROLW) WE « A T COMUI OR S1RAP SECURELY TO * MLIf A COMMON CROUND ELECTRODE G NOT ACCESSOR A WPLE CAH BE PLACED ON THE MAIN ELECTRICAL CABINET - SEE METHOD BELOW HWi OECITKM. PANEL TYPICAL MAIN BUILDING TERMINAL BACKBOARD LAYOUT TO COMMON GROUND ELECTRODE • MATERIAL. REQUIRED" A. f METALLIC NIPPLE 3' LONG ft l' LOCK NUTS • ALL LABOR AND MATERM. TO BE FURMSHED 8T ELECTRO. CONTRACTOR. DRILL OR PUKqH A f HOLE THROUGH THE SDE PAWL fLACE THE I' NIPPLE THROUGH THE SIDE PAHEL SECURE THE MRPIE. HT ATTACHING A T LOCK NUT ON EACH SIDE OF ANON-REMOVAEIE PANEL ALLOWING 2* PROJECTION ON OUTSOE. BONDING TO TRANSFORMER CONDUFT CONDUFT I TYPICAL BOM3NG ORAHWG SETftSN SDG4E TRANSFCfW AND TELCO PEDESTAL USING DEVELOPER PROyHKD QONDUT STSTQi "L DEVELOPER TO PROVIDE NOT LESS THAN |G AWG GRQLMD WRE EEIWEEN POWER TRANSFORMER AND TELCO PEDESTAL. 110 VOLT/AC I00 DOUBLE DUPLEX 10 0 INSIDE TERMINATIONS 1 ALL TELCO ttHDUft WET TERWME AT MQCKMRO AND BE SEOJRELr WUOB).r CONDOT OWNOT tfET BUXBMRD. DEVaOPER IOJST FUCE V** * 6 WE STRAPPING BOARD FROU DO OF CONDUIT TO B4CXBQARO PACHC BELL 111MOT jCTttCN C«Bl£ TO OMKALL OR PLASTER BCMRQ. BUILDING / INTERIOR SPECIFICATIONS t CCrOJTS. VAULTS, PULL ROPES BtfXBOARDAW IDUtUL CABKTS AS SPEffHIW PAOF1C BEU. 1DLL BE 5UFPIJED MO PLACED BY THE DEVSLDKRi nc wore BELL WJSOWD «jsr EE sna> is SKWM n THE DEML ABOIE.AU CCNDUTS UUST raaowiE at THE BUXBOIRD AT msr «' FROU orou LEVELI AL OKBB) CONDUITS TO BE RED KEUL WBH6 tTTH A 3/8' POU PULL LHE.4 A 36" UNCesnUCTED HOC AREA yUST BE UHTABgD M FRONT V BAOCBOMD. 5. OVERHEAD UGHBHC UUST BE AT LEAST 30 FOOttAtaiS AT FliCK IEVELe. uaui COLHC HEtGHr H IEIMNH. ROOU is r r7 P0OWIOM OF FRE RATCD WU5, WSDNRT W 1ISW. HALLS OR AflCBSMO ML TKSIDKWC S THE RESPOHSatUT OF THE BULEHG (MNER.a no - t2» ORE* REKPIACU SEBWUELT FUSED AOWEHT TOBtexBoro (AU. COUWKW. EUUtCS) 8. fKfi FED DUUWGS Ml BEQURE A OEDKfflEO 2DW / 220V XI AHP CRCUTW1HN 2 OFflBER UUX &MFVENT 11 TBEPHONE ROQUS THfl SUFWRT FBffl WK OMPWEMT Will REOUBE ENOUGH Afi COHCfnQNDR TO HVOLE. HBO BTU |KJ UAMW AN MBEHT tpffCRATURE NOT TO OCEE077 KEREES FAHRErlHEir INSPECTION NOTES 1 COHDWE 1DRX WITH T>£ PAORC BEU. TRENCH HSPECTOR (760)499-0063 AND WECT All COKSTRUCIUN REATED OUESTOC TO HH (TOOO GILES).Z TCENCH TO BE WSPEEIED AND ACCE7IED W TOBWME TRENCH INSPECTOR POCR TOBKXFU.3. PAOFE BELL KPEO10H MET BE PASSED 30 003 PfflOR TO REQUEST FDR DUL TONE. FREAIAW ETC 4 THE PACFK BELL HSPECTOH RESERVE THE RIGHT TO REFUSE CONDUIT THAT OCWKESFROM FUNS NC SPEOnCATBHS. S. DESCN OUNCES ml BE EVMJUATED AND UAY RESULT tt A E8UHG TO THE PROJECT(L REJClESt CHECK IKE COOES WANT CfflES AND COUNTIES WWE EXBnNG CODE OROWAHCCS HHCK FWHBff THE KSTALLHKM OF EXPOSED TELEPHONE WRWABCW SUSPEHED COJNGS WEN THE SPACE E USED FDR AIR HMDUN& SOMECITES PfiOHHT THE FRACIKZ IN ANT SUSPENDED COJNG SPACE.7 PROJECT ADDRESSES TO BE FROVDED.8. UMT ADDRESSES. F APPUCMLE, TO BE FKMDffiS F Uim ROOMS *RE TO 1£ IDCXEtl WTH 5PG4E 1HSTER KET DEVm»>ER UUST NEEOIWTE HTH TELCO KSPECTOR FOR HSIM1ATIOM OF TELCO LOCK BOX (aac AERIAL ATTACHMENT SPECIFICATIONS 06/0 NOT IBS* THAN 2RADIAL CLEARANCEBETWEEN THE POINTAW POLE TELCQ CONDUTT MUST BE AT LEAST ONE FOOT fflOU CABLE TV OR ELECTRICALRES-US AT BUILDING ATTACHMENTS ONE FOOT RADW. CLEARANCE FROM PCMERSERVICE DROPSEUflUMNG ATTACHMENTS MUST NEVER BE LESS THAN 19 ABOVE STREET OfTMlEf TO ALLOWCLEARANCE FOR TRAFFIC. OUTSIDE CABINETS 1 ALL OLTTSDE CABINETS MUST BE, ILL APPRMD WEATHERPROOF, AW HAVE A HNGED DOOR. PACIFIC BEU CANNOT USE OVERSIZED JUNCTION BOXES 2. UNUUU CABINET SIZE IS 26' x 2+" a ~f 3 CABINET dWENSTONS FDR THIS PROJECT TO BE AT LEAST • 48' W « .36'- D - 10- EQUIPPED HUH A 3/4' PUWWOH THE FOLLOWING ARE SOUE OF THE MANUFACTURER 5 THAT HAVE BEEN LISTED BY UNDERWATERS LABORATORIES FOR UL 18B3 UL 497 AND HAVE «ET THE ADDITIOKAL SfEOnCAHOKS AS RECOMMENDED BY PACT1C BELL FDR TERUKAL HOSING CABINETS. BENNER NAWUAN B - IWE SYSTEUS SUNWEST ENGINEERIHSRE1.TEC (800) 992-3833 (BOO) eSI-7415(800) 635-3653 (830) 579-5000 THESE CABINETS CAN BE ORDERED DIRECTLY FROM THE THE MANUFACTUREROR PURCHASED THROUGH LOCAL ELECTRICAL SUPPLIERS. DEVELOPER' < APPENDIX C LIMITED ASBESTOS & LEAD SURVEY FOR OLD FIRE STATION NO. 6 LIMTIED ASBESTOS/LEAD SURVEY OldFirestation#6 3131 Levante Street Carlsbad, California Project Number: 06-1024 Marc Boogay Consulting Engineer 326 Mam Street Vista, CA 92084 (760) 407-4000 LIMITED ASBESTOS AND PAINT SURVEY 3131 Levante Street CARLSBAD, CALIFORNIA CLIENT: City of Carlsbad Engineering Department 1635 Faraday Avenue Carlsbad, CA 92008 PREPARED BY-Marc Boogay Consulting Engineer 326 Mam Street Vista, California 92084 (760) 407-4000 DATE November 6, 2006 PROJECT NUMBER 06-1024 IMPORTANT NOTICE This report is confidential It may be read, and/or relied upon only by the Client ABSTRACT A limited survey of suspected asbestos-containing materials (ACBMs) was conducted for the temporary fire station identified by the address 3131 Levante Street in Carlsbad, California (the "site"). Work was limited to building's floors, walls, ceilings, and roof Paints were also assessed for condition. The garage building was not deemed to have suspect ACBMs. Twenty-six samples of suspected ACBMs were taken and analyzed from the quarters building. All but three of the resultant specimens detected no asbestos. Asbestos was only detected in cap-sheet and mastic of the roof of the quarters building. Special removal procedures will be required prior to demolition involving roof materials All materials and painted surfaces were in fair/good condition. Except for the garage door, and electrical cabinet, and two decorative trellises, no peeling or detaching painted surfaces were noted, and no urgent actions regarding asbestos or lead-containing paint were noted SIGNATURE The inspection, research, and data discussion noted in this report were completed under my direction. Marc Boogay California Registered Asbestos Consultant November 6, 2006 MBCE 06-1024 Limited Asbestos/Paint Survey, 3131 Levante St, Carlsbad page 1 of 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 INTRODUCTION, BACKGROUND, SCOPE OF WORK 3 2.0 WORK AREA DESCRIPTION 3 3.0 INVESTIGATIVE METHODS 4 3.1 Sampling Protocols 4 3.2 Laboratory Analytical Methods 4 4.0 RESULTS OF INVESTIGATION 4 5.0 DISCUSSION, CONCLUSION 4 6.0 LIMITATIONS 5 APPENDIX I APPENDIX II APPENDIX III APPENDIX IV OVERALL SITE PLAN SCHEMATIC ACBM SAMPLE LOCATIONS SCHEMATIC ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE LOG SHEETS ACBM SAMPLE LABORATORY REPORT MBCE 06-1024 Limited Asbestos/Paint Survey, 3131 Levante St, Carlsbad page 2 of 5 1.0 INTRODUCTION, BACKGROUND, SCOPE OF WORK This report represents a limited survey of asbestos-containing building materials (ACBMs) and for paint condition at the address 3131 Levante Street in Carlsbad, California (the "site"). Efforts described herein derive from a contract dated October 20, 2006 between City of Carlsbad Engineering Department (the Client) and Marc Boogay Consulting Engineer (MBCE). Elements from the scope of work in that contract are transcribed as follows: • Inspection for the presence of asbestos-containing materials and for condition of painted surfaces. • Sampling of building materials in up to twenty-five locations. • Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy. • For each of the above subjects, analysis of the results of inspections and other research, discussion of information All resultant narrative, etc, will be presented in a combined, illustrated report. 2.0 WORK AREA DESCRIPTION For purposes of this report, Levante Street is taken to run east-west, with perpendicular directions "north" and "south" The site buildings were located on the south side of Levante Street in Carlsbad, California; an overall site schematic is presented as Appendix I. The site was comprised of two prefabricated/"kit" buildings, a garage and a quarters-building, and their surrounding parking lot/patio areas. Between the two buildings was a paved area with two decorative trellises on north and south sides. The trellises were constructed with painted wood Sampled building materials were limited to floor covering, ceiling tiles, walls, insulations, ducting, and roof materials associated with the quarters building The west-most building was the garage; this was of prefabricated metal construction, including metal walls, ceiling, a metal roll-up door, and an exposed Portland cement concrete (PCC) floor An electrical cabinet was on the building's east side No materials were identified that were suspected to contain significant amounts of asbestos No samples were taken from this building Paint on structural steel and the building's outer skin, the electrical cabinet, and the garage door here was deemed most likely to contain lead The east-most building was for quarters and consisted of three small bedrooms, a large room consisting of both kitchen and living room areas, and a single office All sampling was done for materials observed in this building Sampling locations are as shown on the site schematic presented as Appendix II The building had an electric water heater and packaged heating/ventilating/air-conditionmg unit No samples from these features were taken MBCE 06-1024 Limited Asbestos/Paint Survey, 3131 Levante St, Carlsbad page 3 of 5 Individual fixtures in both buildings, e g., light fixtures, fans, a stove/oven, heating and air- conditionmg units, and electric cabinets were present, and interior elements of these were not sampled. Many surfaces, e.g., wallboard, had no paint Typical paint was noted on other surfaces. All observed paint appeared to be in good condition, except for two decorative trellises, an electrical cabinet, and the garage door. 3.0 INVESTIGATIVE METHODS 3.1 Sampling Protocols Samples were taken by prying the surfaces with bladed sampling instruments. Where possible, efforts were made to retrieve full-depth specimens, including underlying layers The resulting samples were then placed in individual polyethylene bags with press-fit closures. These were labeled noting project identification, date, sample number, and consultant identification. Samples were assigned numbers in a generally randomized order to minimize potential for laboratory bias and delivered to an appropriate laboratory for analysis. Tools were cleaned between sampling, to minimize the potential for cross-contamination. Samples were taken from ceiling materials, from wall materials, from bathroom wall and ceiling materials, from synthetic floor covering, insulation and duct material, and from the roof Log sheets describing site materials are presented in Appendix III. No paint samples were taken. 3.2 Laboratory Analytical Methods Sample bags were delivered to LA Testing in South Pasadena, California, for analysis Polarized light microscopy (PLM) was specified as the testing method to be employed 4.0 RESULTS OF INVESTIGATION The laboratory report is presented as Appendix IV All materials sampled were in generally good condition, presenting minimal signs of age or other degradation Asbestos was not detected, except on the roof, where asbestos was detected in all but one of the specimens. Painted surfaces were generally in good condition, however, peeling/detaching was noted in paint of the garage door, an electrical cabinet, and the two decorative trellises 5.0 DISCUSSION, CONCLUSION i Results indicated asbestos as present in roof material and associated mastics Other materials sampled, synthetic floor covering, wall materials, ceiling tiles, and ducting/insulation did not appear to contain asbestos MBCE 06-1024 Limited Asbestos/Paint Survey, 3131 Levante St, Carlsbad page 4 of 5 It is recommended that demolition include use of an asbestos-removal contractor for the roofing. In the event other suspect materials are encountered during demolition, they should be also handled as ACBMs unless sampling is preformed and demonstrates otherwise During demolition, it is recommended that specific fixtures, e g , electric cabinets and the stove, and those for lighting, heating/air-conditioning units, other fixtures to keep them intact during removal; these should be re-used or recycled professionally where possible. Note that this report is not intended to replace a design for asbestos abatement prior to renovation or demolition, documented work procedures should be used for any asbestos abatement. Legal requirements exist which require disclosure of such information to occupants/tenants and service workers and contractors who may encounter the materials or disturb them in their activities Legal counsel should be sought to establish how such disclosures should be made. In the event use of the site buildings is to continue, an Operations & Maintenance Plan is recommended. This would document the locations and types of ACBMs and would formally assign elements of scheduled remspection and limited janitorial or repair work as could involve those materials. Further assessment is recommended for detaching/peeling paint and associated dust on the garage door, the electrical cabinet, and the two decorative trellises Samples should be taken and analyzed for lead content. If found to meet criteria for "lead-based paint," detaching paint and/or dust should be removed by specially licensed contractors, with special precautions against release and exposure and with special disposal for wastes generated in such remediation. Other painted surfaces were not deemed to require special immediate attention; however, they should be handled as though they were lead-containing, with precautions taken during demolition, not to generate dust or fumes as could expose demolition workers, neighbors, or passers-by to lead-containing vapor or dust. 6.0 LIMITATIONS This work only involved only the areas and materials described In the event other materials are encountered as part of remodeling or demolition efforts, additional assessment will be necessary The assumption that all materials of similar appearance are identical is not necessarily justified. Materials may actually have been installed at different times or even be the products of different manufacturers This work did not include medical or toxicological services and did not assess any specific threats relating to diseases or other aspects of human contact with asbestos fibers MBCE 06-1024 Limited Asbestos/Paint Survey, 3131 Levante St, Carlsbad page 5 of 5 APPENDIX I OVERALL SITE PLAN SCHEMATIC Follows this page MBCE 06-1024 Limited Asbestos/Paint Survey, 3131 Levante St, Carlsbad APPENDICES N approx. scale 1-in. = 30-ft. Quarters Bldg. Overall Site Plan APPENDIX II ACBM SAMPLE LOCATIONS SCHEMATIC Follows this page. MBCE 06-1024 Limited Asbestos/Paint Survey, 3131 Levante St, Carlsbad APPENDICES N Quarters Bldg. Interior Sampling approx. scale 1-in. = 20-ft. Quarters Bldg. Roof Sampling kitchen and living room bathroom 2 bathroom 1 Sampling Plans LEGEND Sample Number and Location APPENDIX III ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE LOG SHEETS Follows this sheet. MBCE 06-1024 Limited Asbestos/Paint Survey, 3131 Levante St, Carlsbad APPENDICES Q g ' S « oS o o in °° 1" J6? •2 9_ .. <n U>Q to > N U)ooCM O CO O «4_ins "SL ETOID inin 2Q_ <D 2OOu_ m inUJ 4-i in Accessc.O-u cOU _x _a .2 u_ o 4-i TOU O wa.E TOm g Q_t_Om<uQ "TO U4->TO 0 Z JZ O u_z 4-iWin0 u 4-inUJ 13 TOo.a "TO TO4-i Oi_D_ - II U_ ^. X TO 'o -an -C4J O Z c ~o « o <J CM r W u_z o c > 'o w in .G 0z <u -u c suspended ceilXCM CO T: u_z Bathroom # \oo M— U JC 1 "o (0X t- g5 - x: u_z Bathroom #2s= O IDm _TO cu in i: O n_ z Bedroom #2u 4_i C suspended ceilXCM u, t: O u_z Bedroom #3o o<J N i: O u_z CntrywayJO 4-i C «U U in m XCM 03 - O u_z X1 TO 'o c Om oo o 4-iw Xm X t_io » - O u_z "u L_ n 8 inTO 4-ir>Om oo u 4-iM 4-i CXm 'o «X TO O o IT O u_z X1 TO 6 Th-inTO «' O4-1 in 4-iU D - 31 u_•z. 'o 2 4-i U 4-imTOUJ UJ m TOU CM H U-z oo 4-i o 4-i o 4-i in fi-nsU X_TO 1Q 1 CD ro M—O TOD_ OO ooCM OCO -OO ns D "SL nsm inino CMo o o (t uC" "o u_ c*in j 1L 5<U inmn < cO cO(J 4-1 .5 it O u w a. Ensm /latenal Description^. o2 • i: 3i u_ 2 =*t=Bedroomjy c U <u c in m XCM ^ 1 0 u_ <u "o 'o heast corner4-1 Oin opnetary wall boardo_ in :n O IL.2 "oO East centralMasticU) n 0 u_ 2 of kitchenleast corner-u o2 0O o -C4-1 "o L. XJ5 O O N UMBER NOT USEDoo 3T <J u_2 14—Oo oo o u ILJ OJ ^J in CT5 r 0 u_2 co Bedroom<u suspended ceiling tXCM O CM - Q ILJm=> o 2 ILJ[Q 2 CM T: 0 u_2 X i ns 1 UU opnetary wall boardD_ CM CM r: O u_ 2 =*fc Bathroomo_g o 4-1 -1= t5i_u ns O CO CM 3= 0 u_ 2 Dathroomstic/fiberglass ceilingnstt_ ^. CM * H (J) u_ X 1ns 31 loof insulation liner(fiberglass/foil)in CM r O u_ 2 'oO i 4-1 o MasticU) CM TSOo I E .S8 1« fcji ^jo -a4_i TO _>. J: £ = " u ro 'o CM <uc^njD_ II •= 7 o 5 u_m 2in ou in u U)oO CXI 6 CO -UO nsQ "5. Era inin<0 CM O O oz u<u <u n C C1 m irU- 4-* f Q/ in 1 o ou 4J -§ s_U_ g ^si Erom o 4-1sx um Q 1 4-1 O 2 ^ 0 =tfc room4-1reCD 1 1 ^.2 P"o_ NCM x: O u_ CM=fc roomns CD 1 "TO ^,TO a.P Q_ cQCM (TiCM 0 CO CO CM CO CO CO CO m CO CO N CO co CBCO TSO ETO-c Hit u c ^ u10 c M- o_Q U O O <U C ™| 8 g 33 i_ — "v. O i. ro 'o CO TOD_ £ U S ^ = « "S II « = fe u- c_-a & 8 -° < ou APPENDIX IV ACBM SAMPLE LABORATORY REPORT Follows this page. MBCE 06-1024 Limited Asbestos/Paint Survey, 3131 Levante St, Carlsbad APPENDICES ; • : 159 Pasadena Avenue South Pasadena, CA S1030 : j '--) Phone (323) 2j4-9980 Fax (323) 254-9982 Email pasadenalapianaies'ir'a com Attn Jody Stryker Boogsy Consuttir-jg 325 SVSain Street V'.sta, CA S2084 Fa> (760) 407-4QO.S Phcr.a (760) 40"-4000 Project 06-1024 ' LEVANTE-3131 Customer D Cu'£TCrr.6r PO Received LA Testing P'c Analysis Date Report Date 323OOG50 10/3' /OS S 03 ',f, 3206U671 11/7/2Q06 HP/2006 Asbestos Analysis of Bulk SVIateriaSs via EPA 600/R-93/116 IVSethod using Polarized Light Microscopy Sample Location L-1 Entry Closet 320614671 000) L-2 CB Hallway 1-2 M Ha'ivay 3206146? ' C002fl L-3 Liwng Room 320614671 0003 L-4 LINO Bathroom #1 320S14S71 0004 L-4 M Bathroom #1 1-5 Bathroom #2 3206 1467 1 0005 1-6 Bedroom #1 :2D6 146? 1-0006 Non-Asbestos Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous Tan 10% Cellulose 90% Non-fibrous (other) Non- Fibrous Homogeneous Brown 100% Non-fibrous (other) Non- Fibrous Homogeneous Ta" 100% Non-fibrous (other) Non- Fibrous Homogeneous White/Gray 30% Cellulose 50% Non-fibrous (olher) Non-Fibrous 20% Glass Heterogeneous Gray/Tan 30% Cellulose 70% Non-fibrous (other) Non- Fibrous Heterogeneous Tan 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (other) Non-Fibrous Homogeneous White/Yellow <1% Cellulose 20% Non-fibrous (other) Fibrous 80% Glass Homogeneous White/Gray 30% Cellulose 50% Non-fibrous (other) Fibrous 20% Glass Homogeneous Asbestos % Type None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Analyst(s) Rafrfc Vartanian, PhD (32) or other approved signatory LM-1 159 Pasadena Avenue, South Pasadena CA S1030 Phone (323) 254-9SSC cax (323) 254-9*82 Email pasadenElaotSlalestino. com fttir- Jody Stryke1" Boogay 325 Mam Street Vista, CA S2084 Fax (760) 407-40CM Pro,ect 05-1024 / LEVAMTE-3131 Phone (760) 4C?-iOQO Customs- ID Cus'otne, PO Received L; Testing Ode iO/31/Q6 S OOA'vl :2061J671 LA Testing Froi Ana'ysis Date 11/7/2006 Report Date 11/7/2006 Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA SOO/R-S3/11S Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Non-Asbestos Asbesto Sample Location Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous % Type L-7 CB Bedroom #2 3206 f 4671 0007 L-7M Bedroom #2 3!06146?1 0007A L-8 Entry Way 3206146T1 0003 L-9LINO Hallway 320614671-0009 L-9 M Hallway 320e«6/'»0009fl L-10 Kitchen 320S1467' 0010 L-11 Hallway 3206 1467 1-00 11 L-12 Roof 3206HSrt CO'? Brown Non- Fibrous Homogeneous , Tan Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Gray/White 30% Cellulose Non-Fibrous 10% Glass Heterogeneous Gray/Black 30% Cellulose Non- Fibrous Heterogeneous Brown 2% Cellulose Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Brown/Gray 35% Cellulose Non- Fibrous Heterogeneous Brown/Silver <1% Cellulose Fibrous 90% Glass Homogeneous Gray/Black 2% Cellulose Non- Fibrous 5% Glass Heterogeneous 100% Non-fibrous (other) None Detected 100% Non-fibrous (other) None Detected 60% Non-fibrous (other) None Detected 70% Non-fibrous (other) None Detected 98% Non-fibrous (other) None Detected 65% Non-fibrous (other) None Detected 10% Non-fibrous (other) None Detected 90% Non-fibrous (other) 3% Chrysolite Analyst(s) Rafik Vartanian, Ph D (32) or other approved signatory Due to magnificaiion {imifations inherent in PLM asbestos fibers in dimensions below tne resolution capability of CLM may not be clever-tea Samples reported as< \% or none detected rray require addilicnal testing bvTEM to ccnfiim asbeSiDS quanaties The above test report relates only to the items tested and maw not be reproduced in any form without the express written approval of LA Testing LA Testing s liability is iirmted to the cost of analysis LA Testmgbears no responsibility for samp'e collection activities or analytical method limitation s tnterpreia'ion and use of lest results are the responsibility of the client The test results contained within this repon meet the requirements cf WELAC unless otherwise noied Samples recei/eoin good condition unless otherwise noted Samples lecai/sd in good condition unless otherwise no'ed Analysis performed tr, LA Testing (NVtfiP #200232 0) ™___ -*LM-1 159 Pasadena Avenue, South Pasaaena. CA 91030 Phone {323} 254-9966 Fix (323) 254 9382 Email pasaciepalabiataegirg com Afn Eoogay < 32B Mam Street VJsta, CA S2084 Fa« (760) 407-100" Phone (760) 407-400C Project 06-1024/LEVANTE-3131 Custcrner ID C2BOCG5C1 CuEto-ne-PO Received 10/31 OS 9 CO riA LA Testing Orae- 320514c71 LA Testing Prof Analysis Date 11/7/2006 Report Date 11/7/2005 Asbestos Analysis of Bulk JV&terials via EPA 600/R-93/11G Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Sample Location L-13 Roof L-14 Bedroom #1 320S14671 0014 L-15 Kitchen L-16 Roof L-17 Kitchen Appearance Black Non-Fibrous Homogeneous White/Gray Non- Fibrous Homogeneous Gray Non- Fibrous Homogeneous Black Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Gray Non- Fibrous Homogeneous % <1% 20% 30% 5% 20% 2% 30% Non-Asbestos ; Fibrous % Non-Fibrous Cellulose 80% Non-fibrous (other) Glass Cellulose 65% Non-fibrous (other) Glass Cellulose 80% Non-fibre js (other) Cellulose 93% Non-fibrous (other) Cellulose 70% Non-fibrous (other) Asbestos % Type None Detected None Detected None Detected 5% Chrysolile None Detected L-18 Number Not Ussd Not Submitted L-19 Entrance Brown/Black Non- Fibrous Heterogeneous 2% Cellulose 30% Glass 68% Non-fibrous (other)None Detected L-20 Bedroom #3 White/Gray Non- Fibrous Heterogeneous 30% Cellulose 20% Glass 50% Non-fibrous (other)None Detected Analyst(s) Rafifc Vsrtan&n, Ph D (32) or other approved signatory Due to magnification umita'ions inherent in °LM asbestos fibers in dimensions below tne resolution capability of PLM may not ce detected Samples reported as < 1% or none detected may lequire additional lestmg bvTEM to confirm asbestos quantities The above test report relates only to the items tested and ma-/ not be reproduced in any form withobtthe e/press written approval of LA Testing LA Testing s liability is limited to the cost of analysis LA Testmgbears no responsibility'or sample collect on activities or anal/Heal method limitations Inlerprelation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client The test resulls contained .vitfttn tfiis report rreedhe requirements of NELAC unless otherwise noted Samples recei/ed in good condition unless otherwise noted Samples .ecei/ed in good condition unless otherwise noted Analysis performed by LA Testing INVLfiP #20023? 0) LM-1 159 Pasadena Avenue, South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone (323) 254-6868 Fix (323) 254-S982 Email pasadenaiabgjlalesinq can* 16 >r Jody Stryker Boogay Consuming 326 Mam Street Vista. CA S2084 Fa> (750) 407-4004 Project 05-1024 / LEX'AMTE-3131 Phone (760) 407-iDOO Cuc-toneriC C230065C '"-LStcmer PO Fstfvec -,QC'126 = 21 LA Te3t'ng Ora~r 32C614S71 LA Testing Prq Analysis Date Report Date 11/7/2006 Asbestos Analysis of Buik Materials via EPA 600/R-33/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Non-Asbestos Asbestos Sample Location Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous % Type L-21 3206 14 67' 002 / L-22 320614671 0022 L-23 L-24 L-25 3206146710025 L-26 3206M67I-C0.26 L-27 12Q614S7 1-0027 L-28 3206 t«er i cc28 Number Not Used Hallway Brown/White 20% Cellulose Non- Fibrous Heterogeneous Bsihroom #1 Brown/Gray 30% Ce»uiose Non- Fibrous Heterogeneous Bathroom #1 While/Yellow 40% Glass Fibrous Heterogeneous Hallway Blac!c/SiM>r/YeJlow 20% Cellulose Fibrous 20% Glass Heterogeneous Roof Black 2% Cellulose Non- Fibrous Heterogeneous Bathroom #1 Brown/Tan 20% Cellulose Non- Fibrous Heterogeneous Bathroom #2 Brown/Tan 15% Cellulose Non- Fibrous Heterogeneous Not Submitted 80% Non-fibrous (other) None Detect*** 70% Non-fibrous (other) None Detected 60% Non-fibrous (other) None Detected 60% Non-fibrous (other) None Detected 93% Non-fibrous (other) 5% Chrysotile 80% Non-fibrous (other) None Detected 85% Non-fibrous (other) None Detected Analyst(s) Rafik Vartanian, Ph D (32) or other approved signatory Due to magnification limitsfons inherent rn PLM asbestos fioers in dimensions below tiie resolution capsbidty of PLM may not be deterred Samples reported as * 1% or none detected may require addtconsl res'jng byTEM to confirm asbestos quantities The above test report relates only to the items tested and may not be reproduced in an/form without the express wniten approval of LA Testing LA Testing s liability is limited to The cost of analysis LA Testingbears no responsibility for semple collection activities or analytical method iirniiaiions , interpretation aid use of test results are fhe responsibility of the client The test results remained witfMn this report meet the requirements of NEL AC unless otheovise noted Samples recei/ed in good condition unless otherwise noted Samples receit'ad in good condition unless otherwise noted Analysis performed by LA Testing 1NVIAP #2002530) THIS IS THE LAST PAGE OF THE REPORT. APPENDIX D RESOURCE AGENCY PERMITS (Refer to Section 7-5.1, Resource Agency Permits, of the Supplemental Provisions for Specific Contractor Requirements) U. S Fish and Wildlife Service Carlsbad Fish and Wildlife Office 6010 Hidden Valley Road Carlsbad, California 92011 (760)431-9440 FAX (760) 431-5901 California Department of Fish and Game South Coast Region s 4949 Viewridge Avenue San Diego, California 92123 (858)467-4201 FAX (858) 467-4299 In Reply Refer To FWS-SDG-3386.2 M n vMr. Don JSue Acting Planning Director City of Carlsbad 1635 Faraday Avenue Carlsbad, California 92008-7314 Re: Minor Adjustment to the City of Carlsbad /Fieldstone/La Costa Associates Habitat Conservation Plan/Natural Community Conservation Plan (HCP/NCCP) for Fire Station No. 6, City of Carlsbad, San Diego County, California (CUP 05-13) Dear Mr. Neu: The California Department of Fish and Game (Department) and the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (Service), hereafter collectively referred to as the Wildlife Agencies, have reviewed your May 1,2006, request for a minor adjustment to the City of Carlsbad/Fieldstone/La Costa Associates Habitat Conservation Plan/Natural Community Conservation Plan (Fieldstone HCP/NCCP) to allow construction of Fire Station No. 6, in the City of Carlsbad, San Diego County, California (CUP 05-13). We have also reviewed the proposed project's consistency with the North San Diego County Multiple Habitat Conservation Plan (MHCP), and the City's Subarea Habitat Management Plan (City HMP). The comments in this letter are based on the information provided in the request for a minor amendment; meetings held August 2 and September 6, 2006, between the City and Wildlife Agencies; a letter dated October 18, 2006, from the City summarizing previous discussions and clarifying project impacts and mitigation; the Agencies' knowledge of sensitive and declining vegetation communities in San Diego County, and our participation in regional conservation planning efforts, including the Fieldstone HCP/NCCP, MHCP, and City's HMP. The proposed project consists of the construction of a fire station, access road from the new Rancho Santa Fe Road (including some parking spaces), and associated sewer and water pipelines (Figure 1). The proposed project site is bounded by the old Rancho Santa Fe Road to the west, and vegetated areas within the Fieldstone HCP/NCCP preserve to the north and south, and the new Rancho Santa Fe Road to the east (Figure 2). The fire station site is on a City-owned parcel that is surrounded by (but not a part of) the Fieldstone HCP/NCCP preserve, while most of the access road and all of the pipeline footprint would occur within the Fieldstone HCP/NCCP TAKE .IP uo r.-i.v 'ou-toiaau^ LD riDti A:>U TiiL.uL.irn Mr Don Nue (FWS-SDG-3386.2) Page 2 preserve (Figure 2). The fire station access road and pipelines would be constructed within existing easements with the City, San Diego Gas and Electric, and Yallecitos Water District that cross the Fieldstone HCP/NCCP preserve (Figure 3). Sensitive animals are present on or adjacent to the project site.. These animals include the federally threatened coastal California gnatcatcher (Pohoptila californica californica), which was reported in the vicinity of the project area. Due to lack of suitable habitat, gnatcatcher are not expected to breed onsite but may forage on-site, especially within the revegetated CSS within the old Rancho Santa Fe Road, and breed in adjacent CSS. The California horned lark (Eremophila alpestris actid), a California Species of Special Concern, was observed onsite. The site also has potential to serve as foraging habitat for raptors such as red-tailed hawk (Buteo jamaicensis). Additionally, the San Diego horned lizard (Phrynosoma coronation blainvilhi), also a California Species of Special Concern, was observed just outside the project boundary. The proposed fire station access road and pipelines will permanently impact 0.83 acre of the Fieldstone HCP/NCCP preserve, including 0.23 acre of revegetated coastal sage scrub within the old Rancho Santa Fe Road (Figure 4, Exhibit A). The proposed fire station will permanently impact a 0.51-acre area, including 0.17 acre of disturbed valley needlegrass grassland (VNG), 0 04 acre non-native grassland (NNG) and 0.31 acre of disturbed land (Exhibit A). The following mitigation measures will be implemented by the City to offset these impacts: 1) Permanent impacts TO 0.83 acre of the Fieldstone HCF/NCCF preserve, including 0.23 acres of revegetated coastal sage scrub, from the fire station access road and pipelines, will be mitigated by restoration, maintenance and monitoring of 1.13 acres CSS revegetation on the east half of old Rancho Santa Fe Road south and west of the fire station site (Figure 5). The revegetation will consist of 0.82 acre of existing revegetated CSS installed two years ago for erosion control after removing the east half of old Rancho Santa Fe Road; and 0.31 acre of new CSS revegetation within the old Rancho Santa Fe Road truck bypass lane. The City will revegetate with the same non-irrigated CSS seed mix used for the existing revegetation according to a biologist-prepared habitat restoration, maintenance, and monitoring plan. This plan will detail any grading and planting specifications, as well as maintenance and monitoring procedures. The plan will also outline yearly success criteria and remedial measures should the mitigation effort fall short of the success criteria. The proposed plan will be reviewed and approved by the Wildlife Agencies prior to issuance of grading or building permits. 2) Permanent impacts to 0.10 acre NNG from the fire station and access road will be mitigated a 0.5.1 ratio; 0.17 acre VNG from the fire station will be mitigated at a 3:1 ratio; and 0 30 acre of disturbed land will be mitigated at a 1:1 ratio Mitigation will be out-of-kind, and will occur through pre-debiting and preservation of 0.86 acre of credit at the City's proposed Lake Calavera Mitigation Bank, leaving 183.45 acres left for credit towards future City projects. 3) The City will adhere to all mitigation measures described in the Carlsbad HMP and the Fieldstone/La Costa HCP. Further, a monitoring biologist will perform a minimum of three focused surveys, on separate days, to determine the presence of gnatcatchers in the project impact footprint. Surveys will begin a maximum of seven days prior to performing vegetation clearing/grubbing and one survey will be conducted the day r i on I->L> i' i i Mr. Don Nue (FWS-SDG-3386.2) Page 3 immediately prior to the initiation of remaining work. If any gnatcatchers are found within the project impact footprint, the biologist will direct construction personnel to begin vegetation clearing/grubbing in an area away from the gnatcatchers. In addition, the biologist will walk ahead of clearing/grubbing equipment to flush birds towards areas of CSS to be avoided. It will be the responsibility of the biologist to ensure that gnatcatchers will not be injured or killed by vegetation clearing/grubbing. The biologist will also record the number and location of gnatcatchers disturbed by vegetation clearing/grubbing. The Wildlife Agencies concur with the above proposed minor adjustment, and have determined that the project is consistent with the MHCP and City's HMP, if the proposed mitigation measures are implemented. We appreciate the opportunity to review the City's request for a minor boundary adjustment. If you have any questions regarding this letter, please contact Marci Koski (Service) at (760) 431-9440, or David Mayer (Department) at (858) 467-4234. Sincerely, Therese O'RourKe /j^ Michael J. Mulligan Assistant Field Supervisor Deputy Regional Manager U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service California Department of Fish and Game cc: Scott Donnell, City of Carlsbad Terry Smith, City of Carlsbad Rosanne Humphrey, Technology Associates Markus Spiegelberg, Center for Natural Lands Management 01/17/2007 15 05 FAX 76P4315902 US FISH AND «ILDLIFE $005 EXHIBIT A- REVISED MITIGATED NEGATIVE DECLARATION TABLES 2 & 3* (Further revisions, prepared 12/8/06, italicized and footnoted) TABLE 2 PROPOSED IMPACTS TO VEGETATION COMMUNITIES AND LAND COVER TYPES (acres) Vegetation Communities/Land Cover Disturbed Valley Needlegrass Grassland Diegan Coastal Sage Scrub (Revegetation) Non-Native Grassland Disturbed Vegetation Ornamental Landscaping Disturbed Land Developed Land TOTAL Permanent Impacts 017 023 0.10 014 007 070 0.091 1.51 Temporary Impacts 003 1.31' 134 Total Impacts 0.17 0.23 0.10 014 0.10 0.70 1.40 285 TABLE 3 MITIGATION FOR IMPACTS TO VEGETATION COMMUNITIES AND LAND COVER TYPES (acres) Permanent Temporary Mitigation Mitigation Vegetation Communities/Land Cover Impacts Impacts Ratio Required Pipeline Alignment Diegan Coastal Sage Scrub (Revegetation) Developed Land Ornamental Landscaping Tntnl Pinelitjp Alionmetit 016* 0 0 n 1ft - 1.31 0.03 1 id 2:12 n/a n/a 032 •0 0 n^? Fire Station Site Disturbed Valley Needlegrass Grassland 0.17 - 3 I3 0.51 Non-Native Grassland 0 04 - 0.513 0 02 Disturbed Land 0304 - 1:13 0.30 Total. Fire Station Site 0515 - - 083 Fire Station Access Road Diegan Coastal Sage Scrub (Revegetation) Developed Land Ornamental Landscaping Non-Native Grassland Disturbed Land Disturbed Vegetation Total, Fire Station Access Road 0.07* 009 007 0.06* 040* 014* 0836 2 I2 — n/a - n/a 05-13 II2 M2 - 014 0 0 003 0.40 0.14 Developed land impact figure corrected to 09 acre ' Mitigation will take place m the form of restoration at specified locations on or adjacent to the site. Impacts to non-native grassland, disturbed land, and disturbed vegetation were previously identified as to be mitigated at Lake Calavera3 Mitigation will take place within the Lake Calavera Mitigation Bank '4 To correct a mapping error, fire station site disturbed land impacts have been reduced 0 01 acre Actual parcel size of fire station site is 0.504 acre Rounding of each different vegetation community impact causes the greater total acreage figure shown. Actual acreage of fire station access road is 0 824 Rounding of each different vegetation community impact causes the greater total acreage figure shown. * These impacts are withm the Fieldstone HCP/NCCP preserve and total 0 83 acre r> sO ^ '' 3E,£,",,, : ; ?«!:ft ' • , * . ^ <N$£ " |H,;:^;'.j^ ou UJ./J. / / £VV I 10 Ub i-AA b Mbil J'iUJLli-t.l!£J UU / r i on *\IMJ T* a. j 01/17/2007 15 08 FA1 760431590;US FISH AND 141010 \w .. ITS 8o_ o D_ 5 o3 off-N 111g 3 1E£|O £ •§Z oap 2cc r>o 2— iu UJ _1 «= E O o c (3 Eo O 2 O5ol_ to i o| co| ffl 55 <D uj UJ otrrxCL (D (0 = E •£•£c *- £O «" 0>¥ Q3 0) feg<"S t> o0 •- ~c o ^ CO 0) *! E_ n <D 1-65o to cr 0. 05 £ -Jo o o O&o _O 03 (Q "c T3 S- Q) -=.__•+-' -312 Q> ""-2-Q.-0tO p C O I *S-«Tf8<| "SiQ C C^ a <o V)co •(D X~«N,us c § * ^C g T> <M2 92 c O'S E tJ"li-5 O CD 1 " c * S 9-11 £ 4S « 55 li£i£ 11 S* S%£OT> 0> "- E £ E ^5 « IIS ^ rod2 S *?«o TJ "_o ', *£ '4> • > J •! TJ <5 n> j TO c 3c-'-gi~ 0 <S|!|tr£ c 0 D)S c fli1" ui^SPo-•* -c «cn>*C rc 5 «>illeS 5 5 aS o e £o - 11il Mitigation Measureo -OGICAL RESOURCESO ffl ~° <nC -z <D§O -™S "0 >.«•*=S § -i-s^Sc c ra e- ° c o>S ® S « "5 o o Illleti Sill 111 8£ o "S § D>§in e « u. t5<2 =5 Q. « j?.*» ns (^i. 2* **~0 3 D>0 „,. ja -~ x. ^o «j"s a gc ». 2 -c oD- O D> ? O •G" ®e"oQ. £L 18= » £ 0 >- 03 =5 0 mw <B — ra n) C3> Y— (^* §'?- ^ ^— ~c *O T3 ^ «o » ° ° | ®-i ?I5^3j*2oo 2 §:s ~ P £Ul nj -2 o> .E ffl Prior to issuance of a building or grading permit, whicheveroccurs first, permanent impacts to dsturbed valleyneedlegrass grassland shall be mitigated al a ratio of 3 1 inaccordance with the City HMP Impacts to 017 acre ofdisturbed valley needlegrass grassland requires the off-sitepurchase of 0 51 acre of mitigation This off-site mitigationshall take place at Lake Calavera, a City owned 262-acresile, or mitigated by the purchase of land elsewhere at anunspecified mitigation site acceptable to the wildlifeagenciesi- </>0)E >. p ,= "ft -° U)C ° c 05R « o to H*io §:*-a! «6 5 8 ^ -£ ° ?§ w§an c Q> fc» */H » -6 Q. <D "~ — rn > -^2 = g*_g o> o «1S - o= ™ S « 8 D- O O) S O o<B 2Qa. a. S c »S o ^_ -5D «= O <Bw S.1*- S.'<tS ^JT— r-S 5 ^ i ill15!!««?lal= o tt S ro ^TZ *S O « r^. **"2 §:52& £UJ «J £ tO O 03 Prior to issuance of a building or grading permit, whicheveroccurs first, permanent impacts to 0.07 acre of revegetatedcoastal sage scrub (unoccupied by CAGN) shall bemitigated at a 1,1 ratio, requiring 007 acre of off-sitemitigation This off-site mitigation shall take place at LakeCalavera, a City owned 262-acre site, or mitigated by thepurchase of land elsewhere at an unspecified mitigation siteacceptable to the wildlife agencies.ci .1 r- _ _ « .E B _, p 9 "Ds c c ^g SCD 9! coto s £ o c R0 (B _ § 0 " £ g-« ® -2| o,-. C CL u> .-. t; fflp o c S) PEwCL O E W CL S -C <*~ ° cs °SIIIs! Q Q_ T3C <8 ..•2 Itf^l2. -5 S23 §a. O o •n — °> &S 2 c. a 2 "S 'S•ft w o 3 ™ w "5ffl§-o«w§g--^-"S^iS-SSE«!?™|^s£B'gIB B •= = 5,^- - 2" c 5J 2 JS Jj J?"- Uffi 2 gS.§g>"log-3%! •=O(Da'O4-<B O>*-Sp>S>S-=n'<i> T=P>l£Ss£5£eEra Because it is likely that work crews would not disturb theentire 2.57 acres proposed, at the completion ofconstruction, a qualified biologist shall conduct an impactassessment within the ROW to document the actualamount of revegetated coastal sage scrub is impacted, tothe satisfaction ol tne Planning Director The actualimpacts shall be mitigated in the form of on-site restoration« ffiI X T3C<Da.CL o5cs Q) iu UJ < Q Z _j I- <a g 3 £ CC 0. Q. < c I TJ 3.£ cIIc E TJ <o o <x *—O)£ 3e 5 T•c o <S n-£S <u Sgcco. g e O 0)'•S = I»I•S i—£ oJ | So>,g cn'S c•=.«!S§1cS S S C Pv ililTO s2 csi E3<0 Ss c_o raensH a n C *"r^Q. o 0 (CONTINUED... )at a 1 1 mitigation ratio in accordance with the City HMThe proposed impact acreage and corresponding rmtigatirequirement is presented below, which is a repeatTable 3 from the project Initial StudyMITIGATION FOR IMPACTS TOVEGETATION COMMUNITIES AND LAND COVER TYPESVegetation MitigationCommunities/Land Impacts Millgation RequiredCovor (acres) Ratio (acres)Disturbed Valley Needlegrass GrasslandPermanent 017 3V 051Diegan Coastal Sage Scrub (Revegatation)Permanent 007 ir 007Temporary' 075 11* 075Non-Native GrasslandPermanent 010 051' 005Disturbed VegetatsonPermanent 014 11' 014Disturbed LandPermanent 070 11* 070Temporary1 001 11* 001<*>CM <N 1 % — I<C 5 'Mitigation will take place within the Lake Calavera MitigationBank'Actual impacts may be less'Mitigaton for temporary impacts will be in the form ot on-siierevegetationn W)0) >-co ** &_ C 01 (D O <0 § T6.S o.S'Sa « •=< s & oo * i ° c| o>E ^ « -6 S. S 2 sigje l*^§CL O D) 5 O Os 2oQ- O. iS c >- u>£ o£ t>3 S t- «"> 2. Q.<o cum cm -S i~c "r- C^ —— C C u_ *X ^5 *a ° S 1 li|f»i §&5^°£iu to £ 15 o to J; -D (D <U != C 0)S? c jc O m t:Prior to issuance ot a buildmg or grading permit, whiche\occurs first, impacts to 0 10acre~of non-native grassiashall be mitigated at a ratio of 051, resulting inrequirement of 0 05 acre This off-site mitigation shal! taplace at La<e Calavera, a City owned 262-acre site,mitigated by the purchase of land elsewhere atunspecified mitigation site acceptable to the wildlagencies,«* 0>CD C0)Q. CL S cc o < a OS o g ts CDo a. §* ^ I ^«£ <J> g S IfM ?5 D) o S; — 'o w O ttlZ DQ K 3> c O Z g -I ozc.2CD55 £^iTl lij KS << Q H ^UJ O3 £a: a.Q- < 1 \ ts ].S 1 1 i> 1i •o m ra 2 0)c 3!tiC o fl)0 o.(.« »eS c ao **• 1 =&!|P*z V ta fe>.D»£ O) Jr C= S 0) ^ 'c £li«II o|?1Oig -« os£Mitigation MeasureQ °o ci— O£ -J3£ 2 0 § <B " £ 3o <B en £ .i I o O s_ r to ,_ c3 O> EW C <o ,_ •K2 -5 D- 0> £ r J c'le 2 ffi (g *ts O o_ "5 o> § o i" 20CL Q. is.3 'S -2 — E E ZI o * » ffl"5 <5— 3 U .9 „ -D0) <o ¥ ••= 42 m3 2S= S 0 I » Q. ° <tt 2. 0 iS « o w £0 Prior to issuance of a building or grading permit, whicheveroccurs first, permanent impacts to disturbed vegetation(014 acre of impact) and disturbed land (070 acre ofimpact) shall be mitigated at a 1 1 ratio, totaling 0 84 acreThis mitigation shall be fulfilled at the City's Lake CalaveraMitigation Bank, to the satisfaction of the Planning DirectorThose impacts shall be mitigated out-of-kmd at a 1 1 ratiobecause, as stated in the HMP (Table 1 1 , page D-1 13), theobjective is to build the preserve system by combiningsmall mitigation requirements into a larger, contiguousareato' o "ro § c° ¥ c fiEC w.-.E'o Eo-ok- O "fz ® tz 5=^0 •= C § SPf: S "? X to 2 I J2 o 2 § g po o >, £ 15 o 35 §. ° e B O £r* o> — SO Q^ cp O (i> o QH«S?I5D-ow CL $ ,c: c?o w S&L,~ 5 °- § ^ S J if.c 2 2 <s to _§ o a. "o o) 5 o T- *c-"O ^ T> § o =3 ^3 (D "^ OT "^ 5> IS Is Si O ,_. o *o Q. ^_ o a) <£ o) - "S o $ 2 ^ ^-^ E'^ "to c Is •*-§(J r^^o"^"^*— O -S Q> -*~f tn '~~ >j (Q ^y wJ ij;RB IS1 3 z 3 •= >,z c "S £ oi^'g-g eOm£!£Ojc^5c II8S. oosS.zoIo|Prior to issuance of a building or grading permit, whicheveroccurs first, a qualified biologist shall conduct a focusedCAGN survey to determine the presence or absence of thespecies within the HCP/OMSP habitat located adjacent tothe project site If the habitat is not occupied by CAGN,there are no further grading restrictionsi|to ts § •£ 35 E *o E ^ ~O Us. HIO CL <£> O <B O S II of 8a. o <o a. ^ j= j«; i-e 2 J3! —• | c Q.O § c c5cOQ->^ e £ - c 1 e?* 2 £>2cS)S2?'m — O§5 8E °E o>f o c"O (0^ a> 228E g•?r •« c2 = oD.OO „£ -5 in tS 2 §• |_||^|||_gfl| S-§ S^°. 2«^S^ c ^-n W^^"w ffi <D C^^2 QJ 01 /n f*^ c o c^ w 05 cJ w g^<^-8§ §ZO^o o.dj^'^ cSwCJ^™ ^a.^lsS'^loSS If habitat within the HCP/OMSP is occupied by CAGN andI construction is proposed to be conducted during thebreeding season of February 15 to July 31, a qualifiedbiologist shall conduct a pre-construction clearance surveywithin one week prior to construction, to determine whetherthe CAGN is nesting up to 500 fee! of the constructionzone, to the satislaction of the Planning Director*•• Q)O5 I X T> Q.CL CDO D_Q_oO) i 2- fD" <n i" s in r->0 Q <DC OoDC CL O oa.UJQC Q (3 2DC O EO2 ZO C5 Os O9_ 0 CD -S CB ffi S UJ 03 1 o5 § -§ § CD c> o CO CD . . LUUJ 1— | g I $(i i O 3 £ CC Q_D_ < II *tH I onitoring aReportingedure?isc •= g«1i f MitigationProcedureo i|«s j= g> o & CoO-^;,."o>2,SQ. 5 oila.o« E ST>~S£ScoirmocSr;w;:gOo § oco 8-_-°|o «"5 2 3 "o 01 5 o 0- o en S o gl II 0-0 11§gO o UJo "Oc(Q S0 g ® £ 8 |-«> £S * o i|« 5 — E^- -= IA m o-S co S Q- o •,E c -acro 1 S S-§ c c088 OJ 0 1 ^ *^ <o o 5 ••••— - «> = to ^ ^op"dK:S2i:>,a)U-o.S(OcnEo.^i>esrarots T boundari ofnt to the grading areaist, ar>d a fence shallconstruction vehicles,hecelogibyirect•s: ^^ 2 tu g.^-0 g » fr^lll• <B « - -j-c to-5 2 JS: (B-5 § wO. 3 ^ 0> (TTJ 0) HI-** i — ~ J5imby vento §=5 8-S tDCD I ~a Q.CL O <oo a. Q> 1 I D_ 2 m ONl oc CC a m cc o azccg zo 5a o <1>v> ,-E »ino a. o S 1 <D <£{£<J5 Is!Z 03 •*. F 2 § £ CD O•z. cg 2CO u_ IJJ H2 << Q h- < •2 8o £rr a.a. < ra •oc O> !- •.jsri o 2, i Pa c0 0) ifi*~ > ^cS 5*0 E 2 o t cS | ^ *S c §§ 11 w Csi £a01a01 _o o i o 'oco ° ra8Eil 0^ « | Sill •a c c °« •§ o-i f>- 3 O3- ~D o UJO T!C _o o flSo -te 2 oa. o O•a £ c « 1 *-o-|m -!•§.£ °E S2 ,. J W _ OU-Dunng construction, staging and stockpile areas shall takeplace only on the paved portion of old Rancho Santa FeRoad Although the paved portion of old Rancho Santa FeRoad is within a conservation area, this area is an existingdeveloped area and is also located within variouseasements and ROWs Trash that could attract scavengersthat could prey on sensitive wildlife shall be maintained andkept to a minimum Trash containers with animal-resistantlids shall be provided on the site durmq construction?confirmnentation ofires.|O m to*- 7; toQ g-g0. .£ E c o>.g TJ 3 01 g § ^Q ra £ S-l | CL O 8 0}o>5 §o s ET?Jr .2 g **" J3 Q<D CO = •5 - >£ S2 °- mC CL CLU CO «During grading and construction adjacent to conservedhabitat, a qualified biologist shall monitor the adjacenthabitat for dust accumulation, erosion ol dirt, or otherdisturbances If disturbance to the conserved habitat isidentified, corrective measures shall be taken immediately^ •5 "ro xr~ ?> ~ r—i 1 E i <= 111 If.o 5 o 005 a. O i? Q- £ o <Q CQ"" § D>§ | Jj 0. § - fef € o i CL "5 cJ> $ O i'z 22 LU 0. O 0 T5 ^ "5 Jg § |x ll| IS IfilwS Js 5 <aCD « <D ra a) 5^ O 3 °> D)O <2 -o <2 § § a. x nix: LU ra ._ <c E Prior to issuance of a building or grading permit, the CNLMshall approve the hydroseed mix proposed for all disturbedareas including along the access road and old RanchoSanta Fe Roadsi |1* "c a <BO <S fnocx; °"2 g£ O S W r"*i0. o 3 O mo .i ° I§ 0)§« c <j> v- 755 .« -6 Q- <l> j= S'S^ "i 3 Q- "6 Cn 5 O is"i0. 1^1 O & y)o_ o r) -^ rn TJm ^ — tn„_ > U. O $ ~ Jc| 8 | « -o 1 || ggl § § c| £cg£5co|S §^=£05 ^ £-° " O-(DD532§'o8 During construction, disturbance of conserved habitat shallbe avoided to the maximum extent possible Wheredisturbance is unavoidable and has been authorized, itshall be mitigated by restoration of the affected sitesRovegetation plans shall be prepared for Ihe approval ofthe City prior to such disturbances occurrng In addition,the location and installation of utilities shall be plannedcooperatively with the City, USFWS, and CDFG to minimizeand mitigate the impacts of such projects on species ofconcern and conserved habitat Examples of disturbancesthat may be unavoidable include4•5 0)O3(0a. X "Ocfl)a.a. o Q_ D_ S a. IW-S§ 03 in r-x ° 9o P-N . CO Ois >^-o w GOOOC o £Z CQ F S Ct 13o za ujIU _j oz (3 E z O o o o 03 00 u_ lii S ro 5 -8 so LLJ< 2 I iLLJ O -3 CEO a.oc a.a. < 11 .2 ]?£? iSi l "j •o § raff D) c •cf i~ o 'O Q. ( -= » 2gtCQ. •£. c,2 S"a- 35 c S £ r" > D)Q D)'= Cc o t ° o C£ S «31 8S 0 MitigationProcedureMitigation MeasureQ -^ E J E c£ S £ on c c jo a> OJ o <o° E = " s,»O <1> </) O C» ~ sfi ill co c 03 O C Q.S -2 E 2O Q >; D) 2 ° 52£ w Sos g a «Q o 3> o o gUJ QSo 0.i §"g LUO a O «II 8? 1 I||8 i; | || So^ff^ ^S^^ >CX — O T3 fcj" 0>CONTINUED. ..)(a) temporary noise buffers and fencing adjacent tconserved habitat,(b) fuel modification zones at the edge of conservehabitat,(c) temporary and permanent public facilities for wateelectricity, sewer, gas, and other utilities; and(d) remedial grading for structural purposes, such aeasements, buttresses, and cnb walls•— • n "oco rt* c (~* ^^^ CC ^-* r-To tn ®~ Q) C |5o||s 8 _ -*•- o "H 3 t?) EE *<o c <u w («<2 T5 a. 0) j= o -5 g1 J £ it 'o o> 5 o *j o SoQ_ CL <S o "5 1±Obtain approvalMinor Adjustmenthe HCP/OMSPi: C Q_nor to issuance of a building or grading permit, whicheveccurs first, the use of the 0 65 acre HCP/OMSP opepace would require a Minor Adjustment to the HCP/OMSIs determined by USFWS and CDFGQ- o w o) •<T O O•z o _JoLUO "5 el .£: S"c IE too <5 g> O dj tfl ofSCL i £ 1cdrj o> w •§o 2 _~ °* PO to fc ol "5 Q. LUo c" « 0> S QO *~ Z3 n 2" S c xO_ O o to "^" 03 * LU 8 T) 5 « S> D.OT < ^ , 5, c tior to issuance of a grading permit, construction anesign plans shall comply with the CA Building Code ctate-of-the-art seismic design parameters of the Structu r;ngmeers Association of CA, to the satisfaction of theotechnical consultant (specific seismic desigarameters aie detailed in Appendix C of the Initial Study)JU ~O V) UJ O Q. in "5c c. •-t (0c e: «O C> 03ois 5f|Q- .1 E sc 3 O> <A C= - 2 2 "5 ts 0 13 § *^ •*- (UQ- 0 D. «r B Qw 0. 0 0= o*s id -4-* "§ §"S s a u>•g •- o — E c |l £~S2 g ll^pll 1IPN1C § o "S S E w = -o >.nor to issuance of a building permit, the undocumented fin-site shall be removed and replaced with compactengmeered fill material to the satisfaction of the Citngineer.Q_ O (D CD to CD 0>D> < X•5 Q.Q. COo CLCL <bO) co s ini o DC °- 22s sZ CD fe io z8i aoc o: Q Z QC O zg H C3 P CD d CO 0) LL til" < o. c3 U> S~v0 Q DJ o 1V § -2o UJ <Q I- < 8 ££E CLCL < c1 .11 ]» 1 aJ •ac E»C 3 C t- T3'So fQ ft £>jS 8" °§0:0: o en II S f o>'g cJE ** ®}c *c E c § w _ 0)MitigationProcedureMitigation MeasureQ - •c O <l) ^ I|| a. E £ Sc o o 2 to £ CL "5 Q. •oc03 "p"O flj CJ t" "^a-s S£ 3 § uio_ a 80 £ !2 <u <ij l-g If 1 £ ffi c -n ° B c •—S'woJoc^'oO^jjOQ.— aicDc'SX o o- q>£ E c •§ g>]2 JltflJtlf !?Jg£«§||>l 03 C " C w i/) O g S o-3;"o 8 - « § 3= 8^ 8? !|- Uj -2 CD k — £o<SJlj2c:E-°i:Prior to issuance of a building permit,techniques and grading plans shall crecommendations in Section 60 of tlinvestigation (see Appendix C of the Inspecific recommendations require that tconsultant shall observe onsrte excavatiofield density testing of all compacted fill duconstruction of the project and conduct IEupon completion of the graded pad to deteexpansion potential of finish grade soils^*~ UJ 40 Q § -1 *_: 0> c *5 a> •£§«0 •- <D Q- <D 03 CD (Q E <2 TJ CL (5 t £ '5 S> S 'wT~ f> is JT fc~ n Q Q> §: ^ o O uj 0. O Ensure acquisitionof access easementform RECMCorporation andCNLM(0 C.£ o * •*£ S" c » 6g <u T) § «) 0)Prior to constructing the fire station acce:City of Carlsbad shall acquire an accessRECM Corporation and CNLM03 UJ O **• *O ,J) E jz >. "H 'E 03 0o o> p <o « E = co g) w c Q c" S «Q. E E 15 c Ifo *y0:8- Qu.en -c Q^ Q. c'ufOO Prohibit sirens pnorto entering RanchoSanta Fe Roado g to TJ o 'c2 *: <o 5 -o w a. o o c " "5 § g IT So5"While exiting the fire station, to reduce penoise impacts, emergency vehicles shall bemploying sirens until the vehicles enter neFe Roado> UJE h- _> « g P 0 ? o c <; C 5"£ £ cDells — * >_C7**H <1>c _g 3 lllll oID O uj 0. 0 Secure aninteragencyagreement betweenthe VWD and LWD(3 JS >\ W •= Q r-1 $ c $ ra <*Prior to connecting the project to the northinteragency agreement between the VWDbe secured, to the satisfaction of both partiedC4 0>03 CL X T3CCDQ. Q. COo S 5 o ex.I Io 2*UlCCCD CD Ui C5 S O o-J-Jg UJiuCO ^*s cco 0ora. Oz ccoC- LUcc oz (3 "ZccoHE0jj^p ^*0i= gi— s o Q- Q) D. 0) ^> TO >. w •>- X_ OjQ- J£ t ., 0 Q" o" ?- co CJ5 10 "s~"o <o 9_ | o -| .. qj y -S UJ co CD H> 2E ° ^ 0*^^ ^*<£_ ^j- UJ C1 \C; CL -§ <£> O Co "Sc/5 8iT lit ^•z. I— i£ QJ o5 UJ ili ^ 3 151 te 0 >, >UJ O uj 0 £ g £ < g State of CaliforniaCoastal California Gnatcatcheru n o 0 0 California Building Code'H omo I 1o I "c oi California Department of Fish aCity of Carlsbad Civil EngineerCity of CarlsbadCenter for Natural Lands Mana^decibelsn 11 u n n CD 5LL -_._)Otu -TztnOOOO^D c: 51<no'o(DQ COji 3 5 .^ enC c City of Carlsbad Fire DepartmeM Q U. OO"cO ' - Habitat Conservation Plan/iHCP/OMSPHabitat Management Planii a. ILeucadia Water Districtn Q O Oe Q c c CO Q. COIf o -^>>-§>o cc II II oia. cc CDo s</)Vallecitos Water DistrictUnited Stales Fish and WildlifeVWD =USFWS =COoz Q <LU X u_ O Z 3CLX UJ p 3inCOCD E co "S igation measuionitoring a particular_o _a> -QtocoCLtop c.o ro c pT=>E CD ® COQ.-0.i "o ^ COII O 03is-9 aU) = o i Q- r-m po» E»_ -, ^•g S.W cfS S-o43 <-* >-T3 ro S C^ C CSB g s«tlliltio "CD c v- — > CD °0_|S C C o W5a> O) to TO E |> o ^ |ws3-i -3 W)v. *S c -o m '-= ^ fc 0> CDC CD .-" E U gc > £ o p ::gilsol g | E 8 F v 1 IS^elt £ ?0 § w E ~ /— /» Cla>.§2^il||^ CD D>COQ_ X T3 <DQ.Q.